Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 609

Operation Manual

Checkweigher
SSV Series
B Type
with Metal Detector

15th Edition

This manual covers the software versions V5.02 or later.

* Actual products may differ from photographs / pictures / illustrations in this manual.
* Content current as of April 2021.
* All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of
ANRITSU CORPORATION.
* The operational instructions of this manual may be changed without prior notice.

For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
Models Covered by This Manual
This manual is for use with the following models. Please check the model number printed on
the nameplate.
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D, KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D, KWS6265BW2E/3E/4E, KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6003BF2E/3E/4E, KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5203BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E, KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5203BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6005BF3D/5D/6D, KWS6472BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5205BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D, KWS6472BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5205BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6005BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5265BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5205BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6005BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5265BW2E/3E/4E, KWS5205BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6006BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5366BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5206BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6006BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5366BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5206BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5472BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5206BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6006BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5472BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5206BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5476BW4D/5D/6D, KWS5411BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E, KWS5411BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6203BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5577BW4D/5D/6D, KWS5411BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6203BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E KWS5411BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5412BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5412BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6205BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5412BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6206BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5414BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6206BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5414BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5414BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6206BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5414BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6411BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5416BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6411BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5416BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6411BF2E/3E/5E, KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6411BP2E/3E/5E, KWS5416BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6412BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5417BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6412BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6412BF2E/3E/5E, KWS5417BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6412BP2E/3E/5E, KWS5417BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6414BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5522BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6414BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5522BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E, KWS5522BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6414BP2E/3E/5E, KWS5522BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D, KWS5524BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6416BP4D/5D/6D, KWS5524BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E, KWS5524BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6416BP2E/4E/5E, KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6417BP2E/4E/5E

* The suffixes D and E indicate the type of metal detector. D indicates the SSV series with duw type metal
detector, while E indicates SSV series with duw-h type metal detector.

2
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G, KWS5522BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G, KWS5412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5522BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5203BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5205BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5577BW4K/6K/7K/8K KWS5205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6006BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6203BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6205BF3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6206BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6206BF3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5524BF4K/6K/7K/8K,
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5205BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6005BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6006BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6205BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6206BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,

* The R, G and K at the end indicates the type of metal detector. R is the M5 series with a metal detector, G
is the M6-h series with a metal detector, K is the M6-h vertical series with a metal detector.

3
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5522BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5524BP4K/6K/7K/8K
KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G

* The R, G and K at the end indicates the type of metal detector. R is the M5 series with a metal detector,G
is the M6-h series with a metal detector, K is the M6-h vertical series with a metal detector.

4
Introduction
Read the operation manual thoroughly before using the product. Keep the operation manual with the product for
easy reference.

(1) Structure of the operation manual


Title of document Description To be read by
・ Safety information common to all
products
Operation Manual - Manager and equipment
・ Operation information common to
Before Use maintenance personnel
all products
・ Warranty terms

・ Installation
Manager and equipment
Operation Manual (this document) ・ Details on how to operate
maintenance personnel
・ Maintenance

Manager: Personnel who supervises and manages the operators.


Equipment maintenance personnel: Personnel who manages installation, connection, equipment inspection, and
maintenance.
Operator: Personnel who regularly uses this machine.

(2) Symbols used in the text


In this document, the following symbols are used.
Symbol Description

 Indicates another page for reference.

Indicates supplementary notes and related information.

Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXD(SSV series with duw type metal detector).

Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXE (SSV series with duw-h type metal detector).

Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXR (M5 type metal detector).

Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXG (M6-h type metal detector).


Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXK (M6-h vertical type metal detector).
Indicates the type of spanner for the work
7: 7-mm spanner for M4 hexagonal bolts
10: 10-mm spanner for M6 hexagonal bolts
30: 30-mm spanner for M20 hexagonal bolts

Phillips head screwdriver

Flat-bladed screwdriver

Hammer and punch

Indicates the type of hex key for the work


5: 5-mm hex key for a hexagonal set screw

Indicates the works that use a precision screwdriver.

5
Contents
■ Models Covered by This Manual ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2 ● Timing Adjustment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 97

■ Introduction ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 5 ● Adjusting the RJ timingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 99

■ Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 6 ● Auto Settings

1 Basic Operations
■ Safety Symbolsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 8 (Readjusting registered products) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 99

■ SSV Series Checkweighers ■ Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 102

with Metal Detector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 9 ● Saving Data to the USB Memory ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ102

■ Checking the Package Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 10 ● Setting External I/O Signals ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ123

■ Names and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ11 ● Adjusting I/O Timing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ149

■ Description of Operation Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 16 ● Connecting Ethernet (LAN) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ150

■ Other Settings and Adjustments ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 156

1 Basic Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 28 ● Performing an installation check ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ156

2 Advanced Operations
■ Turning on the System for the First Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 29 ● Adjusting Touch Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ156

■ Basic Usage ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Checking Version Info ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ157

● Turning On/Off Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Changing and Initializing Password ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ157

● Changing Access Levelꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Setting the Date and Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ160

● Operating and Stopping ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 34 ● Setting the Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ161

● Registering a New Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 35 ● Changing the Display Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ161

● Checking Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 50 ● Setting Conveyor Speed ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ164

● Adjusting Registered Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 55 ● Statistics Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165

3 Installation and Connection


● Handling Errors and Alarms ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 71 ● Setting Weighcell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ167

● If NG frequently occurs ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 73 ● Security and Rules ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ169

● Investigating the cause of incorrect detections ● Specifying the installation check settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ173

ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 74 ● Other Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ174

■ Daily Operation Procedure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 78 ● User Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ182

● Setting Screen Brightness and

2 Advanced Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 84 Key Touch Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ182

■ Screen Hierarchy ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 85 ● Entering Device Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ183

■ Viewing Measurement Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 88 ■ Options and Peripheral Devices ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 184

● Basic display ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 88 ● Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ184


4 Maintenance

● General ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 88 ● Setting a Printer ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ189

● Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 89 ● Using Smart Measurement Function (SMF) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ201

● Histogram ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 90 ● Setting Rejector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ203

● X-bar R/s ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 90 ■ Other Useful Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 209

● Enlarged barꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 91 ● Using Smart Guide ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ209

● Zoom Weight Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 92 ● Displaying Product List ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ213

● Custom Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 92 ● Copying and Deleting Registered Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ214

● Individual Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 93 ● Clearing Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ214


5 Appendix

■ Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94 ● Setting All Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ215

● Sensitivity Correctionꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94 ● Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu ꞏꞏꞏ 217

● Fine Adjustment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 96 ● Using Conveyor Modeꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ219

6
● Viewing History ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 220 ● Installing the Conveyor Belt/Roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ287

● Setting Access Level By Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 223 ● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ289

● Using Check Mode ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 224 ■ Installing/Removing Components


● Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting (SSV-i series) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 291
Method ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 225 ● Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ291

● Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic ● Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ292
Change (product check function) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 230 ● Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ294
● Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 233 ● Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ295
● Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the ● Removing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ297
Product (Product effect monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 242 ● Installing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ298
● Checking the Effects such as External Noise ● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ299
(Noise monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 246
■ Check Items for Failureꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 300
● Using HIS Setting Function
● Troubleshooting ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ300
ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 249
● Outputting support data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 311
● Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏ 254
● Forced Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ313
● Using FOCUS Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 257
■ Error Messages and Solutions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 316
■ Adjusting Photocell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 348
3 Installation and Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 262
■ Selecting Installation Location and
5 Appendix ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 352
Transportation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 263
■ Consumables ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 353
■ Installation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 264
■ Spare Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 364
■ Connecting External Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 266
■ Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and
● SSV-h/f Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 267
Push-Type Terminal Block ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 384
● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 268
■ External I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 385
■ Connecting Power Supply and Grounding,
■ RJ Output Specification ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 389
Turning On the Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 269
■ RJ-I/F Unit (Optional)
RJ I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 390
4 Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 270
■ Ethernet Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 393
■ Daily Maintenanceꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 271
■ Timing Chart ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 395
● Daily Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 271
■ Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 396
● Weekly Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 272
■ Copyright, etc. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 606
■ Cleaning ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273
■ CE Conformity Markingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 607
● SSV-h/f Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273

● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273

● Maintenance of Stainless Steel ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 277

■ Installing/Removing Components
(SSV-h/f series) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 278
● Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 278

● Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 280

● Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 282

● Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 284

● Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 286

7
Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, ANRITSU CORPORATION (Anritsu)
uses the following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Insure that you clearly understand the
meanings of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the symbols may not be used on this
equipment. In addition, when drawings are included in this manual, labels on the equipment may not be shown on
them.

Safety Symbols Used in Manual

This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in death or serious
DANGER injury if not performed properly.

This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in death or serious injury
WARNING if not performed properly.

This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe


CAUTION injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and/or in Manual

The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations, and/or in manual to
provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Insure that you clearly understand the meanings
of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated in or


near the barred circle.

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is


indicated in or near the circle.

This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated in or near the
triangle.

This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled, or be disposed in


accordance with local laws.

8
SSV Series Checkweighers with Metal Detector

Checkweighers are automated weighing devices commonly used


to verify each product meets its stated label weight or piece count
(based on package weight). Checkweighers can also be used to
dynamically adjust filling systems or provide weight trending
information to operators and can provide valuable production line
data. They provide benefits including the ability to reduce product
and packaging losses as well as ensuring product consistency.
Checkweighers are a valuable device for any production line for
both quality verification and production line optimization.

The SSV series checkweigher with metal detector has the


following features:

A high-speed and high-accuracy weighing system


The SSV weighing system is capable of checking up to 600
products per minute with an accuracy of up to +/- 10mg (model
dependant).

Operator panel with color LCD touch screen


The display enables the operator to quickly and easily view
production line or weight trending information.

Management by USB memory and Ethernet ports


Date management/collection can be done by connecting the LAN
or USB memory.
* Ethernet ports are standard specifications include Ethernet
(LAN) connection to QUICCA.

Standard I/O capabilities for monitoring and line


integration
The system interface fully supports line status monitoring and
integration via standard and programmable I/O signals.

Designed for specific operating environments


The system can be selected in 3 IP configurations: IP30-compliant
painted finish, IP30-compliant stainless steel and IP66-compliant
stainless steel.

9
Checking the Package Contents
Make sure that all of the following items are present. If any item is damaged or missing, please contact us.

● SSV-h/f Series
□ Main unit 1 □ Spanner 1
(Double-head wrench with bolt widths 10 mm and 7 mm)

□ Operation Manual 1 set


□ Operation Manual -
Before Use 1
□ Operation Manual 1

● SSV-i Series
□ Main unit 1 □ Spanner 1
(Double-head wrench with bolt widths 10 mm and 7 mm)

□ Operation Manual 1 set □ Cable clamp 2


□ Operation Manual -
Before Use 1
□ Operation Manual 1

10
Names and Functions
● Main unit

[1] [1] Indicator


Stores the control unit of the checkweigher.
[2] Conveyor section
Weighs products while carrying them.
[2] [3] Stand
Supports the indicator and conveyor unit.
[3] [4] Foot bolt
Adjusts the main unit height with the production
line.
[4]

● Indicator

[1] Operation screen


[1] Displays measured values, evaluation results,
and statistics data, and is used to start or stop
[3] [2] operations and for a variety of settings.
[2] Power switch
Turns the power of the checkweigher on and
off.
[3] USB port
Used for inserting a USB memory for data
storage (sold separately).

● Conveyor section

[7] [5] [6] [1] Weigh conveyor section


[4]
Weigh conveyor with the product carrying
[3] [1] function.
[2] Weighcell
Weighcell for measuring weight.
[2] [3] Infeed conveyor section
Section to feed products to the weigh conveyor
section in stable conveyance state.
[4], [6] Photocell
Sensor for detecting the location of a product
being weighed.
[5] Metal detection unit
Performs test for metal contamination.
[7] Opening
Tests for metal contamination when products
pass.

11
Names and Functions
■ Weigh conveyor section, Infeed conveyor section
SSV-h/f Series
Weigh conveyor section [Weigh conveyor section]
(KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, KWS54XX type) [1], [5] Weigh conveyor unit
[1] [2], [7] Motor
[3],[6] Belt cover
[4] Catch clip

[4] [8] Roller cover


[2] [9] Conveyor belt
[3] [10] Drive roller
(KWS55XX type) [11] Drive belt
[5]
[12] Adjuster
[8] [13] Driven roller
[7] [6]
Weigh conveyor unit
(Common to SSV-h/f series)
[9]
[10]
[13]
[11]
[12]
Infeed conveyor section [Infeed conveyor section]
(Common to SSV-h/f series) [1] Infeed conveyor section
[2] Tension roller
[1] [3], [6] Catch clip
[2] [4], [7] Belt cover
[5], [8] Motor
[9] Conveyor belt
For a belt width of For a belt width of
160 mm or 250 mm 350 mm [10] Drive roller
[11] Drive belt
[12] Driven roller

[6]
[3] [7] [8]
[5]
[4]
Infeed conveyor unit
(Common to SSV-h/f series)
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]

12
Names and Functions
SSV-i Series
Weigh conveyor section [Weigh conveyor section]
[1] Weigh conveyor unit
[1] [2] Motor
[3], [4] Catch clip

[2] [5] Conveyor belt


[4] [6] Knob

[3] [7] Driven roller part


[8] Drive roller
Weigh conveyor unit,
Infeed conveyor unit (Common) [5]

[6]
[7]
[8]
Infeed conveyor section [Infeed conveyor section]
[1] Infeed conveyor section

[1] [2], [3] Catch clip


[4]
[4] Motor

[2]
[3]

13
Names and Functions
● Operation screen
Push-button switches
[1] [Start] button
[4] [8] [5] [6] [7] [18] [19] Starts the operation of the
checkweigher.
The green lamp around the button
[9] illuminates when the checkweigher is
operating.
[10] [2] [Stop] button
[11] Stops the operation of the
checkweigher. The red lamp around
[12] the button illuminates when the
[13] checkweigher is stopped.
[3] [Home] button
Displays the Basic screen.

Touch screen type color LCD display


[14] [15] [16] [3] [17] [2] [1] operation panel
[4] Operation mode/product display
Displays the current operation mode
of the checkweigher or current
product (switches according to the
screen type).
[5] [Date and Time] button
Displays the current date and time. Press the button to set the internal clock.
[6] [Access Level] button
Displays the level of authority to operate. Press the button to change the access level.
[7] [Help] button
Displays supplementary menu.
[8] [Current product display] area
Displays the product number, setting values, and weighed item count of the current
product.
[9] [Switch the product.] button
Switches the product type.
[10] [Register new product.] button
Registers the product type.
[11] [Changing Product settings.] button
Displays the Ins. condition set. screen.
[12] [Checking operation.] buttonr
Feeds products to check the operation without counting statistics. Displays the selected
screen either of the check mode or evaluation/rejection check by selecting [Menu],
[Control Panel], [Home display settings], and [Display settings] in this order.

14
Names and Functions

[13] [Adjusting MD sensitvity] button


Displays a screen on which you can adjust the sensitivity.
[14] [Menu] button
Opens the setting menu.
[15] [Display] button
Changes the display screen.
[16] [MS] area
Displays the weight and evaluation result of each product.
[17] [Others] button
Displays the submenu such as Stats Clear by touching this.
[18] [Zero] button
Adjusts the zero point of the weighcell.
[19] [Metal detect level] bar
Displays the metal detection level.

15
Description of Operation Screen
● Operation screen
The display screen of an SSV series checkweigher with metal detector can be changed according
to purpose.
Each time the [Display] button in the bottom of the screen is pressed, the screen switches to
another screen in the order of: [Basic display] → [General] → [Statistics] → [Histogram] → [Show
X-bar R/s] → [Enlarge bar] → [Zoom Weight Disp.] → [Custom Disp.] → [Individual Disp.] →
[Smart guide].

Basic display

This is the basic screen of the checkweigher.


Regular operations can be performed with one
click.
This screen is displayed when the [Home] button
is pressed.
 P. 88 Basic display

General
It collects and displays frequently used information.
 P. 88 General

Statistics
This screen is used to see production control
statistics (weighed item count and weight).
ALL data or Pass. data only views are available.

 P. 89 Statistics

16
Description of Operation Screen

Histogram
This screen is used to visually check the weight
distribution of weighed products.
ALL data or Pass. Data only views are available.

 P. 90 Histogram

X-bar R/s
This screen is used to visually check the trend of
weight changes in weighed products.
The mean value and dispersion of each
aggregate unit (batch) are displayed in
time-series graphs. Quantity or cycle time can be
a factor to formulate a batch.
 P. 90 X-bar R/s

Enlarged bar
This screen is used to visually check the real-time
variation of the weight.
An enlarged bar graph is displayed.
 P. 91 Enlarged bar

Zoom Weight Disp.


This screen is used to check the operation status
of the production line.
It displays the weight as an enlarged number and
also shows the production status (the number of
products weighed per minute).
 P. 92 Zoom Weight Disp.

17
Description of Operation Screen

Custom Disp.
This screen is used to display the opted items
only. It helps to see data need to be monitored
specifically.
 P. 92 Custom Disp.

Individual Disp.
This screen is used to display the evaluation
results, each weight value and statistics for the
last 31 products checked. By keeping the data
displayed, it helps to adjust or confirm the
operations with ease.
 P. 93 Individual Disp.

Smart guide (displays only when the Smart guide function is used)
This screen displays operation instructions for the
operator to prevent operation errors or an
omission of steps.
 P. 78 Daily Operation Procedure

18
Description of Operation Screen
(The General screen is used as an example in the description below.)

● Mass bar and icons


The weighing results are displayed with the mass bars and icons shown below as well as in a
numerical display of the weight.
Mass bar Icon Weighing results
Indicates a PASS product was fed.
* The weight was within the upper and lower
limits.
Indicates a +NG product was fed.
*
The weight exceeded the upper limit.

Indicates a -NG product was fed.


*
The weight was less than the lower limit.

Indicates an NG signal was received from


(As per weight value) external equipment.
The products was evaluated as no good.
Weight evaluation could not be completed
because the product was not carried properly.
The reason of the conveyor error can be
checked with the alarm displayed at the top
of the screen.
 P. 316 Error Messages and Solutions
* If the product is evaluated as metal NG, the mass bar and the weight value are displayed
according to the weighing result; however, the icon indicates [Metal NG].

When the weight appears as [+OVF] or [-OVF], the meaning is as follows.


Displayed weight Meaning

The measured value exceeded the maximum value to be displayed.


This occurred because the product is too heavy for the
checkweigher specifications, the weighcell or weigh conveyor was
overloaded, or due to the effects of wind, vibrations, or another
disturbance.
The measured value fell below the minimum value to be displayed.
This occurred due to double products, a locked weighcell, or the
effects of wind, vibrations, or another disturbance.

• Double product indicates that two products exist on the weighcell conveyor unit.
• MDNG indicates that the metal detector detected metal contamination.

19
Description of Operation Screen
● Metal detection level bar and evaluation result icons
The test result for metal contamination is displayed by the metal detection level bar and icons as
shown below.
[For metal contamination checks ( P. 41) ]
Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result
No metal contamination
The metal effect value has not
*
reached the metal contamination
The red light is not turned on. evaluation reference.
Metal-contaminated product
The metal effect value has reached
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side)
the metal contamination evaluation
turn on.
reference.
Metal evaluation could not be
completed because the product was
not carried properly.
The reason of the conveyor error
(Depending on the metal effect value)
can be checked with the alarm
displayed at the top of the screen.
 P. 316 Error Messages and
Solutions

[For missing product checks ( P. 42) ]


Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result
No missing product
The metal effect value exceeds
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side) *
the missing product evaluation
turn on.
reference.
Missing product
The metal effect value has not
reached the missing product
The red light is not turned on. evaluation reference.
Missing product evaluation could
not be completed because the
(Depending on the metal effect value)
product was not carried properly.
(See the description above.)

* If the evaluation of the metal contamination (or missing product) check is [OK], the final
evaluation is determined by the weighing result.

20
Description of Operation Screen

- Metal contamination check 1 –


▪ When products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values every time a product is fed.
▪ When products are not being conveyed: Updates the effect values every 100 ms.
- Metal contamination check 2, 3, 4 –
▪ When MDNG products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values at the timing of the
MDNG evaluation.
▪ When MDNG products are not being conveyed: The effect values are not updated. However,
on the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and "Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen ( P. 233
Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity), the effect values are updated every 100 ms.

● Icon display
At the top of the operation screen, the icons are displayed to show the state of network, USB
memory and code reader.
(QUICCA, USB memory and code reader are optional.)

Network (QUICCA)*1 USB memory*2 Screen (Code reader)*3

Connected Inserted Able to


correctly read
correctly

Disconnected

Data stored in the


metal detector while
disconnected

Network (Other)

Connected correctly

Disconnected

*1 Indicates the connecting status of QUICCA (Quality Management and Control System
Software by Anritsu)
*2 Appears when a USB memory when an optional USB memory is used.
*3 The animation of code reader is displayed while the bar code (Item code etc.) is readable.

21
Description of Operation Screen
● Operation and input method
■ Touch screen buttons
When a button is pressed, the corresponding
function starts.
 P. 84 2. Advanced Operations

Example 1 [Menu]
The first layer of the setting menu is called.
When a button is pressed, the detailed
setting menu is displayed.

Example 2 [Others]
When a button is pressed, the submenu is
displayed above the button. When an item
is pressed, the function is called directly
without opening another menu.

■ Information display area of the touch screen


When the information display area in the frame is pressed, the related settings and display
screens are called.
 P. 88 Viewing Measurement Data

Example 1 When the product display frame is


pressed, the Product Change screen
is displayed.
Example 2 When the reference value or
upper/lower limit value display frame
is pressed, the Ins. condition set Prod Change screen Ins. Condition set
screen is displayed. screen

22
Description of Operation Screen

■ Settings screen (menu)


Inspection conditions for the product and checkweigher operation are set.
When an item in the list is pressed, the setting input screen or a setting list of deeper layer is
displayed.
The cursor moves to the previous page.
Keep pressing to let it move continuously.
When the cursor reaches to the first page, it moves
to the last page.

The cursor moves to one line above.


Keep pressing to let it move continuously.

The keypad is displayed to enter list number


directly.

The cursor moves to one line below.


Keep pressing to let it move continuously.

The cursor moves to the next page.


Keep pressing to let it move continuously.
When the cursor reaches to the last page, it moves
to the first page.

■ Setting selection
When a setting is to be selected from the
provided options, a list screen containing the
options is displayed.
Select an option (the selected option is
highlighted) and press the [OK] button to
specify the option.

23
Description of Operation Screen

■ Software keypad
When a numeric value is to be entered, the keypad is displayed.
Enter a number and press the [OK] button to set the value.

BS key
Deletes the last digit.

▲ key
Increases the value by 1.

▼ key
Decreases the value by 1.

C key
Clears the input value to 0.

+/- key
Reverses positive and negative.

24
Description of Operation Screen

■ Software Keyboard
When characters are to be entered, a software keyboard is displayed.
Enter characters and press the [OK] button to set the characters.

Character type selection key BS key


Switches over [ABC], [NUM], and [Symbol]. Deletes the last character before the
cursor.

< > key


Moves the cursor by one character.

Aa key
Switches upper case
and lower case.

Num key
Switches to input
number.

Space key
Enters one space.

25
Description of Operation Screen

Entering letters
When [A/a] is pressed, input is switched
to lower-case letters.

Entering Korean characters


When the display language is changed to
Korean, the Korean keyboard screen is
displayed.
Press the [엔터키] (Confirm) button to
confirm the composition of the Korean
characters.
 P. 161 Changing the Display Language

Entering Chinese characters


When the display language is changed to
Chinese, the Chinese keyboard screen is
displayed.

Press the [ 转 变 ] (Convert) button to

convert the alphabetic characters into


Chinese characters.
 P. 161 Changing the Display Language

Korean and Chinese product names do not support output to USB memory, printer, or serial (it is
replaced with "?" when output).

Entering numbers
In addition to numbers, frequently used units
and symbols can be entered.

26
Description of Operation Screen

Entering symbols
Other symbols can be entered.

27
1 Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic operations.
1 Basic Operations

Turning on the System for the First Time 29

Basic Usage 32

Daily Operation Procedure 78

28
Turning on the System for the First Time
Turning on the System for the First Time

1 Turning on the power.


 P. 32 Turning On/Off Power

1 Basic Operations
2 When the system is started for the first
time after it has been delivered, the
Confirmation at installation screen, which
provides cautions for using the system
safely, is displayed. Be sure to read the
contents of this screen before using the
system.

2 Advanced Operations
Tap [Yes] to allow the Confirmation at installation screen to be displayed.

Tap [Do not display] to stop the Confirmation at installation screen from being
displayed when the system is started next time.

The Confirmation at installation screen shows safety messages in the following order.

Cautions for safety Handling caution 1 Handling caution 2 Installation precaution

3 Installation and Connection


Connection and Installation Place to install the Checking
installation metal detector installation state

Operation Operation Using the metal Checking


detector conveyance

Maintenance and Use in combination Products to be Checking for dust


cleaning with rejector inspected by metal
detector
End of confirmation
Metal detection Weighcell Checking belts and
performance of conveyors
metal detector

End of confirmation Checking photocell


4 Maintenance
Touch panel
operation

End of confirmation End of confirmation


5 Appendix

29
Turning on the System for the First Time
3 Tap the [Next] button to display the next message.
1 Basic Operations

4 Select the check box on the screen, and


then tap [Completed].
2 Advanced Operations

5 Press "Start" and follow the instructions


displayed on the screen.
3 Installation and Connection

When “Smart guide settings” is set to “No”,


operation screen is automatically
displayed. ”Start” does not appear on the
screen.

"Smart guide" screen


In standard equipment, Smart Guide is
set by factory default.
4 Maintenance

To use the equipment without following


this guide, select the "Menu" screen →
"Maint. and Setting" → "Functions" →
"Smart guide settings", select "No" in
"Input", and tap [OK]. Tap the Home
button to return to the operation screen.

To open "Maint. and Setting", the access level must be set to 2 (manager level).
5 Appendix

30
Turning on the System for the First Time
6 Select the access level.
Refer to "Changing Access Level".

 P. 32 Changing Access Level

1 Basic Operations
7 Set the Date and Time.
Refer to "Setting the Date and Time”.

 P. 160 Setting the Date and Time

8 Set RJ direction.
Refer to "Setting Rejector".

2 Advanced Operations
 P. 203 Setting Rejector

9 Calibrate the weighcell.


Refer to "Sensitivity correction".

 P. 94 Sensitivity Correction

To register a product, refer to "Register New a Product" in Basic Operations.


 P. 35 Registering a New Product

3 Installation and Connection


To connect to a network, refer to "Connecting Ethernet (LAN)".
 P. 150 Connecting Ethernet (LAN)

For USB memory, printer, and signal tower settings, refer to the respective sections.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

31
Basic Usage
Basic Usage

> Turning On/Off Power


To turn on the power, turn the power switch
clockwise.
1 Basic Operations

To turn off the power, turn it counterclockwise.


2 Advanced Operations

Power switch ON

OFF

> Changing Access Level


The access level can be changed to change the range of operation according to the level
of the operator.
3 Installation and Connection

This machine has 4 access levels. Level 3 is only for Anritsu service engineers and not
available for general use. The following 3 levels can be used:

Level 1a: Operator Level 1


Only basic operations such as running, stopping, and changing the product
are allowed.

Level 1b: Operator Level 2


In addition to the operations permitted by Level 1a, "Operation Check",
"Product Registration", and "Clear Statistics" are allowed.
4 Maintenance

Level 2: Manager Level


This level is for managers of this product. In addition to the operations
permitted by Level 1b, managers are allowed to set production conditions and
check the history data.

To set parameters, change the access level from "Operator Level" to "Manager Level".
5 Appendix

32
Basic Usage
1 Tapping the key icon at the upper right
part of the "Main" screen displays the
"Access Level Change" screen.

1 Basic Operations
2 Select the Manager Level radio button and click [OK]. The password input screen is
displayed.

2 Advanced Operations
Select Manager Level Password input screen

3 Installation and Connection


3 Enter the password "7777" and tap [OK] to change the access level to Manager Level.
For instructions on changing or initializing the password, refer to "Changing and
Initializing Password".

 P. 157 Changing and Initializing Password

When the power is turned off while in Level 2 and turned on again, the level returns to Level 1b.
When the power is turned off while in Level 1a and turned on again, the level is Level 1a.
To change the level from Level 1a to Level 1b or Level 2, or from Level 1b to Level 2, enter the 4 Maintenance
password.
The password to Level 1b is "5555".
The password to Level 2 is "7777".

It is also possible to access the "Access Level Change" screen by selecting the "Menu"
screen → "Control Panel" → "Access Level Change".
The access level can also be set by using a function in the "Set Access Authority" screen.
 P. 223 Setting Access Level By Function
5 Appendix

33
Basic Usage
> Operating and Stopping
1 Basic Operations

For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.

For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10
minutes before the start of production.
2 Advanced Operations

(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)

Before starting the conveyors, remove products on the infeed, weigh, and downstream
conveyors. If operation is started while products are on the conveyors, weighing and rejection
may not be performed correctly.

■ Operating
3 Installation and Connection

Tap the [Start] button. The conveyor starts


up and becomes operational.
The area around the Start button illuminates
in green.

■ Stopping
Tap the [Stop] button.
The conveyor stops, and the area around
4 Maintenance

the Stop button illuminates in red.


5 Appendix

34
Basic Usage
> Registering a New Product
In this equipment, parameters of up to 200 products can be registered.
Registering products allows you to perform production control properly and operate the

1 Basic Operations
equipment effectively.
When "Register new product" is tapped in the "Menu" screen, the "Product Registration
Start" screen is displayed.
Input and set a product and its parameters by following the on-screen instructions.

1 Prepare a master product (a product with dimensions, weight, contents, and


packaging equivalent to those of products normally fed to the line).

2 Advanced Operations
Tap [Next] to proceed to the input screen.

3 Installation and Connection


2 Tap the Product text box and select the
product number to register. Tap [OK].

Or select the following method of register,


and check the check box.

▼ Auto select unregistered Prod.

The Product No. is chosen automatically


from the unregistered Prod No. after the
currently selected Prod No..
4 Maintenance

▼ Set Prod. after delete.

Get registered in the selected product


No.. When that product No. is registered,
the registration information is removed
and overwritten with new information.

Tap [Next].
5 Appendix

35
Basic Usage
3 Make sure that the cursor is on "Product
Parameter Setting", and tap "Execute".

The screen shown on the right is


1 Basic Operations

displayed. Tap [Next].

If "Enter Directly" is selected in the "Prod Para Setting Start" screen, input are made swiftly from
the parameter table.
2 Advanced Operations

4 When the text box area of the "Enter


Product Information" screen is tapped,
the keyboard is displayed. Enter the
product name, and click [OK].

Fill Disp Type2 when necessary.


To register both Type1 and Type2, you
3 Installation and Connection

can switch the display language.

 P. 161 Changing the Display Language

Make sure that the product name has


been entered correctly, and tap [Next].
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

36
Basic Usage
5 In the Product Dimension screen, enter
the Product Length, Width, and Height.

When the box area is tapped, the keypad

1 Basic Operations
is displayed. Enter a value and tap
[Next].

You can measure approximate dimensions Enter Product Length


using the ruler displayed on the screen.

Enter the longest dimension value for length,


width, and height.

2 Advanced Operations
When all dimensions are entered

6 Enter the Reference Value, +Limit, and

3 Installation and Connection


-Limit.
Tap the Reference Value text box, and
use the displayed keypad to enter a
value.

For +Limit and -Limit, press the


appropriate text box and use the
displayed keypad to enter a value.

When the master product is placed on the weigh conveyor, the weight value is displayed. Values
4 Maintenance
are automatically entered when "Regis measured val" is tapped.

Method for setting the upper and lower limits


The checkweigher (CW) upper and lower limit settings are usually set as follows:
(1) Determine the upper and lower limit settings for production based on the reference
value for the product being weighed.

(2) Subtract the CW rejection accuracy from the determined upper and lower limits.

(3) Set the CW upper and lower limits so they are in the following range:
5 Appendix

0 g ≤ Lower limit + Reference weight ≤ Upper limit + Reference weight ≤ Maximum


display value.

37
Basic Usage
The following "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" are the CW upper and lower limit setting
values.

Lower limit Upper limit


1 Basic Operations

for production for production

Reference
Lower value Upper
limit limit

Rejection Rejection
2 Advanced Operations

accuracy accuracy

Rejection accuracy
The rejection accuracy of this CW is represented as 3. This means that when the theoretical
rejection accuracy is 1 g, the weighing error has a 99.7% probability of being within 1 g. For
example, when measuring a 100.0 g product 1000 times, the chance that the measured weight
will exceed 100 1 g is three times.
3 Installation and Connection

Consequently, if you want to keep stricter production upper and lower limits, it is necessary
to narrow the CW upper and lower limit widths. However, in this case, there is an increased
probability that the CW will evaluate Pass products as NG products, so this should be set
based on the production quality control and yield ratio.

7 To enter the tare weight, enter a value


using the same method as when you
entered the reference value.

After entering the value,tap [Next].


4 Maintenance

8 Enter the Main Conveyor Speed.


Set an appropriate conveyor speed for
the production line capacity. When a
speed value (m/min) is entered in "Main
Conveyor Speed", "Inspection
performance" and "Auto-zerosetting
Perf." (number of products measured per
minute) are automatically calculated
5 Appendix

based on the value and displayed.

After entering the value, tap [Next].

38
Basic Usage
9 Select a check method for the metal
detector.
■ Check metal contamination

1 Basic Operations
To check for metal contamination.

When the product length or main


conveyor speed satisfies the specified
conditions, the message screen is

2 Advanced Operations
displayed. In this case, select "Metal
Check 3".

Even the conveyor speed is set at 70 m/min. or faster, Metal 1 can be used if the products are
tall enough (tall box, for instance) to block the optical sensors located at the side of metal

3 Installation and Connection


detection head sufficiently.
Products which may block the sensors more than twice for each feed (in bags with narrow gaps,
for instance), false detection may be caused.

■ Check missing product


To check for missing metal (evaporated) attachments or missing attached documents
printed in magnetic ink

After selection, tap [Next].

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

39
Basic Usage
10 Check if the photocell of the metal
detector detects the product.
■ Yes
1 Basic Operations

The red lamp of the photocell goes out


(the light is blocked), when place the
product in front of the photocell of the
metal detector.
■ No
When the red lamp does not go out (the light is not blocked). If you cannot determine if
the light is blocked.
2 Advanced Operations

A missing product check cannot be performed if the product to be measured is not blocking the
photocell.

After selection, tap [Next].

11 Set the interval of feeding products.


3 Installation and Connection

Select [Yes] if the interval of feeding


products is 280 mm or more and select
[No] when it is less than 280 mm.

And press [Next].

Feed products at an interval of 280 mm or


more to check for missing products.
4 Maintenance

12 Set the control sensitivity.


(Go to step 13 to check for missing
products.)

Enter the size of the Fe and SUS test


pieces used for checking the metal
detection sensitivity and press [Next].
5 Appendix

40
Basic Usage
13 Check the evaluation mode of the metal detector and the size of the control sensitivity
test pieces.

▼ Metal 1

1 Basic Operations
(The photocell is blocked and products
are fed through at an interval of 280 mm
or more.)

Evaluate if there is any metal


contamination for each product.

An alarm evaluation (double product or


length over) is given when the photocell is

2 Advanced Operations
not blocked or products are fed through at
an interval of less than 280 mm.

▼ Metal 2

(Product carrier method: Products are in a


box. The photocell is blocked. Products
are fed through at an interval of less than
280 mm.)

3 Installation and Connection


Product recognition via the photocell is
not performed. Metal evaluation and
rejection are performed from the location
of the MDNG judgment. OK products are
not counted.

▼ Metal 3

(The photocell is not blocked or products


are fed through at an interval of less
than 280 mm.)
4 Maintenance

Product recognition via the photocell is


not performed. Metal evaluation and
rejection are performed from the location
of the MDNG judgment. OK products are
not counted.
5 Appendix

41
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for missing products

Evaluate if a metal (evaporated)


attachment is missing for each product.
1 Basic Operations

Tap [Next] to finish setting the product


parameters.

Tap [Check set items] to view the setting


2 Advanced Operations

values for each item.

Tap [Completed] to execute the Auto-set.

14 Auto-set the metal detector.


Auto-set allows the metal detection unit
3 Installation and Connection

to automatically adjust the inspection


and evaluation conditions to the
optimum conditions according to the
properties of the product.

Prepare a master product and press


[Execute].

Prepare a product containing a missing component (NG sample product) if you are
performing a missing product check.
4 Maintenance

Feed products at an interval of 280 mm or more to check for missing products.

For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.
5 Appendix

42
Basic Usage

For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10
minutes before the start of production.

1 Basic Operations
(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)

15 Select New/Readjust
Press [Next] if the product number has
not been registered.

Select [Make auto setting by using

2 Advanced Operations
current settings] and press [Next] to
register a new product using the
registered product number.

See the following to readjust the settings of the registered product.


 P. 99 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)

3 Installation and Connection


16 Select the auto-set method.
Normally, select Full-auto (recommended)
and press [Next].

・ Full automatic method


This method automatically evaluates
the properties of the product and
automatically adjusts the check
settings to optimal values to fit these
4 Maintenance

properties.

・ Specifies scan mode ,


Specify product property
This is used for setting a product for which auto setting was performed and whose
properties are already known.

 P. 225 Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting Method


5 Appendix

43
Basic Usage
17 Check the back and forth movements of
the conveyor.

▪ Yes
1 Basic Operations

To automatically move the master


product back and forth on the conveyor
when performing the auto-set.

▪ No
To allow an operator to feed the master
product when performing the Auto-Set.

However, it is not appropriate to automatically move the following products back and
2 Advanced Operations

forth under the conditions described below.

▪ A product whose height is 10 mm or less and that does not block the photocell

▪ A product whose gravity center is high and is unstable

▪ A product of a shape prone to falling over

▪ A long product that could drop from the edge of the conveyor

▪ A product prone to changing its orientation when moved back and forth
3 Installation and Connection

(for example, a slippery product)

18 Press the [Start] button. When the


conveyor starts moving, feed the master
product according to the on-screen
instructions.
4 Maintenance

▪ Do not feed the master product while the


“Wait for a while” message is displayed.
▪ Press the [Cancel], [Back], or [Stop] button
during auto setting to stop the setting
operation. When the operation is stopped,
settings are not updated and the previous
settings are kept.
▪ If a system error occurs during auto setting,
the setting operation is stopped. Release from
5 Appendix

the error and try auto setting again.

44
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for metal contamination

Feed the master product


15 times.

1 Basic Operations
Feed the master product 5
times.

Feed the master product 12


times.

When Auto-set finishes, the determined


sensitivity mode and the estimated
detection sensitivity are displayed.

2 Advanced Operations
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to
have the results of auto-set applied.

The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that
can be detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity
after performing the auto settings.

3 Installation and Connection


▼ Checking for a missing product

Feed the master product


8 times and missing product (NG
sample products) 2 times (for the
Full-auto method).

Feed the master product


7 times and missing product (NG
sample products) 3 times 4 Maintenance

When Auto-set finishes, the determined


sensitivity mode and the stability index
are displayed.

The less the stability index, the more a


missing product can be detected with
stability.

Adjust the detection sensitivity if the


stability index in 0.5 or more.
5 Appendix

 P. 237 Changing the detection sensitivity (for a missing product check)

45
Basic Usage
Press [Completed] to terminate
registration of the product.

Press [Cancel] if you do not want to


1 Basic Operations

have the results of auto setting applied.

When Auto-set Method is “Auto


(recommended)”, press [Details] to
display the estimated detection level by
2 Advanced Operations

sensitivity mode.

Auto (recommended) at Auto-set

To change the settings,


select the new item and tap [Change],
3 Installation and Connection

[Completed].

Estimated detection by sensitivity mode

When the sensitivity


mode determined by auto-setting is either
[A-A] or [B-B], the sensitivity may be
4 Maintenance

improved by changing the mode from


[A-A] to [B-B] or [B-B] to [A-A]
respectively, depending on products to
be inspected.When the sensitivity mode
is changed, select the mode to set then
tap Change to start the final adjustment
again by feeding the product.
5 Appendix

The setting market by ★ is the highest in detection sensitivity.The sensitivity value in parenthesis
may change when auto-setting is conducted again.

46
Basic Usage

Notes on auto-set
(1) Avoid passing the master product to the next part of the line because the contaminants

1 Basic Operations
contained in the master product are not detected during auto-set. The RJ direction is
not controlled during auto-set. Be especially careful if the rejector is on standby in the
OK direction.
(2) Be careful not to use an inappropriate product during auto-set. You may not be able to
conduct a correct check, resulting in passing a contaminated or missing product.
(3) Do not feed a product heavier than the weight specified by the checkweigher.
Otherwise, the amount of heat generated by the motor may increase, and this could
lead to motor trouble and burning.
(4) Do not feed a product larger than the opening size of the MD head. The product might

2 Advanced Operations
hit the resin cover of the MD head and cause the resin cover to crack or chip.
(5) Feed the master product in the same direction and shape as that of the normal
inspected product fed on the line.
(6) If the master product does not block the photocell, block the light axis with your hand
when the master product is passing the MD head. Do not use the function for moving
the conveyor back and forth.
(7) The detection conditions may vary with each auto-set due to external noise for
instance, even if the products are the same.
(8) If the property of the master product is different from that of those actually fed in the
line, or if the product is fed in the wrong direction, the products fed during operation

3 Installation and Connection


may be erroneously detected.
(9) Operation for a product for which Auto setting is not completed cannot start.

Metal level bar

(10) During auto-set, a photocell error occurs when the photocell monitoring time elapses
even for a bulk type product.

(11) For Auto-setting, the number of feeding products may increase in accordance with the
product characteristics.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

47
Basic Usage

It is recommended to perform fine adjustment


to enable stable production.
Fine adjustment is used to correct the value
1 Basic Operations

displayed while the system is running if there


is a discrepancy between the displayed value
and the measured weight of the master
product.
 P. 96 Fine adjustment

After product parameter setting and


auto-set are performed, whether the
2 Advanced Operations

system is running correctly according to


the registered product settings can be
verified.

Tap the [Adj/check] button to perform RJ


timing adjustment/setting, sensitivity
adjustment, accuracy check, and Eval/RJ
check.
3 Installation and Connection

 P. 99 Adjusting the RJ timing


 P. 233 Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity
 P. 50 Checking Operations

▪ The [RJ timing adjustment/setting] button is not displayed if the system is specified to stop
when no rejector is connected or when a product is evaluated as NG.
▪ Usually, the Adjust RJ timing screen is displayed when the [RJ timing adjustment/setting]
button is tapped. Note, however, that the RJ Timing Setting screen (shown on P. 60) might
be displayed instead depending on the rejector type.
4 Maintenance

Product registration is now complete.


If the setting is wrong, start the setting again from Step 1, or adjust the corresponding
items from “Adjusting Registered Products”.
 P. 55 Adjusting Registered Products
5 Appendix

48
Basic Usage
Some types of metal detection heads have the following additional functions.

■ HIS setting function


Use this function to enhance the

1 Basic Operations
detection probability after performing
auto-setting.

Select [HIS Setting] on the right screen


and press [Execute].

 P. 249 Using HIS Setting Function

Auto-limit-setting function

2 Advanced Operations

Setting the optimum evaluation limit


reduces false detection.

Select [Auto Limit Setting] on the right


screen and press [Execute].

 P. 254 Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function

▪ FOCUS Setting

3 Installation and Connection


Set FOCUS to have a specific metal
detected after performing auto-setting.

Select [FOCUS Setting] on the right


screen and press [Execute].

 P. 257 Using FOCUS Setting Function

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

49
Basic Usage
> Checking Operations
Operations Check is a function to check if the equipment is operating correctly.
By making sure that the equipment is operating normally at the beginning and end of
1 Basic Operations

production of a day, or at the beginning and end of a lot, operational reliability can be
guaranteed indirectly.

There are two types of operational check functions: "Accuracy Check", which checks the
accuracy of the weighcell, and "Eval./RJ Confirmation", which checks for the correct
evaluation and rejection of products. When performing an Accuracy Check, set
"Permissible Accuracy" and "Accuracy Check Sample Count" in advance.
2 Advanced Operations

Smart Guide can also be used to check operations during the daily operations procedure.
 P. 209 Using Smart Guide

When "Ope. Check" is tapped in the "Menu"


screen, the screen on the right is displayed.
The displayed menu item varies depending
on the settings of the operation access
authority for the operation check.
3 Installation and Connection

 P. 223 Setting Access Level By Function

Select "Accuracy check settings", set "Permissible Accuracy" and "Accuracy Check
Sample Count", and tap [Back].
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
This sets the permissible range for the measurement
accuracy.
When the measurement accuracy calculated from the
4 Maintenance

results of the measurement of the master product used


for the accuracy check is within the permissible
Permissible 1.00 g accuracy, the accuracy check results displays OK.
Accuracy (0.00 to 300.00 g) The measurement accuracy is calculated from the
following equation:
Measurement Accuracy =3 × Standard Deviation (s) +
Absolute Value of Bias
Bias = Master Product Weight - Average of Measured
Values (Xbar)
This sets the number of times to measure the master
product for an accuracy check.
Accuracy Check 20 times
Checking as many times as possible is recommended
5 Appendix

Sample Count (10 to 60 times)


because there may be deviations from the original
accuracy if the count is too low.

50
Basic Usage
Select "Common set for Ope. Check" and check the conditions specified.
For the settings at the end of an operation check, see the following table.

Setting
Name Description

1 Basic Operations
(Initial Setting:_)
When an operator feeds a product according to the
Eva/RJ Check Fix Route instructions on the screen, the operator can check
the device operation.
Print at end of
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
operation check
No prints out the operation check results at the end of an
(displayed only when operation check.
Yes
a printer is
* Only when using the printer option
connected)
This sets on or off for the function that automatically

2 Advanced Operations
Print stat data at No prints out the statistics data at the end of production
production end Yes when Smart Guide is used.
* Only when using the printer option
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
Store at end of No saves the operation check results to USB memory at
operation check Yes the end of an operation check.
* Only when using the USB memory option
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
Save stat data at No saves the statistics data to USB memory at the end
production end Yes of production when Smart Guide is used.
* Only when using the USB memory option

3 Installation and Connection


Select [EVAL/RJ・CHK Setting] to set and check the conditions. See the following table for
details.

Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Eval./RJ Sample 2 to 10 Set the number of sample products used for an
Count (Initial value: 3) evaluation/rejection check.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the Fe test piece used in the pattern
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) method for the operation check.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the SUS test piece used in the pattern
4 Maintenance

(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0) method for the operation check.


Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the non-Fe test piece used in the
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) pattern method for the operation check.
OK
-NG Set the evaluation reference of sample products
used for evaluation/rejection check.
Eval. Ref. +NG
Set this parameter for the number of times (3 to 10)
MDNG to perform an operation check per product.
EXNG

Fe Set the type of sample test piece used for


evaluation/rejection check.
Test Piece Type SUS
5 Appendix

Set this parameter for the number of times (3 to 10)


Non-Fe to perform an operation check per product.

51
Basic Usage
■ Accuracy check
1 Select "Others" → "Accuracy Check",
check the product number and product
name, and tap [Next].
1 Basic Operations

2 Check the values of "Master Weight" and


2 Advanced Operations

"Permissible Accuracy", and tap [Next].

3 Tap the Start button.


3 Installation and Connection

4 Feed the master product.


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

52
Basic Usage
Feed the master product for the number
of times specified in "Accuracy Check
Sample Count" and make sure that "OK"
is displayed. Tap [Completed] to return to

1 Basic Operations
the Home screen.

If "Failed" is displayed, check for any incorrect setting values. Tap the "Details" button
to display a list of information during the accuracy check.

2 Advanced Operations
■ Eva/RJ check
This function is used to check that the checkweigher is performing evaluation and
rejection correctly. For the Eva/RJ check, feed a product that is actually used on the
production line.

1 Tap "Others" and select "Eval./RJ


Confirmation".

3 Installation and Connection


2 Check the product number, tap [Next], and tap the Start button.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

53
Basic Usage
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to feed an OK product, +NG product, and -NG
product to the conveyor in this order.

Check that evaluation and rejection are performing correctly by feeding a PASS
1 Basic Operations

product, +NG product, and -NG product.


2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection

4 Check that "OK" is displayed. Tap


[Completed] to return to the operation
screen.
4 Maintenance

The rejector operates when it is connected. Be careful of its movement.


5 Appendix

54
Basic Usage
> Adjusting Registered Products
This is the procedure for modifying the
specified conditions for registered products.

1 Basic Operations
Detailed information omitted in the Product
Registration Navi can also be entered.
Select the “Menu” screen → “Adjust
registered products” → “Product settings”.
The screen to the right is displayed.

Set and adjust each item by referring to the tables below.

2 Advanced Operations
■ Product information
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product information)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
(Max. 14 characters
Type1 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
in Japanese)
Product Name To register both Product name and Product name2,
(Max. 28 characters

3 Installation and Connection


you can change the display of them.
in alphabet)
 P. 161 Changing the Display Language
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
Product name 2 (Max. 28 characters)
This is available in blank.
 P. 161 Changing the Display Language
Sets the Lot No. Displays the Lot No. on the
Lot No. (Max. 10 characters)
“Statistics” screen.
(1 to weigh conveyor
Product Length Sets the maximum length of the product.
length) mm 4 Maintenance
Product Length (L) Displays the value set for the product.
Product Width (W) Displays the value set for the product.
Product Height (H) Displays the value set for the product.
This is the parameter to recognize the product. To
register the part of the product bar code (5 to 12
Item code 0 ~ 999999999999
digits), changing the product is available.
When this is set 0, this parameter is unregistered.
5 Appendix

55
Basic Usage
■ Ins. condition set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Ins. condition settings)

Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations

(Default: )
Reference Value Weight Range Sets the reference value for the product.
+Limit Displays the value set for the product.
-Limit Displays the value set for the product.
Tare Weight Displays the value set for the product.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0
Sets the test piece size Fe.
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Test Piece Size Φ0.0
2 Advanced Operations

Sets the test piece size SUS.


(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Test Piece Size Φ0.0
Sets the test piece size Non-Fe.
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Displays the evaluation method for the currently selected product. It is
determined at product registration.
* Read only
■ Evaluation method
Uses photocell to recognize the product for metal
3 Installation and Connection

Metal Check 1 (Box) evaluation and rejection.


■ When rejector is used
Can reject products one by one reliably.
■ Evaluation method
Does not use photocell for product recognition.
Performs metal evaluation and rejection from the
Evaluation mode point where MDNG evaluation occurred. OK
products are not counted in statistics.
Metal Check 2 (Bulk)
■ When rejector is used
Metal Check 3 (Bulk)
Rejection timing must be adjusted manually because
individual products are not recognized. Set rejection
4 Maintenance

time of 2 times or more of the product inspected


assuming that metal is located at the head and/or tail
of the product.
■ Evaluation method
Uses photocell to recognize the product for missing
Missing Check (Box) inspection and rejection.
■ When rejector is used
Can reject products one by one reliably.
Set whether to perform the “Double Product
No Evaluation”. This item is set to “Yes” when checking a
Double product
5 Appendix

Yes missing product and you cannot change this setting.


evaluation
ALL When ALL is set, double-OK products are rejected as
Double Product.

56
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
If the evaluation value of a product fed through with
the bulk type setting (photocell is not used) is equal

1 Basic Operations
MD Ultra under 0.3
to or lower than this parameter, it is not counted.
limit (0.0 to 10.0)
When data is retrieved in the histogram while the
product is not fed through, set a larger value.
Parameter to set the algorithm for signal processing.
The variation of work effect value may become larger
Algorithm 1 if 2 is set.
2
1 Set to stabilize the detection sensitivity.
2 Set to enhance the detection sensitivity.

2 Advanced Operations
This is the check method being used for the currently
selected product.
If a product is evaluated as NG
in a metal evaluation, the
product being fed is evaluated
as NG.
Metal check Set this when the interval
(bulk) between fed products is 280 mm
or less, when the product cannot

3 Installation and Connection


block the photocell since it is too
thin, or when inspecting smaller
products such as candies.
If a product is evaluated as NG
Metal check (bulk) in a metal evaluation, the
product being fed is evaluated
Metal check
Check method as NG.
(packaged)
Metal check Set this when the interval
Missing
(packaged) between fed products is 280 mm
or more, when the products
interrupt the photocell, and when
4 Maintenance

the products are rejected


individually.
Checks if accessories made of
metal (or coated with
aluminum-evaporated products)
are missing. Set this when the
Missing interval between fed products is
280 mm or more, when the
products interrupt the photocell,
and when the products are
5 Appendix

rejected individually.

57
Basic Usage
■ Set conveyor speed
Set main conveyor speed
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → Set main
conveyor speed)
1 Basic Operations

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Main Conveyor 50
Sets the CW Conveyor Speed.
Speed (5 to 120 m/min)
Set this parameter when a two speed conveyor
Conveyor Speed High (optional) is used.
H/L Low High Main conveyor speed (high speed)
2 Advanced Operations

Low Main conveyor speed (low speed)

RJ conveyor spd. Settings


(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → RJ conveyor spd.
settings)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
RJ Conveyor 50
Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
3 Installation and Connection

Speed (5 to 120 m/min)


Auto Sets the RJ Speed automatic calculation to Enabled
Manual or Disabled.
* If RJ Conveyor The RJ Conveyor Speed is automatically calculated
Speed is set when the CW Conveyor Speed or product length is
manually when input while this parameter set to "Auto", or this
RJ conveyor spd. parameter is changed from “Manual" to "Auto".
settings this parameter is
“Auto”, this To perform automatic calculations, it is necessary to
parameter satisfy the following two conditions in addition to
automatically those above.
changes to ■ Either a flipper or dropout rejector is used.
“Manual”. ■ The conveyor speed for each product is used.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

58
Basic Usage
■ Measurement timing
Measurement timing set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Measurement timing →
Measurement timing set)

1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
T0
Timer to acquire the MDNG signal (optional).
(MDNG valid (0 to 6000) ms
This timer is automatically set (parameter per product).
time)
T1 Displays the time until the product moves onto the
(Measurement (30 to 6500) ms weigh conveyor. The value is calculated
delay time) automatically when the product length is input.

2 Advanced Operations
T2 Displays the weigh cell stabilization time. The value
(Stabilization (40 to 6500) ms is calculated automatically when the product length is
time) input.

Auto When this parameter is set to "Auto", (T1), (T2), and


Meas. timing Filter Time are automatically set when Product length
Manual and CW Conveyor Speed are input. (Manual/Auto)
Sets measurement filter time. Filter Time is set
Auto Calculation
Filter Time automatically by inputting the product length and
Value
conveyor speed.

Auto Sets whether or not to make automatic calculation of


Dbl. Prod Timer
T8. T8 is automatically calculated by inputting T1, T2,

3 Installation and Connection


Setting Manual and product length when ”Auto” is set.
Auto Calculation Double-product detection time. The checkweigher
T8 Value produces a double-product evaluation when the
(Dbl. Prod Timer)
(10 to 12500 ms) photocell is blocked by the next product within time T8.
T5 Auto Calculation
Time during which auto-zero setting cannot be
(Zero-set disabled Value
performed.
time) (0 to 60000 ms)
Sets the EXNG delay time (the shift time until CW
1 accepts the External NG signal). This is set when
EXNG Delay Time
(0 to 9999) ms conveyor speed by product and I/O input: EXNG
signal are used together.
Sets the EXNG2 delay time (the shift time until the
4 Maintenance
EXNG2 Delay 1 checkweigher accepts the External NG2 signal). This
Time (0 to 9999) ms is set when conveyor speed by product and I/O input:
EXNG2 signal are used together.
5 Appendix

59
Basic Usage
■ RJ timing
RJ timing settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing settings)
1 Basic Operations

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
T3
Sets the rejector delay time (from the end of weighing
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999) ms
to the start of rejector operation).
time)
T4
(RJ operation Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(45 to 9999) ms
operation).
time)*1
This parameter is automatically set according to the
Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to "Auto", T3
2 Advanced Operations

RJ Timing
manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
This parameter is automatically set according to the
specified RJ model type.
Pulses Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
RJ Output Type*2
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next
Hold
RJ output.
Selects the +NG product processing.
* If Pass Stats is specified, +NG product data is not
3 Installation and Connection

included in the statistics.


Product is discharged in accordance with
NG the NG Product setting, or the conveyor
stops.
+NG Product NG
The product is not discharged and is fed in
(by prod.)*3 OK
the direction of PASS products. The
product is considered an +NG product in
OK Statistics Count. However, in the case of
+OVF, the product cannot be correctly
weighed, so it is considered an +NG
product.
4 Maintenance

Does not stop the conveyor when NG


Nonstop
NG product Nonstop product occurs.
process (by prod.)*3 Stop Stop the conveyor when NG product
Stop
occurs.
5 Appendix

60
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set the rejection operation when T4 of the next
product overlaps during T4 (rejection hold time). Set

1 Basic Operations
this item when using a rejector that has a low rejecting
performance such as a shuttle rejector.
Performs the rejection operation after T3
Evaluate
Rejection output Evaluate Priority (Rejection delay time) according to the
Priority
control*4 NG Priority latest evaluation result.
Extends the rejection operation in the NG
direction when the first product is evaluated
NG
as NG and the next product is evaluated as
Priority

2 Advanced Operations
OK. The operation is extended for T4 of the
next product.

*1
When a product with a large metal effect value such as aluminum tape is fed,
MDNG evaluation is held depending on the conveyor speed set, and no rejection
can be done during the hold time.
Main conveyor speed [m/min] Hold time [sec]
9 or less 10.0

3 Installation and Connection


10 to 19 6.5
20 to 38 4.0
39 or more 3.0
*2 The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.
*3 “+NG Product” and “NG product process” is displayed when “operation / by prod.” Is
set to “by prod.”.
*4 This parameter is invalid and hidden when RJ Shift by Rank is enabled, when the
rejection output type is set to "Hold” or when the product is “Bulk Type”.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

61
Basic Usage
■ Detection sensitivity
Adjust detection sensitivity
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Det. Sens. → Detection sens. settings)
1 Basic Operations

Detection sens. settings

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Eval. Limit
Magnification (Fe)

Eval. Limit
Magnification (SUS) This parameter sets the evaluation limit
2 Advanced Operations

magnification that is automatically set when the


auto setting of the metal contamination check
Eval. Limit
finishes.
Magnification (ML1)
The estimated detection sensitivity displayed
5.0
after auto setting is the value for the evaluation
Eval. Limit (0.1 to 19.0)
limit magnification set by this parameter.
Magnification (ML2)
Regarding the “Evaluation limit magnification
(Fe)” and “Evaluation limit magnification
Eval. Limit (SUS)”, M6-h is used only when checking a
3 Installation and Connection

Magnification (ML3) missing product.

Eval. Limit
Magnification (ML4)

* Read only This is the value of the estimated detection


Est. Sens (Fe)
sensitivity (Fe) displayed after auto setting.
* Read only This is the value of the estimated detection
Est. Sens (SUS)
sensitivity (SUS) displayed after auto setting.
4 Maintenance

■ Test piece control sensitivity


(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Set test piece ctl sense)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )

Φ0.0 Set the size of the Fe test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).

Φ0.0 Set the size of the SUS test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
5 Appendix

Φ0.0 Set the size of the Non-Fe test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).

62
Basic Usage
■ Statistic product settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Statistic product settings)

Setting
Name Description

1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Batch Cycle Qty. (1 to 999999) Sets the cycle (count) of the production batch.
Batch time (1 to 14,440 minutes) Sets the cycle (time) of the production batch.
Sets the upper limit of Xbar (mean value) in the "X-R"
(-9999.99 screen and "X-s" screen.
X-bar +limit
to +9999.99 g)
This is used for management purposes.
Sets the lower limit of Xbar (mean value) in the "X-R"
(-9999.99 screen and "X-s" screen.
X-bar -limit
to +9999.99 g)
This is used for management purposes.

2 Advanced Operations
These parameters are the frequency distribution
Histogram Scale (0.01 to +9999.99) pitch and frequency distribution -NG limit for the
“Histogram” screen used to see a detailed view of the
boundary between PASS and NG products.
Auto-setting is performed when the reference value
and +NG and -NG limits are input. Set these
parameters manually when you want to change the
Histogram Lower (-9999.99
auto-set values. When the settings are changed
Limit to +9999.99)
during operation, the correct frequency distribution
results are not obtained if the statistics are not
cleared.

3 Installation and Connection


This sets the upper limit for inclusion in the statistics.
Valid +Limit (-9999.99
Weights outside the set limit range are excluded from
(Statistics) to +9999.99 g)
the statistics. Rejection is not affected by this setting.
This sets the lower limit for inclusion in the statistics.
Weights outside the set limit range are excluded from
Valid -Limit (-9999.99 the statistics. Rejection is not affected by this setting.
(Statistics) to +9999.99 g) When both Valid +Limit and Valid -Limit are set to 0,
inclusion in the statistics is not limited and all data is
included in the statistics.
(-9999.99 This is the upper limit of R (range) for the "X-R"
R +Limit
to +9999.99 g) screen and "X-s" screen.
(-9999.99 This is the upper limit of s (standard deviation) for the
s +Limit
to +9999.99 g) "X-R" screen and "X-s" screen. 4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

63
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
You can set whether to perform the automatic
calculation.
1 Basic Operations

The automatic calculation value is calculated using


the following formula.
Histogram scale = (Upper limit value - Lower limit
value + 0.01)/13
Histogram lower limit = Standard value + Lower
limit value - Histogram scale
* When “Decimal Point” is “.00”
Histogram auto No Does not calculate the histogram scale
setting Yes and histogram lower limit even when
No either of the standard value, lower limit
value, and upper limit value is
2 Advanced Operations

changed.
Calculates the histogram scale and
histogram lower limit every time either
of the standard value, lower limit value,
Yes and upper limit value is changed.
Changes the histogram auto setting to
“No” when the histogram scale or
histogram lower limit is manually set.

■ Conveyor mode
3 Installation and Connection

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Conveyor Mode)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
No Perform weight evaluation.
Yes Set when weight evaluation is not to be performed.
CW Conveyor Set when weight evaluation, MDNG (metal NG)
Mode Yes evaluation, and EXNG (external NG) evaluation are not
(Force Motor ON) to be performed. This setting is also effective when an
extremely long product, etc., is to be forcibly conveyed.
MD Conveyor No Sets when use the conveyor without metal
Mode Yes contamination detection.
4 Maintenance

 P. 219 Using Conveyor Mode


5 Appendix

64
Basic Usage
■ Metal Detector
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Metal Detector)

Fe Side setting

1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to save the results of tracking the Fe phase
by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power
Not Save is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
setting is performed.
Save
Fe: Tracking data Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
Not Save

2 Advanced Operations
stops. The auto tracking function starts at
this time.
Save
Note that the auto tracking data is cleared
when the power is turned off or the auto
setting is performed.
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
50
Fe: S1 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 250)
optimum value.
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
0

3 Installation and Connection


Fe: S2 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 1000000)
optimum value.

SUS Side setting

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to save the results of tracking the SUS
phase by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power is
Not Save turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
setting is performed.
4 Maintenance
SUS: Save
Tracking data Not Save Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
stops. The auto tracking function starts at
this time.
Save
Note that the auto tracking data is cleared
when the power is turned off or the auto
setting is performed.
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
50
SUS: S1 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 250)
optimum value.
5 Appendix

Normally, you do not have to change this parameter


0
SUS: S2 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 1000000)
optimum value.

65
Basic Usage
■ Product check
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product check)

Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations

(Default: )
Set whether to perform a product check.
No Does not perform a product check.
Performs a product check when the
conveyor starts running first after the
power is turned on or the product is
No Standard changed. Note that a product check is
Default Phase
Standard not performed when the product is
Correction
2 Advanced Operations

Each changed while the conveyor is


running.
Always performs a product check
when the conveyor starts running.
Each
* This setting cannot be specified
when a smart guide is being used.
Set the allowable range of the phase shifting when
Default Phase 0.5° multiple master products are fed through during a
Correction Range (0.1 to 10.0°) product check. Increasing the value reduces the
accuracy.
3 Installation and Connection

1 Set the number of master products fed through


Default Phase
during a product check. Increasing the value
Correction Count (1 to 5) stabilizes checking.

6.0° Set the range of the phase shifting of master


Default Phase
products fed through during a product check.
Correction Limit (0.1 to 10.0°) Increasing the value reduces the accuracy.
Prod. Detection level
(Fe)

Prod. Detection level


(SUS)
Set the tracking level in a product check for bulk
settings. The set value is a multiple of the product
Prod. Detection level
4 Maintenance

0.80 effect value (Imax) for auto-settings.


(ML1)
(0.01 to 1.00) * If a product check does not finish even after a
Prod. Detection level product has been fed through, specify a smaller
(ML2) value for this setting.
Prod. Detection level
(ML3)
Prod. Detection level
(ML4)

 P. 230 Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (product check function)
5 Appendix

66
Basic Usage
■ HIS setting details
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → HIS setting details)

Setting
Name Description

1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Algorithm auto
Yes Sets the algorithm automatically based on the results
selection
No of HIS settings when “Yes” is set.

Sets the S1 automatically based on the results of


S1 auto selection Yes HIS settings when “Yes” is set. This parameter is
No automatically set to “No” if Algorithm auto selection is
set to “No”.
Fe: FNo

2 Advanced Operations
This is the optimum processing method determined
SUS: FNo * Read only
based on the result of the HIS setting.

■ FOCUS setting details


(Adjust registered products → Product settings → FOCUS setting details)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Hi freq. : FSNo.2

3 Installation and Connection


This is the optimum processing method determined
* Read only
Lo freq. : FSNo.2 based on the result of the FOCUS setting.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

67
Basic Usage
■ Tracking conditions
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Tracking conditions)

Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations

(Default: )
This parameter sets parameters related to auto tracking
from the characteristics during the production.
OFF When measuring a product that requires auto-tracking
Standard function, the auto-tracking function is automatically
Temp Chg1 enabled according to the auto-setting. But if the status of
Temp Chg2 the product changes rapidly, the auto-tracking function
Temp Chg3 might not be enabled with the parameters set by the
auto-setting. To prevent this problem from occurring, this
Var-1
parameter can be used to set the tracking parameter for
Var-2 supporting rapid changes. The settings Temp Chg1 to
2 Advanced Operations

Var-3 Temp Chg3 and Var-1 to Var-3 can be set after the
Tracking Type auto-setting is performed without a need of performing
the auto-setting again.
It is also possible to disable the auto-tracking function
forcibly.

Sets how to perform auto-tracking.


OFF
Standard1 OFF Auto-tracking is not performed.

Standard Auto-tracking is performed in accordance


3 Installation and Connection

1 with the product characteristics.


Set whether to save the results of tracking the Fe
phase by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power
Not
is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the
Save
auto setting is performed.
Fe: Tracking data Save
Not Save Save the tracking phase when the
conveyor stops. The auto tracking function
starts at this time.
Save
Note that the auto tracking data is cleared
when the power is turned off or the auto
4 Maintenance

setting is performed.
Set whether to save the results of tracking the SUS
phase by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power
Not
is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the
Save
SUS: auto setting is performed.
Tracking data Save/Not Save Save the tracking phase when the
conveyor stops. The auto tracking function
starts at this time.
Save
5 Appendix

Note that the auto tracking data is cleared


when the power is turned off or the auto
setting is performed.

68
Basic Usage

Auto-tracking function is automatically set based on the results of auto-setting.


Setting the auto-tracking function ON/OFF requires special knowledge. Ask Anritsu or its
distributor for service to perform the setting.

1 Basic Operations
■ Full detection
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Full Detection)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )

0 This is used for detecting when the rejected-products


BoxFull Qty. box is full. This sets the permissible count from when full
(0 to 9999)

2 Advanced Operations
is detected until the conveyor is stopped.

 P. 176 Full detection

■ NG Rate
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → NG Rate: NG)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )

3 Installation and Connection


Sets the NG rate batch.
100 When the rate in NG rate batch exceeds the set value
NG Rate Batch
(1 to 100) (NG rate) during NG rate evaluation, the NG Rate alarm
is output.
Sets the rate for NG Rate.
0
NG Rate Alarm When the rate in NG rate batch exceeds the set value,
(1 to 100%)
the NG Rate alarm is output.

 P. 178 NG rate

■ Counter preset 4 Maintenance


(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Counter preset)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
0
Counter Preset Sets the count for the counter preset.
(0 to 999999)
5 Appendix

69
Basic Usage
■ RJ operation adjustment
(Adjust registered products → RJ operation adjustment → RJ Parameter table)

Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations

(Default: )
RJ Conveyor
(5 to 120 m/min) Set conveyor speed of rejector.
Speed
Sets the RJ Speed automatic calculation to Enabled or
Auto Disabled.
manual The RJ Conveyor Speed is automatically calculated
* If RJ Conveyor when the CW Conveyor Speed or product length is input
Speed is set
while this parameter set to "Auto", or this parameter is
RJ conveyor spd. manually when
changed from “Manual" to "Auto".
2 Advanced Operations

settings this parameter


is “Auto”, this To perform automatic calculations, it is necessary to
parameter satisfy the following two conditions in addition to those
automatically
changes to above.
“Manual”. ▪ Either a flipper or dropout rejector is used
▪ The conveyor speed for each product is used.
T3
Sets the reject delay time (from the end of weighing to
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999 ms)
the start of rejector operation).
time)
3 Installation and Connection

T4
Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(RJ operation (45 to 9999 ms)
operation).
time)
This parameter is automatically set according to the
Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to "Auto", T3
RJ Timing
manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
This parameter is automatically set according to the
specified RJ model type.
Pulses
RJ Output Type* Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next RJ
4 Maintenance

Hold
output.
* The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.

■ Auto-set
(Adjust registered products → Auto-set)

Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which causes a false
detection.
5 Appendix

 P. 99 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)

70
Basic Usage
> Handling Errors and Alarms
When the equipment detects any abnormality, an error or alarm message is displayed on
the screen.

1 Basic Operations
The date and time when the error occurred, model name, serial number, and a detailed
description of an error appears automatically, and tapping the[Help] button while
an alarm message is displayed makes a detailed description appear. If there are multiple
possible measures, they can be viewed sequentially by tapping the [Others] button. When
the buzzer alarm is enabled ( P. 184 Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer), it can be
stopped by tapping the [No sound] button.
Check the description and act according to the description. Tap the [Close] button and tap

2 Advanced Operations
the Reset button to cancel the display.
Operations cannot continue until the system recovers the error.
Operation can continue even when an alarm message is displayed. The equipment can
be stopped when an alarm is displayed by the parameter settings. Perform settings
according to the production line.
Reset button
When the "Contact the SE" message is

3 Installation and Connection


displayed, contact the SE and report the
status when the error occurred, "Error No.",
"Model", and "SN".

An example of error display

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

71
Basic Usage
■ Checking the error or alarm occurrence status
The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed.

This function is used for a daily check of the production status of device status during or
1 Basic Operations

after production.

Note that you may be asked to describe the message displayed on the screen when
making a customer support inquiry.
1 Select [?] → [Alarm occurrence status].
Tap [Latest date] or [Counts] to sort the
list in the order of date or number of
occurrences.
2 Advanced Operations

2 Select one of the errors or alarms and tap


[Date/Time] to narrow down the list
based on the event that triggered the
selected error or alarm and display the
operation history. A list of the occurrence
3 Installation and Connection

dates can also be checked.

Tap [Expanded] to cancel the


narrowed-down display and return to the
normal operation history display.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

72
Basic Usage
> If NG frequently occurs
If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, you can check what might be
causing the incorrect detection by following the guidance.

1 Basic Operations
1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...].

2 Advanced Operations
2 Select the NG type and then tap [Next].

3 Installation and Connection


3 Tap [Next].
Note that if your access
level is Administrator Level or higher and
you tap [Environment Diagnosis], you
can launch a function to narrow down the
cause of the incorrect detections. (
P.74 Investigating the cause of incorrect
detections).
4 Maintenance

4 Check the device or product status


according to the descriptions on the
screen.
Tap [Next].

Note that if your access


level is Administrator Level or higher and
you tap [Frequency change], you can
5 Appendix

launch the function to change the device


settings depending on the surrounding
environment on the screen.

73
Basic Usage
5 Tap [Next] to check the contents sequentially.

6 Tap [Completed].
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

> Investigating the cause of incorrect detections


If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, the cause of the incorrect
detections can be narrowed down.

1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...]


→ [Metal NG occurs], and then tap
3 Installation and Connection

[Environment Diagnosis]. To perform this


operation, your access level must be
Administrator Level or higher.

2 Tap [Next].
This function automatically controls the
operation (on/off) of the conveyor. Do not
perform this operation during production
4 Maintenance

or while products remain on the


conveyor.

3 Check the status of the metal detector. It


takes about two minutes for the result to
be displayed.

If you tap [Cancel], the inspection will be


5 Appendix

canceled and the conveyor will stop if it is


operating.

74
Basic Usage
4 Display the inspection results.
Tap [Details] to confirm the possible
causes.

1 Basic Operations
If the problem persists or occurs again
later, contact your customer support.

5 Tap [Next].
By saving the data here, you can output

2 Advanced Operations
the inspection results if requested by
your customer support.

 P. 311 Outputting support data

6 Tap [Completed].

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

75
Basic Usage
List of inspection results

SN-00 There is no anomaly on Metal detector operation.


No anomalies If false detection occurs, consider following causes.
1 Basic Operations

▪ Product characteristics such as temperature, moisture, sodium


contents and shape is changing.
▪ Product flow is not stable.
▪ Operation is unstable due to deterioration or machine failure.
If problem persists, Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
SN-02 Sharing same power source between MD and other peripheral devices
Noise from such as packaging or filling machine can generate influential noise and
power source could cause false detection.
2 Advanced Operations

or other Separate the power source or change one plug to different nearby
devices outlet.
False detection may occur by electromagnetic noise generated from a
device with an inverter.
Change carrier frequency of an inverter by following the device
operation manual.
Peripheral MD may affect and cause false detection.
Need to arrange peripheral devices around or change frequency.
3 Installation and Connection

Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.


Operation may be unstable due to electrical fault or aged deterioration.
Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
SN-03 False detection may occur due to vibration from the floor or peripheral
Noise from devices.
vibration or ▪ Ensure to lock legs of frame.
moving metal ▪ Leave little gap between adjacent conveyor and main conveyor.
False detection may occur due to metal objects such as metal door/gate
creating influential noise by opening and closing motion.
4 Maintenance

Take measure to keep the objects away. If it does not solve a problem,
Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
5 Appendix

76
Basic Usage
SN-04 False detection may occur due to filthy conveyor belt.
Noise from Clean the conveyor belt. There may be residue left on the belt.
conveyor ( P.273 Cleaning)
movement Any fray or scratch found, the belt should be replaced.

1 Basic Operations
( P.286 Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller,  P.297 Removing the
Conveyor Belt)
When conveyor belt has any contact to MD aperture, it would lead to
possible false detection.
Ensure to keep the conveyor belt not to come in contact with MD
aperture.
( P.289 Adjusting Belt Alignment,  P.299 Adjusting Belt Alignment)

2 Advanced Operations
Roller deformation faulty motor would generate influential noise and
cause false detection.
Check any abnormality on exterior of conveyor unit. Call Anritsu or its
distributor for service.

* The system can easily be influenced by external noise if the evaluation limit
magnification value is too low. If the test piece can be detected with sufficient margin,
increase the evaluation limit magnification value or perform auto-setting again.

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

77
Daily Operation Procedure
Daily Operation Procedure

Warning (1) In an emergency, cut the power to the Turn leftwards


ON
checkweigher by turning the power switch
leftwards
OFF
1 Basic Operations

Power switch
If the optional Emergency Stop Switch is Press to stop CW
fitted, press it to stop the checkweigher in an in an emergency
emergency.
An alarm message (A361) is displayed on the
screen.

Releasing Emergency Stop Switch and recovery Release lock


2 Advanced Operations

method
(a) Release Emergency Stop Switch
Turn the head of the switch in the marked
direction.
(b) Use the Reset button to reset the alarm.
Tap the Reset // button displayed on the
screen.
(c) Tap the Stop button to stop the
checkweigher.
Address the cause of the emergency stop,
remove the product on the checkweigher
3 Installation and Connection

conveyors and rejector, and restart


operations.
(2) For safety, NEVER touch any moving part during operation.
(3) For safety, NEVER operate the checkweigher when it is partly
disassembled.
(4) For safety, ALWAYS confirm that the operator is not touching any
moving part before starting the checkweigher by remote control.

Using Smart Guide


Smart Guide makes the checkweigher display on-screen instructions to follow for daily
4 Maintenance

operations to prevent incorrect operations or the omission of steps. Smart Guide is set at
factory shipment. You can also perform operations without following the Smart Guide.

To make Smart Guide not to use


Select "Menu" → "Maint. and Setting" → "Functions" → "Smart guide settings". Select
"No" in "Input" and tap [OK].
5 Appendix

78
Daily Operation Procedure

Cautions when Smart Guide is not used


Before starting production, check the zero point and sensitivity.
(1) Zero point check

1 Basic Operations
Press the [Zero Set] button when nothing is on the weigh conveyor and make sure
that the weight display is zero. If any tare value is set, the setting value is shown as a
negative number.
(2) Sensitivity check
Place the reference weight on the weigh conveyor and make sure that the correct weight is
displayed.

The following describes the standard flow of operations when using Smart Guide.

2 Advanced Operations
1 Perform an inspection before starting
operations.
■ Checking for contact with other devices
Make sure that the checkweigher is not in contact with the upstream/downstream
conveyors or peripheral devices.
■ Cleaning the conveyor and weigh unit

3 Installation and Connection


Clean the checkweigher for correct measurement and equipment maintenance.
■ Checking the conveyor belt
Replace the belt if there is any fraying.

2 Turn the power on.


Press "Start" and follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.

 P. 32 Turning On/Off Power


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

79
Daily Operation Procedure
3 Perform an inspection and check before
starting production.
Perform the following operations by
following the on-screen instructions.
1 Basic Operations

■ Selecting an access level


Press "Select an access level" and set it
according to the operation to be
performed.

 P. 32 Changing Access Level


2 Advanced Operations

■ Selecting the manufacture date and


manufacture unit
Tap [Select Manufacture Date] and
specify the date on which production will
be performed and the production unit.

■ Inspection before starting production


3 Installation and Connection

When the "Start inspection" is tapped,


the inspection items are displayed on the
screen. Confirm the items and tap [Yes].
Tap [Next] to proceed to product
selection.

Screen with Access Level set to 1b


■ Selecting a product
Tap "Select the product", check and select
the target product, and tap "Prod. Chg.".
4 Maintenance

The screen on the right is displayed.


Check the product name and tap [Next].
To register a new product, tap [Register
product] and set it.

[Next] is not enabled until the product registration completes (product parameter setting and
auto-setting must be finished).

Adjusting detection sensitivity


5 Appendix

To adjust the detection sensitivity of metal detector, press [Adjust detection sensitivity ].

 P. 233 Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity

80
Daily Operation Procedure
■ Operation check before production
Tap [Next] to perform an operation check
before production. Press the Start button
and feed an OK product, +NG product,

1 Basic Operations
and -NG product in this order.

When the operations above are complete,


the screen on the right is displayed, and
production can be started.

4 Start production.

2 Advanced Operations
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.

3 Installation and Connection


For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10
minutes before the start of production.
(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)

Before starting the conveyors, remove any products that are on the infeed, weigh, or
downstream conveyors. If operation is started while products are on the conveyors, weighing
and rejection may not perform correctly.

When [Next] is tapped, the screen on the 4 Maintenance


right is displayed. Tap the Start button to
start production.
5 Appendix

81
Daily Operation Procedure
5 Perform a check at production completion.
When 1 of "Display" is selected while
operation is stopped, the screen on the
right is displayed.
1 Basic Operations

To finish, tap [Next] to perform an


operation check at production completion.

Follow the on-screen instructions to


perform the operation check that was
performed before starting production
2 Advanced Operations

again.

If the operation check is successful,


operation during production can be
determined as normal.

Check that "OK" is displayed, and tap


[Next].
3 Installation and Connection

6 Perform the next production.


To perform production of another product,
select "Proceed with the next prod".

Otherwise, select "Execute end process".


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

82
Daily Operation Procedure
7 Execute end process.
When "Execute end process" is selected
in the screen above, the screen on the
right is displayed.

1 Basic Operations
Tap "Start inspection" and perform
inspection by following the on-screen
instructions.

After the inspection is complete, the following screen is displayed. Tap [Complete
current process].

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
After turning off the power, be sure to:
■ Clean the weigh unit.
■ Clean the belt top and back surfaces.
■ Clean the checkweigher.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

83
2 Advanced Operations
This chapter describes the operations according to the purpose.

Screen Hierarchy 85

Viewing Measurement Data 88

Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment 94
2 Advanced Operations

Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data 102

Other Settings and Adjustments 156

Options and Peripheral Devices 184

Other Useful Functions 209

84
1 Basic Operations 2 Advanced Operations 3 Installation and Connection 4 Maintenance 5 Appendix
Screen Hierarchy
The screen system of this checkweigher is as follows.

85
Screen Hierarchy
Screen Hierarchy
*1
Product information
Product settings
Inspection condition set

Conveyor speed Set main conveyor speed


1 Basic Operations

RJ Conveyor Spd. Setting

Measurement timing Timing Adjustment


Measurement timing setting

RJ Timing Adjust RJ timing


RJ Timing Setting

Detection Sensitivity Sensitivity Adjustment


Sensitivity Adjustment 2
Set testpiece ctl. sense
Detection sensitivity settings
Statistic product settings
2 Advanced Operations

Conveyor Mode

Metal Detector Fe Side setting


SUS Side setting
Product check

HIS setting details

FOCUS setting details

Tracking conditions

Full detection

NG Rate
3 Installation and Connection

Counter Preset

*2 *6
RJ operation adjustment Adjust RJ timing
Functions Photocell monitoring
RJ Parameter table
Smart guide settings
Full detection

*3 NG Rate
Home display settings Home screen disp. sel. Counter preset
Ope. Check menu sel. Product check
Prod. Control menu sel. Auto Limit Setting
Set/Adj menu sel. Prod. management settings **
Other Menu sel. Multi range **
Custom display screen settings
*7
Basic screen disp. settings
4 Maintenance

Security and rules Set Access Authority


*4
Password Change
Installation check Confirmation at installation
User management settings **
Set RJ direction
Prod. management settings **
Register new product.
Policy setting list
MD Head Inspection
Common/By product
Installation check setting
Caution for handling
** Not available
Noise avoidance setting
5 Appendix

86
Screen Hierarchy
*5
Unit/connected device set
Weighcell Sensitivity Correction
Weighcell check
Zero-set

1 Basic Operations
Weighcell settings

Conveyor Set main conveyor


RJ conveyor settings
Set other conveyor

Rejector Common set of RJ


RJ direction settings
I/O output settings
IO timing adjustment

Signal tower / Buzzer Signal tower common settings

2 Advanced Operations
Signal tower settings
I/O output settings
IO timing adjustment

Printer Printer Settings


Printer output settings

USB Memory Set USB Memory store

General I/O connection I/O input settings


I/O output settings
IO timing adjustment
IO input setting (Details)

3 Installation and Connection


IO output setting (Details)
EXT-I/O connect setting

Serial connection Serial1 settings


Serial2(A) settings
Serial3(B) settings

Network connection Network Common settings


Communication content settings
Time synchronization settings
NTP time acquisition
*8
Network status
Unit monitoring Timing Adjustment
Version upgrade
Product effect monitor
Noise monitor
4 Maintenance
IO timing adjustment

*9
Device Information Version Information
Device Information settings

*10
Maintenance Information User Information
5 Appendix

87
Viewing Measurement Data
Viewing Measurement Data

> Basic display


Daily operation can be made with a single
touch of the screen.
1 Basic Operations

> General
2 Advanced Operations

In the General screen, the measured value,


reference value, lower limit, upper limit, tare
weight (if any), inspection total count and
OK/NG product counts of the product are
displayed.

See “Description of Operation screen” (P. 16) for details about the metal detecting level
3 Installation and Connection

bar and the icon displayed under the measured value.


Item Explanation
Ref. Val. Weight of the product registered as the master product in Product settings.
Value set as the lower limit of PASS products (the difference from the
-Limit
reference value).
Value set as the upper limit of PASS products (the difference from the
+Limit
reference value).
Tare Sets the weight of the container, bag, or box for tare measurement.
Total Displays the total count including OK and NG products.
OK Displays the number of PASS products.
NG Displays the number of products other than PASS.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

88
Viewing Measurement Data
> Statistics
If the target data for statistics is set to [ALL],
the total count and OK, NG products, and

1 Basic Operations
double product count and percentage (%)
are displayed in the left side of the Statis
screen. In the right side of the screen, the
accumulated total weight, mean value
(X-bar), standard deviation (s), randomness
(R), maximum value (Max) and minimum
value (Min) are displayed.
To switch the target data for statistics, press the [ALL] button (all products including NG

2 Advanced Operations
products) and [Pass] button (PASS products only) in the lower right part of the screen.
Item Explanation
Total Current total count of all products since statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all PASS products since statistics last
OK
cleared
-NG Current total count and percentage of all -NG products since statistics last cleared
+NG Current total count and percentage of all +NG products since statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all MDNG products is detected since
MDNG

3 Installation and Connection


statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all double products since statistics last
D-Prod.
cleared
Current total count and percentage of all external NG products since statistics last
EXNG
cleared.
EXNG2 Same as EXNG. Use this when multiple external NG inputs are used.
Lot No. Lot number of the current product
Indicates the start time (time when production started after statistics last cleared).
St. Time
(Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute:Second)
Total.W Current total weight of all products since statistics last cleared
X bar Current mean weight since statistics last cleared
s Current standard deviation of weighed products since statistics last cleared
4 Maintenance

R Displays |Max - Min|.


Max Current max weight of weighed products since statistics last cleared
Min Current min weight of weighed products since statistics last cleared
5 Appendix

89
Viewing Measurement Data
> Histogram
The measurement results from the statistics
clear to the present are displayed in the
1 Basic Operations

histogram by the preset scale. The vertical


axis indicates the data count, and the
horizontal axis shows the weight value.
In the right side of the screen, the mean value
(X-bar), standard deviation (s), randomness
(R), maximum, and minimum are displayed.
[ALL] (all products including NG products) or [Pass] (PASS products only) can be selected as
target data for statistics. Also, the histogram can be displayed in the [Upright] or [Side]
2 Advanced Operations

orientation.
Item Explanation
X bar Current mean weight since statistics last cleared.
s Current standard deviation of weighed products since statistics last cleared.
R Displays |Max - Min|.
Max Current max weight since statistics last cleared.
Min Current min weight since statistics last cleared.
Weight Measured weight of the product.
3 Installation and Connection

> X-bar R/s


The values displayed in the right side of the
graph are the mean values of X-bar, R, and s
from the statistics clear to the present time.
The changes of the mean value (X-bar),
randomness width (R), and standard
deviation (s) are displayed in graphs by the
preset cycle (batch cycle quantity or time).
4 Maintenance

The standard deviation and randomness width can be switched by pressing [R]/[s] below
the graph.
[ALL] (all products including NG products) or [Pass] (PASS products only) can be selected
as target data for statistics.
The meanings of the words displayed on the graph are as follows. UCL and LCL are used
as guidelines for control of production. The settings can be specified by selecting "Adjust
registered products"  "Product settings"  "Statistic Product Settings" in the "Menu"
screen.
5 Appendix

90
Viewing Measurement Data
X-bar UCL (Upper Control Limit, X-bar +Limit, yellow line)
Mean upper limit value. It is automatically calculated as the reference value
plus UCL (X-bar +Limit).
It is set in "UCL (X-bar +Limit)" in the "Statistic product settings" screen.

1 Basic Operations
CL (Center Line, blue line)
Mean weight value for the batch.
LCL (Lower Control Limit, X-bar -Limit, red line)
Mean lower limit value. It is automatically calculated as the reference value
minus LCL (X-bar -Limit).
It is set in "LCL (X-bar -Limit)" in the "Statistic product settings" screen.
s UCL (Upper Control Limit, yellow line)

2 Advanced Operations
Upper limit of standard deviation. It is set in "s +Limit" in the "Statistic product
settings" screen.
CL (Center Line, blue line)
Mean standard deviation (or randomness width) of the batch.
R UCL (Upper Control Limit, yellow line)
Upper limit of randomness. It is set in "R +Limit" in the "Statistic product
settings" screen.
CL (Center Line, blue line)

3 Installation and Connection


Mean randomness width of the batch.
Cycle Count that is set as a batch.
To specify Cycle with Time instead of Count, select the "Menu" screen 
"Stats Control"  "Basic Statistics Setting"  "Batch Cycle Unit" and press
[Input], and then select "Time”.

> Enlarged bar


In the “Enlarge bar” screen, the weight data 4 Maintenance
of the individual products on the conveyor is
displayed with a bar and a numeric value.
The enlarged display of the bar enables to
recognize the weight dispersion with ease.
5 Appendix

91
Viewing Measurement Data
> Zoom Weight Disp.
The graph is excluded from the weight
display screen, and the measured value is
1 Basic Operations

enlarged in the display.


In the lower left part of the screen, the
capacity (count/min) during operation is
displayed in real-time. It becomes 0 when
operation stops.
"Max.” indicates the maximum capacity recorded during production. It becomes 0 when
[Clear] is pressed or the power is turned off.
"Max. cap”. indicates the maximum capacity of this checkweigher regardless of the
2 Advanced Operations

production data.
In the lower right part of the screen, the production total, OK product count, and NG
product count from the statistics clear up to the present time are displayed.

> Custom Disp.


Up to two items which are pre-selected,
among “All Prod.”, “OK product count”,
3 Installation and Connection

“Weight”, “Perf. Value” and “W. mean value”


can be displayed.
In the "Menu" screen, select "Control Panel"
 "Home display settings"  "Custom
display screen settings" and press [Input],
then select the items(s) to be displayed.
■ Access level 2 or higher is required to set.

■ When “No” is selected at “Display area 2”, the lower half part of the display will be
blank.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

92
Viewing Measurement Data
> Individual Disp.
The evaluation results and each weight
value of the last 31 products are displayed in

1 Basic Operations
sequence. The weight value surrounded with
a yellow frame is the latest one.
The statistics appeared at the bottom of the
screen are from the data currently displayed
on the screen only.

When [Stop] at the bottom right of the screen

2 Advanced Operations
is pressed, update of display is stopped.
Press [Restart] to resume update.
Press [Clear] to delete the display of data
and statistics.
Update of display is stopped

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

93
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment

> Sensitivity Correction


If the weight value displayed in the screen is different from the known value of the weight
or master product, perform sensitivity correction.
1 Basic Operations

1 When operation is stopped, press


"Others.", and then in the following
display screen, select "Sensitivity
Correction”.
2 Advanced Operations

2 When the "Start Sensitivity Correction"


screen is displayed, press "Next”.
Follow the instructions to perform
sensitivity correction.
3 Installation and Connection

Enter the Mass of Master Weight. To


perform sensitivity correction, use the
same weight displayed value in the
“Weight Range”.
If there is no weight, prepare a substitute
that is close to the “Weight Range”, and
measure the weight using a static scale
4 Maintenance

in advance.

Entering the value, press [Next] to


perform sensitivity correction.

"Weight Range" displays the upper limit of the weight range.


5 Appendix

94
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
Perform the operations in Step 1 through Step 3 by following the on-screen instructions.

When placing the weight on the weigh conveyor, place it at the center.

1 Basic Operations
"Level" below the weight display indicates the percentage in the weight capture range.

When sensitivity correction is performed


correctly, the following screen will be
displayed.

Press [Completed] to return to the


“General” screen.

2 Advanced Operations
If an error or an alarm message is
displayed, refer to "Error Messages and
Solutions" and perform the appropriate
actions, and then perform sensitivity
correction again.

 P. 316 Error Messages and Solutions

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

95
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
> Fine Adjustment
When the weight of the master product and the displayed value during operation are different,
the displayed value needs to be corrected. This correction is called fine adjustment.
1 Basic Operations

Cautions on fine adjustment


■ Master product refers to a typical product with average characteristics (such as size,

weight, contents, and packaging) passed on the line.


■ Feed the master product under the same conditions (such as position and flow
orientation) as normal products.
2 Advanced Operations

Conveyor belt
Master product

Viewed from the top


■ Adjust the photocell position so that the master product interrupts the optical axis.
■ If the master product is of a different form from products fed on the actual line, or if the
flow orientation is different, there may be some risk of reduced accuracy when feeding
3 Installation and Connection

actual products during the production run.


■ Perform fine adjustment after setting "Conveyor Speed", "Prod Len", or "Ref. Value".
■ The measurement accuracy does not change when fine adjustment is performed.

1 Select "Others"  "Fine Adjustment”.


4 Maintenance

2 Follow the instructions on the "Fine Adjustment" screen and enter the values of the
master product weight.
5 Appendix

96
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
3 Feed the master product.
When feeding the master product, make
sure that the orientation and the position
on the belt are fixed.

1 Basic Operations
Press [Next] and then press the Start
button to start the conveyor. Follow the
on-screen instructions and feed the

2 Advanced Operations
master product through the conveyor 10
times.

When the message "Fine adjustment has finished normally” is displayed, fine adjustment
is complete. Press [Completed].

3 Installation and Connection


> Timing Adjustment
The weighing timing, RJ timing, RJ check timing, and NG input delay timing of the target
product can be set to improve overall performance. The checkweigher sets the
measurement timing automatically when the product length is entered. By fine-tuning the
value, higher measurement accuracy can be obtained.

No adjustment is required if it is within the specification accuracy. 4 Maintenance

1 When operation is stopped, press "Others" and select "Timing Adjustment".


5 Appendix

"Timing Adjustment" screen

97
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
2 In the "Timing Adjustment" screen, press the "Prod Len" area to display the input
screen.

Entering product length


1 Basic Operations

■ When the product length is entered, the Flow

measurement rejection timing (T1, T2) Product length


and filter time are calculated automatically.
For product length, enter the maximum
length in the direction of the flow of
products.
■ For products packaged in a bag, enter the dimensions in the packaged state.
2 Advanced Operations

■ For products that flow diagonally, enter a maximum length.


For special product shapes, the timing value must be set manually.

3 Set the product length. No input is


required if it has been set in the "Basic
Setting" screen.
3 Installation and Connection

4 Press the Start button and feed a product to display the product timing and damping
waveform.

Feed a product several times, and obtain the waveforms. Adjust T2 by finding a point
with minimal randomness (dispersion).
4 Maintenance

To change the range of the graph vertical axis (weight value), press [Vert. range] in the
upper right part of the screen or slide your finger to the vertical axis direction on the
graph.

To change the range of the horizontal axis (time) of the graph, press [Time] or slide
your finger in the direction of the horizontal axis on the graph.

Press [Clear] in the lower right part of the screen to clear the waveform data.

To restore the timing after changing it, set Measurement timing to "Auto”. T1, T2, and
the filter time will return to the original values.
5 Appendix

98
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
> Adjusting the RJ timing
(Adjust registered products. → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing adjustment)
The RJ timing can be adjusted by feeding through a product and checking the evaluation

1 Basic Operations
result. Tap the [Reset timing] button to set T3 and T4 automatically.

This feature is available for flipper and dropout


rejectors only.

2 Advanced Operations
> Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)
Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which may cause a false
detection.

3 Installation and Connection


 Use a master product that has the property (temperature, water content and shape) after the
change.
 For M5, the HIS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again for the
product for which the HIS setting is effective.

1 Press [Menu] → [Adjust registered


product.] when the checkweigher is
shutdown and select [Auto-set].
4 Maintenance

2 Prepare a master product and press


[Next].
5 Appendix

99
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
3 Select [Make auto setting by using
current settings] and then press [Next].
1 Basic Operations

Selecting [Make auto setting newly] allows


you to start performing the settings from the
initial state in the same way as when
registering a new product.
 P. 43 Registering a new product - step16

4 Select whether to move the master


2 Advanced Operations

product back and forth for auto setting,


and then press [Next].

5 Press the [Start] button. When the


conveyor starts running, feed through the
3 Installation and Connection

master product according to the


on-screen instructions.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

100
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
▼ Metal contamination check

Feed through the master product three

1 Basic Operations
times.

Feed through the master product one


time.

When the auto setting finishes, the


determined sensitivity mode and the
estimated detecting sensitivity are

2 Advanced Operations
displayed. Press [Completed] to apply
the new settings.

Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply


the auto setting results.

The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after performing

3 Installation and Connection


the auto setting.

▼ Missing product check

Feed through the master product once


and a missing product (NG sample
product) once.

When the auto setting finishes, the


determined sensitivity mode and the
stability index are displayed. Press
4 Maintenance

[Completed] to apply the new settings.

Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply


the auto setting results.
5 Appendix

101
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data

> Saving Data to the USB Memory


The following information can be saved to the USB memory installed to the checkweigher.
■ Statistics (total statistics, batch statistics)
1 Basic Operations

■ Measured values
■ History (Operation History, Parameter History, NG History, Alarm History, Operation
Check History)
■ Parameters set to the checkweigher (product parameters, common parameters)
■ Support data (used when a trouble occurs in the checkweigher)

The data recorded to the USB memory is in the CSV format and can be edited easily by
2 Advanced Operations

using any spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel (except for information for
restoration after a failure).
The USB memory recommended by Anritsu includes data viewer software (Conversion
Tool) that can create statistics data from measured values.
The specifications regarding USB memory are as shown below.

Item Description
Max Speed Measured value output 600 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

When Meas. Value Output is Standard: Approx. 30 million


records (data size: 64 bytes)
Maximum number of records When Meas. Value Output is Detail: Approx. 20 million
records (data size: 92 bytes)
* Calculated for 2 GB USB memory
File system FAT16/FAT32
File name, folder name Up to 255 characters
USB memory maximum capacity USB memory of up to 2 GB can be used.
Data retention period: >10 years
4 Maintenance

Recommended USB memory Rewrite count: >2,000,000 times


Supported OS: Windows XP/2000/Me/Vista/7/8/10

The number of days to save data in the USB memory for the production volume per day is
shown below.
Production volume/day 10,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 500,000
Standard 8.2 years 1.6 years 300 days 150 days 60 days
Detail 5.5 years 1.1 years 200 days 100 days 40 days
5 Appendix

102
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data

(1) When using USB memory


Do not save any data other than files created by the checkweigher.
If files created in a PC are saved to the USB memory, the files may be identified

1 Basic Operations
falsely, and data may be destroyed. This may also result in losing the
checkweigher’s ability to record data.
(2) Inserting and removing USB memory
USB memory can be inserted or removed while the power is ON. After completing
the removal command, remove the USB making sure that the writing indication
LED has turned off. If the USB memory is removed while the LED is still blinking (or
if power is suddenly turned off while the LED is still blinking), it may result in
destroying the data and the data may become unreadable. After removing USB
memory, make sure to close the cover. Otherwise, foreign objects or water may

2 Advanced Operations
enter during cleaning, resulting in failure of the equipment.
Do not insert the USB memory again immediately after you have removed it. The
USB memory might not be recognized if it is re-inserted immediately after removal.
(3) Operation when no USB memory is inserted
When there is no USB memory inserted, an alarm will be generated. Normal
operation can be run but the data will not be recorded.
(4) Operation when USB memory capacity is exceeded
When USB memory capacity is exceeded, an alarm will be generated.
After the alarm, data will not be recorded to the USB memory. Move data to a PC

3 Installation and Connection


periodically to avoid capacity overflow.
(5) Using the recommended USB memory
Use the recommended USB memory. Operation cannot be guaranteed for USB
memory other than that recommended.

■ Installing USB memory


This section describes how to install USB memory.
Cover
1 Turn the knob to open the cover of the Knob
Turn
USB memory unit.
4 Maintenance

Open

2 Insert the USB memory to the main unit


while being careful of the direction.
USB memory

3 Close the cover and turn the knob. Knob


Turn
5 Appendix

Close

103
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Removing USB memory
This section describes how to remove USB memory.

To remove USB memory safely, make sure to perform the "removal" operation in the
1 Basic Operations

checkweigher.

1 Select [?]  [Eject USB].


2 Advanced Operations

2 Turn the knob to open the cover of the


Cover
USB memory unit. Knob
Turn

Open
3 Installation and Connection

3 Make sure that the LED on the USB


memory is not blinking.

If USB memory is removed during data recording, files may be destroyed and become
unreadable. Before removing USB memory, make sure that data is not being recorded by
checking the LED on the USB memory.
Especially when measured values are being recorded in high production capacity, USB memory
may be accessed more than 10 seconds after the last product is fed. Make sure to check the
LED blinking state before removing USB memory.
4 Maintenance

4 Remove USB memory from the main unit.

USB memory
5 Close the cover and turn the knob.
Knob

Turn

Close
5 Appendix

104
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ File/folder configuration of USB memory
Data recorded by the checkweigher is stored in folders sorted by date. As device
information, folders can optionally be set with a Level 1 and Level 2 "Line Name" and
"Sub-number".

1 Basic Operations
"Record Type" and "Serial number" are automatically added to a file name. The serial
number counts up in the following cases, and a new file is created. When the date
changes, the serial number returns to 00. When the serial number is 00, addition of the
serial number to the file name is omitted.

■ If the data size of one file exceeds 1 MB


■ When USB memory is installed

2 Advanced Operations
■ When the power is turned on again

Image of folder auto generation


Level 1 folder

Level 2 folder
Record type Record data
Header
CW HEADER.csv

3 Installation and Connection


Record
Directory Record data
Year/Month/Day (RecordType_SerialNumber.csv)
History
Record HIST 20120913 HACT.csv
Directory 20120914 HPRM.csv
HNG.csv
HALM.csv
HOPCHK.csv
HACCHK.csv
Measurement RECORD 20120913 INDIV.csv
Record
Directory INDIV_01.csv
20120914 INDIV.csv
4 Maintenance

INDIV_01.csv
Statistics
Record STATS 20120913 SBTS.csv
Directory STTS.csv
20120914 SBTS.csv
STTS.csv
Parameter
Record PARAM 20120913 PP.csv
Directory
20120914 PCOM.csv
5 Appendix

"Level 1”, "Level 2”, "Record Type”, and "Year/Month/Day" folders are created automatically by
this unit.

105
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ USB memory storage settings
("Menu"  "USB memory/printer"  "Set USB Memory store")
When data is recorded to USB memory, the Level-1 Folder and Level-2 Folder can
optionally be specified to identify the device. To manage recorded data, specify folder
1 Basic Operations

names before use. By adding an expiration date to data recorded to USB memory,
insufficient capacity of USB memory can be resolved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
2 Advanced Operations

Enable
folder name.
Sets folder name for the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 (Up to 4
Do not enter a single-byte space at the beginning of a
Folder Name characters)
folder name.
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-2 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
Enable
folder name.
3 Installation and Connection

Sets folder name for the USB memory folder structure.


USB Memory Level-2
00 (0 to 99) Do not enter a single-byte space at the beginning of a
Folder Name
folder name.
Sets the time limit for data saved to USB memory.
Data folders in the USB memory stick are checked and
USB Memory Data 0
expired folders are deleted automatically. This function
Time Limit (0 to 365 days)
frees up space in USB memory. No limit is set when it
is set to 0.
Select the details of the measured value to be saved.
* The weights are not saved if “Statistics” is set to
4 Maintenance

“Only Pass” and “Meas. Value Output” is set to “Only


NG”.
No Does not save the measured values.
No Saves the weights of all products (PASS,
ALL
USB Memory Meas. ALL -NG, +NG).
Value Output Only NG Saves the weights of NG products only.
MDNG Only NG NG products include –NG, +NG, MDNG,
EXTNG, and Dbl Prod.
Saves the weights and MD evaluation
5 Appendix

values of MDNG products only. The MD


MDNG
evaluation values are not printed when the
metal detector is installed separately.

106
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Select the details of the measured value to be output.
Outputs the measured date, option code,

1 Basic Operations
Standard
USB Memory Meas. Standard rank code and measured value.
Out Contents Detail Outputs the product interval and other
Detail data in addition to the contents output
when Standard is selected.
Enables and disables the function to automatically
Store at operation No
save the operation check results into USB memory at
check end Yes
the end of the operation check.
To specify whether to save Statistical data

2 Advanced Operations
Save stats data at No automatically to USB memory at the end of the
the production end Yes production while the Smart Guide function is being
used.
Specify the batch saving cycle (0 to 9999, 4 digits
maximum).
USB Memory Batch 0
The batch saving cycle indicates the number of batches
Output Cycle (0 to 9999)
to save records into the USB memory. Specify “0” to
save only total statistics instead of using batch saving.

3 Installation and Connection


When setting a data expiration date, set the number of days in which recorded data becomes
unnecessary. Auto deletion of data is performed when the power is turned on. Make sure to
insert USB memory before turning on the power.
If no data expiration date is used for operation, save the data in the USB memory to the PC
periodically to make sure the USB memory will have free space.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

107
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Selecting data to record
Select data to record to USB memory and contents to be saved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
1 Basic Operations

Measured values are saved to USB memory for each


measurement.
The data to save can be selected.
No Saves no measured value.
Saves weights of all products (PASS, –
No ALL
NG, and +NG, products).
USB Memory Meas. ALL
Saves weights of faulty products (NG
Value Output Only NG
2 Advanced Operations

products). Only NG products means –


MDNG Only NG
NG, +NG, MDNG, EXNG and
Double-product.
Saves weights of faulty products (NG
products). Only NG products means –
MDNG
NG, +NG, MDNG, EXNG and
Double-product.
Selects measured value output contents.
Outputs measured data, option code,
3 Installation and Connection

Standard
USB Memory Meas. Standard rank code, measured value, etc.
Out Contents Detail In addition to the standard contents,
Detail “Product interval” and other options are
available

Weights are not saved when “Statistics” is set to “Only PASS” and “Meas. Value Output” is set to
“Only NG”.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

108
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Folder and file names
Measured value data is saved as "INDIV_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "RECORD".
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the

1 Basic Operations
order of the table below.
Item Remarks
ID Code Measured value ID code [ ] (space)
Product No. Product No.
Measured Value Output
Serial number for recording measurement data
No.
Date and Time Measurement date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

2 Advanced Operations
Normal: Space
MDNG: 0
EXNG: 1
RJ check error (RJNG): 2
Option Code *Only when RJ check option is used and the "Meas. Out Contents"
parameter is set to "Details”.
When evaluations are entered simultaneously, option code is output in
the following order of priority.

3 Installation and Connection


MDNG > EXNG > RJNG
Weight value rank
Value RJ 3 levels EEC
0 D-Prod. D-Prod.
1 -NG
2 OK Zone B ← PASS
3 Zone C ← PASS
4 Zone D ← PASS
5 Zone E ← PASS 4 Maintenance
6 Zone A ← -NG
Rank Code
7 Zone B ← -NG
8 Zone C ← -NG
9 Zone D ← +NG
A Zone E ← +NG
B
C
D
5 Appendix

E +NG
F +OVERFLOW +OVERFLOW

109
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Remarks
Weight value
Measured Value
*Space code is output for D-Prod., +OVERFLOW.
Detection sensitivity/evaluation limit factor
1 Basic Operations

Metal Eval. Level 1


*For checkweighers with a metal detector only
Detection sensitivity/evaluation limit factor
Metal Eval. Level 2
*For checkweighers with a metal detector only
Metal Eval. Level 3
Detection sensitivity/evaluation limit factor
Metal Eval. Level 4
RJ check result
*Only when the RJ check option is used
2 Advanced Operations

If the result is 2, 3, or 4, option code is set to 2 of RJ check error


(RJNG). If the result is 4, rank code is output as 0.
If it is 4, it is not included in statistics because the product is not
evaluated. Be careful because the counts of checkweigher statistics
and measured value output result may become different.
Upper: RJ check PASS side detection
Value
Lower: RJ check NG side detection
Product was rejected correctly at NG evaluation.
3 Installation and Connection

(Not passing PASS side photocell)


0
Product was passed correctly at OK evaluation.
(Not passing NG side photocell)
Product was passed correctly at OK evaluation.
(Passing PASS side photocell)
1
RJ Check Result Product was rejected correctly at NG evaluation.
(Passing NG side photocell)
Product was not passed at OK evaluation.
(Not passing PASS side photocell)
2
Product was rejected at OK evaluation.
4 Maintenance

(Passing NG side photocell)


Product was passed at NG evaluation.
(Passing PASS side photocell)
3
Product was passed at NG evaluation.
(Not passing NG side photocell)
Product was passed at no evaluation.
(Passing PASS side photocell)
4
Product was rejected at no evaluation.
5 Appendix

(Passing NG side photocell)


RJ check was interrupted after measurement
5
completion.

110
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Remarks
Zeroset state at weighing
Zeroset* No zeroset: 0
Zeroset: 1

1 Basic Operations
Zero value at weighing
Zero AD Value*
0 to 65535
Product Length* Product length measured at photocell for weighing. Unit is mm.
Product Interval* Interval from product fed previously. Unit is ms.
Time from the start of blocking the photocell for weighing by product to
Product Movement
the start of blocking RJ photocell. Unit is ms.
Time*
* Only when the RJ check option is used

2 Advanced Operations
Product Blocking Time Time in which product blocked RJ photocell. Unit is ms.
(rejector) * * Only when the RJ check option is used
* Parameters from "Zeroset" to "Product Blocking Time (rejector)" are recorded when "Meas. Out
Contents" parameter is "Details”.

An image of measured value data recorded to USB memory is shown below.


Opened in Notepad

3 Installation and Connection


Opened in Microsoft Excel
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

If Microsoft Excel is installed, double-click the file to open Excel and load the CSV file.

111
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving batch statistics data
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets Batch output cycle (MAX 4 digits: 0 to 9999).
1 Basic Operations

USB Memory Batch 0 This specifies the cycle for outputting batch data to a
Output Cycle (0 to 9999) USB memory stick. Input 0 to disable batch recording
and only record the total statistics.

(1) Folder and file names


Batch statistics are saved as "SBTS_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under the
folder "STATS”.
2 Advanced Operations

(2) Record format


Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
ID Code Batch statistics data ID code [B]
Product No. Product No.
3 Installation and Connection

Batch Sta. Out No. Number of times batch statistics are output
Compilation Start Batch statistics start date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Compilation End Batch statistics end date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Statistics Method 0: All products statistics 1: PASS statistics
Product Name Product name
Lot No. Lot No.
Batch Count Batch count
-NG Zone A count -NG count Zone A count
PASS Zone B count PASS count Zone B count
Zone C count Zone C count
4 Maintenance

Zone D count Zone D count


+NG Zone E count +NG count Zone E count
MDNG Metal NG count
EXNG External input NG count
D-Prod. Double product count
Not Statistics Target Not statistics target count
Sample count of statistics target
Sample Count
(except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics Target)
Total weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics
Total Weight
Target)
5 Appendix

Mean value (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics


Mean Value
Target)

112
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
Standard deviation (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Standard Deviation
Statistics Target)

1 Basic Operations
Maximum weight (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Maximum Weight
Statistics Target)
Minimum weight (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Minimum Weight
Statistics Target)
RANGE Maximum Weight - Minimum Weight
Reference Value Reference setting value
TU2 TU2 Limit setting value
Lower Lower limit
TU1 TU1 Limit setting value
Limit setting value

2 Advanced Operations
Upper Upper limit
TO1 TO1 Limit setting value
Limit setting value
TO2 TO2 Limit setting value
Zone B PASS In Zone B, count rejected as PASS because
count within permissible range
Percentage of Zone B PASS count in PASS
Zone B TU1%
count
Zone C PASS In Zone C, count rejected as PASS because
count less than mean value

3 Installation and Connection


Percentage of Zone C PASS count in PASS
Zone C TO1%
count

■ Saving operation check data


Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets ON/OFF of the function to automatically save
operation check result at the end of an operation
Store at Operation check.
No/Yes
Check End
Ope.Check …(Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ
Confirmation)
To specify whether to save Statistical data
4 Maintenance

Save stats data at automatically to USB memory at the end of the


No/Yes
the production end production while the Smart Guide function is being
used.

(1) Folder and file names


History data is saved with the following file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "HIST”.
Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation): HOPCHK_ΔΔ.csv
Operation Check History (Accuracy Check): HACCHK_ΔΔ.csv
5 Appendix

113
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
(2) Record format
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
1 Basic Operations

■ Accuracy Check

Item Description
ID Code History type "4"
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No. Product No.
Product Name Product name
2 Advanced Operations

History Output No. History serial number


Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Mode Equipment mode when the event occurred
Event Event occurred
Result Accuracy check result
User Access level at check
PASS Weight PASS product weight
3 Installation and Connection

Permissible
Permissible accuracy
Accuracy
Measurement
Accuracy of the results measured by accuracy check
Accuracy
Count Measurement count
X-bar Mean value
S Standard deviation
R RANGE
Max Maximum value
Min Minimum value
4 Maintenance

Output by repeating the number of times


Weight Value N Weight value
specified for checking (N)
5 Appendix

114
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Eva/RJ Check

Item Description
ID Code History type "4"

1 Basic Operations
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No. Product No.
Product Name Product name
History No. History serial number
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Event Event occurred
Result Result

2 Advanced Operations
User Access level
Reference Value Reference value
Upper Limit Upper limit
Lower Limit Lower limit
Test Piece Size (Fe) Set value
Test Piece Size (SUS) Set value
Metal Eval. Level 1 Set value

3 Installation and Connection


Metal Eval. Level 2 Set value
Metal Eval. Level 3 Set value
Metal Eval. Level 4 Set value
Criteria N Criteria
Evaluation N Evaluation result
Weight Value N Weight value
For checkweighers with
Fe/SUS N
a metal detector only
Evaluation value 1
Evaluation value 1 N
4 Maintenance
Output by repeating the number
Evaluation value 2 of times specified for checking
Evaluation value 2 N
(N)

Evaluation value 3
Evaluation value 3 N

Evaluation value 4
Evaluation value 4 N

Rejection N Rejection
Result N Pass/NG of check result
5 Appendix

115
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving total statistics data
Select "Menu"  "USB memory/printer" 
"Save to USB memory”, select the target
item to save from the list in the left part of the
1 Basic Operations

screen, and press [Save]. The following


screen is for saving "Product statistics”.
To save all registered product data, check
"Save all product data" before saving.
Save data for one product

(1) Folder and file names


2 Advanced Operations

Total statistics data is saved as "STTS_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under the
folder "STATS”.

(2) Record format


Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
3 Installation and Connection

ID Code Total statistics data ID code [C]


Product No. Product No.
Total Statistics Output No. Number of times total statistics are output
Compilation Start Total statistics start date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Compilation End Total statistics end date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Statistics Method 0: All products statistics 1: PASS statistics
Product Name Product name
Lot No. Lot No.
Batch Count Batch count
-NG Zone A count -NG count Zone A count
4 Maintenance

PASS Zone B count PASS count Zone B count


Zone C count Zone C count
Zone D count Zone D count
+NG Zone E count +NG count Zone E count
MDNG Metal NG count
EXNG External input NG count
Double Product Double product count
Not Statistics Target Not Statistics Target count
Sample count of statistics target
Sample Count
(except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics Target)
5 Appendix

Total weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics


Total Weight
Target)

116
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
Mean value (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics
Mean Value
Target)

1 Basic Operations
Standard deviation (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Standard Deviation
Statistics Target)
Maximum weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Maximum Weight
Statistics Target)*
Minimum weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Minimum Weight
Statistics Target)*
RANGE Maximum Weight - Minimum Weight*
Reference Value Reference setting value
TU2 TU2 Limit setting value

2 Advanced Operations
Lower limit
Lower Limit TU1 TU1 Limit setting value
setting value
Upper limit
Upper Limit TO1 TO1 Limit setting value
setting value
TO2 TO2 Limit setting value
Zone B PASS In Zone B, count rejected as PASS because
count within permissible range
Percentage of Zone B PASS count in PASS
Zone B TU1%
count

3 Installation and Connection


Zone C PASS In Zone C, count rejected as PASS because
count less than mean value
Percentage of Zone C PASS count in PASS
Zone C TO1%
count
* If Batch Data is specified for Statistics Print Select, Max D., Min D. and Range Mean
are recorded. Max D. and Min D. indicate the maximum and minimum values of the
standard deviation per batch. Range Mean indicates the mean value of the range per
batch. Note that the names of the items in the CSV file will be Max, Min, and RANGE
regardless of the setting of Statistics Print Select.
* Output all product data during suspension. You cannot output the data during
operation.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

117
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving parameter data
Similarly, select [Parameter] and press
[Save].
1 Basic Operations

(1) Folder and file names


Parameter data is saved with the following
file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number)
under the folder "PARAM”.
PCOM_ΔΔ.csv: common parameter
PP_ΔΔ.csv: Product Parameter
2 Advanced Operations

(2) Record format


Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
Item Description
ID Code Parameter type “P”
System parameter
Parameter Type
Product parameter
Product No. 001 to 200 / -
3 Installation and Connection

Product Name Product name


Parameter Out No. Serial number of output parameter
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Channel Output when parameter has a channel
Name Parameter name
Setting Value Parameter value
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

118
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving history data
Similarly, select [History] and press [Save].

Type: Operation History / Parameter

1 Basic Operations
History / NG History/ Alarm
History / Operation Check
History
Target: Output all product data
 All products
Output data for one product
 Only selected products

2 Advanced Operations
Out. range: All data
 All data recorded in history
Past 24 hours
 Data recorded in the past 24 hours

(1) Folder and file names


History data is saved with the following file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "HIST”.

3 Installation and Connection


Operation History: HACT_ΔΔ.csv
Parameter History: HPRM_ΔΔ.csv
NG History: HNG_ΔΔ.csv
Alarm History: HALM_ΔΔ.csv
Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation): HOPCHK_ΔΔ.csv
Operation Check History (Accuracy Check): HACCHK_ΔΔ.csv

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

119
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
(2) Record format
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
1 Basic Operations

Operation History, Parameter History, NG History and Alarm History

Item Description
ID Code History type "4"
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No.
Product No.
("-" is the output if product does not exist)
2 Advanced Operations

Product Name Product name


History No. History serial number
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Mode Equipment mode when the event occurred
Event Event occurred
Description Description
For the formats of Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation and Accuracy Check, refer to
the following;
3 Installation and Connection

 P. 113 Saving operation check data

■ Saving USB information


(1) Displaying USB memory information
Total Space Displays total space of USB
memory.
Used Space Displays used space of USB
memory.
Free Space Displays free space of USB
memory.
4 Maintenance

When no USB memory is inserted, "- - - " is displayed.

(2) Format
USB memory can be formatted by pressing the [Format] button.
When data cannot be recorded to the USB memory, format the USB memory. USB
memory can be formatted on the checkweigher or on a PC.
5 Appendix

Once USB memory is formatted, all data is erased. Erased data cannot be recovered.

120
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Reference: Formatting USB memory on a PC

1 Open [My Computer].

1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
2 Right-click the USB memory drive, and select [Format].

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

121
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
3 Make sure that the file system is "FAT”, and press [Start].
1 Basic Operations

Make sure that the


file system is “FAT.”
2 Advanced Operations

Make sure to format the USB memory as a "FAT" file system. USB memory formatted with a file
system other than "FAT" does not operate on this unit. Leave Volume Label blank. If Volume
Label is used, it may not operate.

4 When the completion message is displayed, formatting is complete.


3 Installation and Connection

■ Saving support data


Save data to support recovery in case of
equipment failure.
When asked by an Anritsu SE, save data in
this screen and provide the data.
 P. 311 Outputting support data
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

122
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Setting External I/O Signals
This section describes input and output signals for external control.
To adjust I/O timing, refer to "Adjusting I/O Timing”.

1 Basic Operations
 P. 149 Adjusting I/O Timing

This checkweigher has two contact input/outputs as standard. When an optional


KCU2504A is added, 8 more points can be added. For an overview of I/O settings, refer to
the table below.
Destination I/O Input Setting I/O Output Setting
IN1 OUT1
Standard I/O

2 Advanced Operations
IN2 OUT2
OUTA1, OUTA2, OUTA3,
KCU2504A INA1, INA2, INA3, INA4,
OUTA4, OUTA5, OUTA6,
Expansion I/O (optional) INA5, INA6, INA7, INA8
OUTA7, OUTA8
OUTB1, OUTB2, OUTB3,
For Anritsu Expansion INB1, INB2, INB3, INB4,
OUTB4, OUTB5, OUTB6,
(optional) INB5, INB6, INB7, INB8
OUTB7, OUTB8
Signal tower and buzzer
― OUTP1, OUTP2, OUTP3
(both optional)

3 Installation and Connection


1 In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and Setting"  "Unit/connected device set.” 
"Gen. I/O connection”.

4 Maintenance

Performing I/O input settings

2 Perform settings and enter values for the items displayed.


5 Appendix

Input setting for IN1 When "Type" of IN1 is pressed

123
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Select the target destination and press [Input]. The input screen is displayed. For
descriptions of the items, refer to the table below.

Types of input signals


1 Basic Operations

Type Explanation
- No signal input
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
Mot. ON/OFF This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot. ON/OFF
(Momentary)
(Alternate)” or “Mot. ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
2 Advanced Operations

If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot. ON/OFF This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot. ON (Pulse
(Alternate)
input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
Run input. The Checkweigher runs while this input is ON.
3 Installation and Connection

However, the Mot. OFF (Par. Priority)input has priority over this input
and this input cannot stop the Checkweigher. Use the Mot. OFF(Par.
Mot. ON (Pulse input) Priority) input to stop the Checkweigher. The signal ON time must be
at least 100 ms.
In addition, the "Mot. OFF(Par. Priority)" input has priority over this
input.
Mot. OFF The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON. The
(Par. Priority) conveyor motor cannot be set to ON while this signal is ON.
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG direction irrespective of
weight rank. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
External NG input weight NG. For bulk-type products, use EXNG (Continuous +
(Synchronous) Synchronous).
 P. 395 T iming chart
4 Maintenance

Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG direction irrespective of


weight rank. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG direction while
External NG input this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
(Continuous + Synchronous) during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
after the rejector gate operation. For box-type products, use EXNG
(Synchronous).
External zero setting Input for performing external zero setting
Error reset Input for releasing errors and alarms
Stop dividing input (OK1)
Stop dividing input (OK2) Inputs for stopping ranking when using optional PASS Product
5 Appendix

Stop dividing input (OK3) Division function. Ranking is not performed while this input is ON.
Stop dividing input (OK4)

124
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Type Explanation
Input signal for rejecting Pass products in EXNG direction. Rejection
of NG products is unaffected by whether this signal is ON or OFF and
External NG input for pass
NG products are rejected in the specified NG rank direction. (The
product (Synchronous)
priority rank of the external signal by this input is lower than the weight

1 Basic Operations
evaluation NG.)
Clear Statistics Clears the statistics data.
Clears stored tare value when using optional Net Weight Calculation
Clear stored tare value
function.
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG2 direction irrespective
of weight rank. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
weight NG.
External NG input 2
(Synchronous)

P. 395 T iming chart
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.

2 Advanced Operations
EXNG2 is normally higher priority evaluation than EXNG. For
bulk-type products, use EXNG2 (Continuous + Synchronous).
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG2 direction irrespective
of the weight rank. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG2 direction
while this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
External NG input 2 during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
(Continuous + Synchronous) after the rejector gate operation.
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.
EXNG2 normally has a higher priority evaluation than EXNG. For
box-type products, use EXNG2 (Synchronous).
Input for detecting full rejected-products box.

3 Installation and Connection


When this input is continuously ON for more than 5 seconds, the
Indicator displays the “A070 Box Full” alarm to turn the Full detection
output to ON and full counting starts.
When the count reaches the set full count (except 0 and 9999), the
Checkweigher conveyors are forcibly stopped.
Detection full When the full count is set to 0, the Checkweigher displays an alarm
and stops the conveyors. When the full count is set to 9999, the
Checkweigher does not stop the conveyors.
The alarm will be deactivated automatically after this input changes
from ON to OFF, and the full detection output goes OFF and the count
will be re-set to 0.
This input can be used along with the optional rejection confirmation
function.
4 Maintenance

Switches target head number to next head when using optional Head
Head Change
Statistics function for Automatic Combination Weigher.
Resets target head number to first one when using optional Head
Head Select
Statistics function for Automatic Combination Weigher.
Auto Zeroset OFF Automatic zero adjustment is disabled while this input signal is active.
Clears statistics data, count of “Counter preset”, and Tare memory
All Clear
count data (when using optional net weight calculation function).
This switches the Checkweigher to the Conveyor mode while this
Forced motor ON input signal is ON even if the Checkweigher is in normal operation.
(Alternate switch) However, when a conveyor error is generated, the Checkweigher
cannot run (in the Conveyor mode) even if this input goes ON.
5 Appendix

125
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Type Explanation
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
1 Basic Operations

Mot. ON/OFF2 This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot. ON/OFF
(Momentary)
(Alternate)” or “Mot. ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot. ON/OFF2 This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot. ON (Pulse
(Alternate)
input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
2 Advanced Operations

Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON without
releasing error output.
Mot. ON disabled
Use the “Mot. OFF(Par. Priority)” input for releasing error output with
the conveyor-motor stop at the same time.
While the conveyor speed setting is “2 Speed”, the conveyor speed
Conveyor 2 Speed
decreases if this input signal is active and increases if it is inactive.
This is a conveyor error input signal available only for the
Carrying Unit Error Checkweighers for aerosol cans (which have a model name starting
3 Installation and Connection

with KW9627). Error 161 occurs if this signal becomes active.


NGBOX RJ1 These input signals are used to indicate the open states of the
NGBOX RJ2 corresponding NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional).
If one of these signals becomes active, the corresponding NGBox is
NGBOX RJ4 regarded to be open. If the NGBox open state continues for 5 seconds
NGBOX RJ5 or more, alarm A072 occurs.
Input for monitoring the air pressure. Error 061 “Air pressure error” is
Air Pressure Detection
output if this signal is enabled (ON).
The number of counted items is cleared to 0 when counter preset is
Preset count clear
used.
Setting this input to ON starts the Start Eval./RJ Check confirmation.
Start Eval./RJ Check
This signal cannot be used with Smart Guide.
4 Maintenance

OptionInput1
OptionInput2
Settings for options
OptionInput3
OptionInput4
5 Appendix

126
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Types of output signals

Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
- No signal output

1 Basic Operations
Standard
Motor ON This signal is ON while the Checkweigher conveyor is running.
Pulse
This signal is ON while the Checkweigher is in an abnormal
ABNORMAL
Standard status (EXXX displayed).
Pulse This signal is ON when the Checkweigher is in an abnormal
BUZZER Hold 2 status and when is it stopped by NG products in the NG Stop
mode.
This signal is ON when the following alarm occurrs and product
RJ Alarm
Standard is discharged in alarm direction.
Direction

2 Advanced Operations
Target: A051 to A055, A504
This signal is ON when the operation status is abnormal, or
CONVEYOR Standard when the conveyor is stopped by NG evaluation or when an
STOP Pulse Auto-zeroset alarm (A011) is generated. It is used for stopping
an upstream conveyor.
This signal is ON when the Checkweigher is able to perform
weight measurement.
This signal is OFF when the Checkweigher is stopping,
Measurable Standard
performing fine adjustment, adjusting timing, performing
Operation check, performing Auto setting, generating error,
NG Stop,and Conveyor mode.

3 Installation and Connection


-NG
OK
+NG
Eval output

Pulse These signals go ON at each respective evaluation.


MDNG
Hold 1 * When the evaluation output is MDNG or external NG or
External RJ Sync external NG2, both of the NG and weight evaluation signals
NG Hold 2 (–NG, OK or +NG) go ON at the same time.
External
NG 2
D-Prod.
This signal is the evaluation output strobe signal and goes ON
Timing Pulse
10 - 20 ms after the evaluation output. 4 Maintenance
Standard
This signal goes on when the ±NG ratio exceeds the set value
NG rate alarm Pulse
(NG RATE). Press the [Stop] button to release the alarm.
Hold 2
+Mean value These outputs are for the Reference value tracking, EEC, and
alarm Pulse Mean value alarm options. If “Standard” is selected, the output is
-Mean value Hold 1 held until next batch end. (Refer to the specifications and
alarm Reject sync instruction manual for each option.)
Hold 2 This signal goes ON when a NG (-NG, +NG, MDNG, EXNG and
NG output
Dbl. Prod.) evaluation occurs.
Rejection Standard
This signal goes ON when a rejector error occurs when the
confirmation Pulse
optional rejector confirmation function is installed.
5 Appendix

error output Hold 2


This goes ON when the printer out-of-paper alarm occurs. It
No paper alarm Standard
goes OFF when the alarm is released.

127
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
When “2 Speed” (option) is set, this output is ON when the
speed setting of current product No. is LOW and goes OFF
Conveyor 2 when it is HIGH.
1 Basic Operations

Standard
Speed When the conveyor is set to OFF, this output goes OFF.
However, when the conveyor speed setting is changed from
HIGH to LOW, this output goes ON.
This goes ON when the product count set at the “Preset Pattern”
reaches the counter preset. This signal is used for downstream
Pulse dividing equipment and rejection box switching equipment.
Counter preset
Hold 2
Clear the preset count, clear all, change the product switch or
turn off the power switch to clear the preset counter.
Pulse This signal is output when the weighed product is evaluated as –
Hold 1 NG or +NG. It is not output when the products is evaluated as
NG Output
2 Advanced Operations

Reject sync MDNG, external NG, external NG2, Double product alarm or
Hold 2 Product Length Exceeded alarm.
This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5
Detection full Standard
seconds. It goes OFF when the Full detection input is OFF.
Pulse
This signal is output when weighed products are evaluated as
Ultra-under Hold 1
lighter than the Ultra Under Limit. It is not output when the Ultra
output Reject sync
Under Limit is not set.
Hold 2
This signal is output when the weighed products are evaluated
Pulse as PASS.
Hold 1
OK Output
3 Installation and Connection

Reject sync * It is not output at MDNG, external NG, external NG2 , Double
Hold 2 product alarm or Product Length Exceeded alarm, even when
the weighed products are evaluated as PASS.
Monitoring
This checks the controller CPU at starting and outputs a 500-ms
output for CPU Standard
pulse when operation is normal.
operation

Conveyor error Standard


Pulse This goes ON when a conveyor error is generated.
output Hold 2

This is enabled when the EEC function (option) is used and the
Standard "EEC (Prod.)” at the “Product Parameter Setting” is set to “Yes”.
Pulse * This is disabled when the “EEC Function (Average)” at the
4 Maintenance

Reference value
Hold 1 "Product Parameter Setting" is set to “Yes”).
alarm
Reject sync It does not depend on the batch number and outputs when the
Hold 2 mean value is below the reference value. The mean value is
calculated only using PASS product data.
Serial Output signal for optional KW255A and KW2504A/B.
Communication Standard This alarm is output when an error occurs at serial
Alarm communications.
USB Memory
Standard This alarm is output when an USB-related error occurs.
Related Alarm
This is a weigh-cell-ready output signal available only for the
Checkweighers for aerosol cans (which have a model name
READY Standard
5 Appendix

starting with KW9627). This signal does not become active if it is


selected for a Checkweigher other than those for aerosol cans.

128
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
NGBOX OPEN
Standard
RJ1 These output signals are used to enable the corresponding
NGBOX OPEN NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional) to open.

1 Basic Operations
Standard
RJ2 These signals become active if the NGBoxes are unlocked,
NGBOX OPEN enabling the NGBoxes to open.
Standard
RJ4 These signals do not become active if they are selected while no
NGBOX OPEN NGBox with an electronic lock is connected.
Standard
RJ5
This signal goes ON when the metal detector is operating in the
conveyor mode, such as in the cases below. This signal is
available for checkweighers that have a metal detector.
MD conveyor The product parameter “MD Conveyor mode” is set to “Yes”.
Standard
mode output

2 Advanced Operations
The metal detector is operating in the forced conveyor mode.
The Forces motor ON signal (Forced Motor ON) is input for the
external control input.
Output OUT1 by reset pulse when the safety relay unit is
mounted
Safety relay Type Pulse
Pulse
reset
Logic Not Reverse
Latency 300 ms
Checking This outputs signal while the Checkweigher conveyor is running
Standard
operation when using Eval/RJ Check, Accuracy Check and Check Mode.

3 Installation and Connection


Standard This outputs signal when the product blocks the photocell during
Detect product
Pulse running or stopping.
Standard When running conveyor back and forth for auto-set, this outputs
CW/CCW motor
Pulse OFF on normal rotation. Outputs ON on reverse rotation.
OptionOutput1
OptionOutput2
― Settings for options
OptionOutput3
OptionOutput4
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

129
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Logic, Type, Delay Time, and Hold Time settings

Setting
No. Name Description
(Default: )
1 Basic Operations

Output signal logic can be set as follows:


Not Reverse
1 Logic Not Reverse Signal not reversed
Reverse
Reverse Signal reversed
This screen sets the output type.
The operation is not assured when selecting a type that is
not shown in the table on the above.
Pulse ON only for set Hold time
Hold1 ON until end of evaluation of next product.
2 Advanced Operations

Pulse ON only during rejector gate operation time


Hold 1 RJ Sync
(T4 interval)
2 Type RJ Sync
ON continuously until one of
Hold 2
[Recover]/[Stop] button pressed, or until ERR
Standard
RES (Error reset) input signal input.
Hold2
“I/O Output signal On” is displayed when the
output signal is ON if the “Hold 2” is set to the
signal.
3 Installation and Connection

Operates as described in table on previous


Standard
page
0 ms
3 Delay time This screen is used to set the Output ON delay time.
(0 to 9999 ms)
0 ms This screen is used to set the signal hold time. It is only
4 HOLD time
(0 to 9999 ms) enabled when “Pulse” is selected as the output type.

For connection terminals, refer to Appendix "External I/O Specifications" and "Timing
Chart”.
 P. 385 External I/O Specifications, P. 395 Timing Chart
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

130
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Usually use “IO input setting”. Use “IO input setting (Details)” when setting the logical
combination of the signal.

IO input setting (Details)

1 Basic Operations
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO input
setting (Details) )

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Input Signal ID No Input Displays the signal name.
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do not

2 Advanced Operations
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 1
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 1
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 1 0 to 9999
selected terminal.

3 Installation and Connection


Delay Time 1 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 1 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do not
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 2
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
4 Maintenance

Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 2
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 2 0 to 9999
selected terminal.
Delay Time 2 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 2 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
5 Appendix

131
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do not
1 Basic Operations

change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 3
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 3
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 3 0 to 9999
2 Advanced Operations

selected terminal.
Delay Time 3 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 3 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
3 Installation and Connection

Destination X-ray inspect. system Sets the connection of input signal.


Weigher
Packager
Labeler
Other inspect. system
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

132
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Usually use IO output setting. Use “IO output setting (Details)” when setting the
combination of the signal.

IO output setting (Details)

1 Basic Operations
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO output
setting (Details) )

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do
not change.
Output Terminal

2 Advanced Operations
0 to 255 OUT1.2 80, 81
No.
OUTA1 to OUTA8 82 to 89
OUTB1 to OUTB8 90 to 97
Output Signal
No Output Displays the signal name.
ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Specifies the format of the signal output from the
Output Type 1 RJ Sync.
output terminal block.

3 Installation and Connection


Hold2
Standard
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the signal output from the
Output Logic 1
Reverse output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Delay Time 1 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 1 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals output
None/And/Or
Connection 1 from the output terminal No. n and [n+1]. 4 Maintenance
Output Signal * Same as Output
* Same as Output Signal ID1
ID2 Signal ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Specifies the format of the signal output from the
Output Type 2 RJ Sync.
output terminal block.
Hold2
Standard
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the signal output from the
Output Logic 2
Reverse output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
5 Appendix

Delay Time 2 0 to 9999


output terminal block.

133
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 2 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
1 Basic Operations

Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals output


None/And/Or
Connection 2 from the output terminal No. n and [n+1].
Output Signal * Same as Output
* Same as Output Signal ID1
ID3 Signal ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Specifies the format of the signal output from the
Output Type 3 RJ Sync.
output terminal block.
Hold2
2 Advanced Operations

Standard
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the signal output from the
Output Logic 3
Reverse output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Delay Time 3 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 3 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals output
None/And/Or
3 Installation and Connection

Connection 3 from the output terminal No. n and [n+1].


Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
Destination X-ray inspect. system Sets the connection of output signal.
Weigher
Packager
Labeler
Other inspect. system
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

134
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Extension I/O connection setting
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → Extension
I/O connection setting)

1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
EXT-I/O (channel A) connection is
detected when the power is turned
Extension I/O Auto Auto
to ON. This parameter is not
(A): Connection No
changed to No when the EXT-I/O

2 Advanced Operations
monitoring Yes
(channel A) is not connected.
Restrains the occurrence of the
No
abnormal IO-NET connection.
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes
abnormal IO-NET connection.
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the

3 Installation and Connection


EXT-I/O (channel B) connection is
detected when the power is turned
Extension I/O Auto Auto
to ON.EXT-I/O This parameter is not
(B): Connection N
changed to No when the EXT-I/O
monitoring Yes
(channel B) is not connected.
Restrains the occurrence of the
No
abnormal IO-NET connection.
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes
abnormal IO-NET connection.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

135
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Set other conveyor
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Conveyor →Set other conveyor)

Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations

(Default: )
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
MOT-CONT connection is detected
when the power is turned to ON.
Auto Auto
MOT-CONT: This parameter is not changed to No
No
connect check when the MOT-CONT is not
Yes
connected.
2 Advanced Operations

Restrains the occurrence of the


No
abnormal IO-NET connection.
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes
abnormal IO-NET connection.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

136
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Serial connection
When inputting and outputting data in connection with external devices such as code
reader, specify the settings by referring to the table below.

1 Basic Operations
Serial1 Setting
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial1
Setting)

* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial1:Connection setting.


*1 Setting for Anritsu optional equipment. Not use for other equipment.
*2 Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).

2 Advanced Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial1 I/O.
Does not connect to the external
No No
device.
Yes
Serial1:Connection Yes Connects to the external device.
Labeler
Code Reader Labeler Connects to the Label printer.

3 Installation and Connection


Code Makes a connection with a code
Reader reader (optional).
Serial1:Transfer 1200, 2400,
Selects the transfer speed of Serial1 I/O.
Speed 4800, 9600 bps
No
Serial1:Parity EVEN Selects the parity of Serial1 I/O.
ODD
1
Serial1:Stop Bit Selects the start/stop bit of Serial1 I/O.
2
No
Serial1:flow control Sets the flow control method of serial communication.
RTS
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

137
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial input/output type.
No Outputs no data.
1 Basic Operations

Serial1:Output 1
Outputs measured value for each
Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end
Mean Value
of a batch.
No
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end
Serial1:Output 2 Stat. Value
Mean Value of a batch.
Stat. Value Meas. Outputs data with product number
2 Advanced Operations

Meas. Output Output added for each weighing.


Meas V. Plus Meas V. Outputs detailed measured value for
History
Plus each weighing.
Stat. V. 2
Meas. Output2 History Not available
Meas V. Plus2 Outputs batch statistics data 2 at the
Stat. V. 2
end of a batch.
Serial1:Output 3 Meas. Outputs data with product number
Output2 added for each weighing.*2
3 Installation and Connection

Outputs detailed measured value for


Meas V. each weighing. This setting is
Plus2 available for Checkweigher with M6-h
series metal detector.*2
Selects the serial output data format and number of
digits.
ASCII Outputs 4-digit ASCII code with
ASCII deviation deviation deviation value.
Serial1:Data ASCII absolute ASCII Outputs 6-digit ASCII code with
Format CW deviation*1 absolute absolute value.
CW absolute*1
4 Maintenance

CW Outputs in CW format with deviation


deviation*1 value.
CW Outputs in CW format with absolute
absolute*1 value.
Selects the serial input/output data length of measured
value output.
Var. Text format of the measured value output is
Serial1:Meas. Var. Length
Length adjusted according to the mass value.
Output Fixed Length
The mass value is specified as 8-digit fixed
Fixed
length. (G is included and blank parts are
5 Appendix

Length
specified as space)

138
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 1 I/O.

1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.

Yes Outputs measured values.


No
Yes Outputs measured values with product
Serial1:Out when Expansion
Expansion number added.*2
ope check
Expansion 2 The measurement value is output during
an operation check together with
Expansion product No., product effect value and

2 Advanced Operations
2 phase value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector.*2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial I/O or
not by operating Indicator.
No
Serial1:Total Stats
Stat. Value No Not output.
Out
Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs in statistics value format.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs in statistics value 2 format.

3 Installation and Connection


Selects statistics data output format when sending
Serial1: Stats Stat. Value statistics read command in serial I/O.
Read Cont Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs in statistics value format.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs in statistics value 2 format.
Selects the type of product number link in serial 1 I/O.
Set this to No.
No
Serial1:Prod No. No Does not output data.
Yes
Link
Expansion Yes Outputs data.

Expansion Outputs data.*2 4 Maintenance


Selects whether to output them to the serial I/O when
an error or alarm occurs.
Serial1:Err. Alarm No
Does not output errors and alarms to the
Output Yes No
serial1 I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial1 I/O.
Selects whether to output equipment state change to
Serial1:State Chg. No the serial1 I/O.
Output Yes No Does not output state change to the serial1 I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial1 I/O.
5 Appendix

139
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Leave it as Old (Default setting).
Serial1:Comm. Old
Old KD80XX series
1 Basic Operations

message New
New KD81XX, KD82XX series
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product
barcode by the barcode reader.
The item code cannot be read by the barcode
No
Serial1:Item code No reader. Enter the item code using the touch
Yes
panel.
The item code can be read by the barcode
Yes
2 Advanced Operations

reader.
Serial1:Item code 2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
(start digit) (1 to 20) barcode.
Specifies the number of digits of the item code in the
Serial1:Item code 6 product barcode.
(digit count) (0 to 20) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
digits are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode
of the user by the barcode reader.
3 Installation and Connection

The user code cannot be read by the barcode


No
Serial1:User code No reader. Enter the user code using the touch
Yes
panel.
The user code can be read by the barcode
Yes
reader.
Serial1:User code 1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode
(start digit) (1 to 10) of the user.
Specifies the number of digits of the user code in the
Serial1:User code 0 barcode of the user.
(digit count) (0 to 10) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
4 Maintenance

digits are regarded as the user code.


5 Appendix

140
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Serial2(A) settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial2(A)
settings)

1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial2(A):Connection setting.
*1 Setting for Anritsu optional equipment. Not use for other equipment.
*2 Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).

Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial2(A) I/O.
No Does not connect to the external device.

2 Advanced Operations
Connects to the external device (other
No
Yes than Anritsu Product, Labeler or Code
Yes
Serial2(A): Reader).
Anritsu Product
Connection Anritsu
Labeler Connects to the Anritsu device.
Code Reader Product
Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Code Makes a connection with a code reader
Reader (optional).

3 Installation and Connection


Serial2(A): RS232C
Sets the transmission standard (transfer method).
transfer method Current loop
Serial2(A): 1200, 2400,
Selects the transfer speed of Serial2(A) I/O.
Transfer Speed 4800, 9600 bps
No
Serial2(A):
EVEN Selects the parity of Serial2(A) I/O.
Parity
ODD
Serial2(A):Stop 1
Selects the start/stop bit of Serial2(A) I/O.
Bit * Read only
Serial2(A):flow No Sets the flow control method of serial2(A)
4 Maintenance
control RTS communication.
5 Appendix

141
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial 2(A) input/output type.
No Output no data.
1 Basic Operations

Outputs measured value for each


Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end of
Mean Value
No a batch.
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end
Stat. Value
Mean Value of a batch.
Serial2(A): Stat. Value Outputs data with product number
Output Meas. Output Meas. Output
2 Advanced Operations

added for each weighing.


Meas. Output2
Meas. Outputs data with product number
Meas V. Plus
Output2 added for each weighing.*2
Meas V. Plus2
Outputs the detailed measured values
Meas V. Plus
for each weighing.*2
Outputs the detailed measured values
Meas V. for each weighing. This is available only
Plus2 in the checkweigher equipped with the
M6-h series metal detector.*2
3 Installation and Connection

Selects the serial A input/output data format and number


of digits.
ASCII Outputs 4-digit ASCII code with
ASCII deviation deviation deviation value.
Serial2(A):Data ASCII absolute ASCII Outputs 6-digit ASCII code with
Format CW deviation*1 absolute absolute value.
CW absolute*1 CW Outputs in CW format with deviation
deviation*1 value.
CW Outputs in CW format with absolute
absolute*1 value.
4 Maintenance

Selects the serial input/output A data length of measured


value output.
Text format of the measured value
Serial2(A): Var. Length Var. Length output is adjusted according to the
Meas. Output Fixed Length mass value.
The mass value is specified as 8-digit
Fixed Length fixed length. (G is included and blank
parts are specified as space)
5 Appendix

142
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 2(A) I/O.

1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.

Yes Outputs measured values.


No
Serial2(A):Out Outputs measured values with product
Yes Expansion
when ope number added.*2
Expansion
check The measurement value is output
Expansion 2
during an operation check together with
product No., product effect value and
Expansion 2

2 Advanced Operations
phase value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector.*2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial A I/O or
Serial2(A):Total No not by operating Indicator.
Stats Out Yes No Not output.
Yes Outputs in statistics value format.
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 2(A) I/O.

3 Installation and Connection


No No Does not output measured values.
Serial2(A):Prod
Yes
No. link Yes Outputs measured values.
Expansion
Outputs measured values with product
Expansion
number added.*2
Selects whether to output them to the serial2(A) I/O when
an error or alarm occurs.
Serial2(A):Err. No
Does not output errors and alarms to the
Alarm Output Yes No
serial2(A) I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial2(A) I/O.
4 Maintenance

Selects whether to output equipment state change to the


serial2(A) I/O.
Serial2(A):State No
Does not output state change to the serial2(A)
Chg. Output Yes No
I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial2(A) I/O.
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product
barcode by the barcode reader.
Serial2(A):Item No
The item code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
reader. Enter the user code using the touch panel.
5 Appendix

Yes The item code can be read by the barcode reader.

143
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial2(A):Item
2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
code (start
1 Basic Operations

(1 to18) barcode.
digit)
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial2(A):Item
6 product barcode.
code (digit
(0 to 18) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
Serial2(A):User No
The user code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
2 Advanced Operations

reader. Enter the user code using the touch panel.


Yes The user code can be read by the barcode reader.
Serial2(A):User
1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode of
code (start
(1 to 10) the user.
digit)
Specifies the number of digits of the user code in the
Serial2(A):User
barcode of the user.
code (digit 0 (0 to 10)
If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the user code.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

144
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Serial3(B) settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial3(B)
settings)

1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial3(B):Connection setting.
*1 Setting for Anritsu optional equipment. Not use for other equipment.
*2 Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).

Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial3(B) I/O.
Does not connect to the external

2 Advanced Operations
No
device.
No Connects to the external device (other
Yes
Serial3(B): Yes than Anritsu Product, Labeler or Code
Anritsu Product
Connection Reader).
Labeler
Code Reader Anritsu Product Connects to the Anritsu device.
Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Makes a connection with a code
Code Reader
reader (optional).

3 Installation and Connection


Serial3(B): RS232C
Sets the transmission standard (transfer method).
transfer method Current loop
Serial3(B): 1200, 2400,
Selects the transfer speed of Serial3(B) I/O.
Transfer Speed 4800, 9600 bps
No
Serial3(B):
EVEN Selects the parity of Serial3(B) I/O.
Parity
ODD
Serial3(B):Stop 1
Selects the start/stop bit of Serial3(B) I/O.
Bit * Read only
Serial3(B):flow No Sets the flow control method of Serial3(B)
4 Maintenance
control RTS communication.
5 Appendix

145
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial 3(B) input/output type.
No Outputs no data.
1 Basic Operations

Outputs measured value for each


Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end of
Mean Value
No a batch.
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end
Stat. Value
Mean Value of a batch.
Serial3(B): Stat. Value Outputs data with product number
Output Meas. Output Meas. Output
2 Advanced Operations

added for each weighing.


Meas. Output2
Meas. Outputs data with product number
Meas V. Plus
Output2 added for each weighing.*2
Meas V. Plus2
Outputs the detailed measured values
Meas V. Plus
for each weighing.*2
Outputs the detailed measured values
Meas V. for each weighing. This is available only
Plus2 in the checkweigher equipped with the
M6-h series metal detector.*2
3 Installation and Connection

Selects the serial B input/output data format and number


of digits.
ASCII Outputs 4-digit ASCII code with
ASCII deviation deviation deviation value.
Serial3(B):Data ASCII absolute ASCII Outputs 6-digit ASCII code with absolute
Format CW deviation*1 absolute value.
CW absolute*1 CW Outputs in CW format with deviation
deviation*1 value.
CW Outputs in CW format with absolute
absolute*1 value.
4 Maintenance

Selects the serial input/output B data length of measured


value output.
Text format of the measured value output
Serial3(B): Var. Length Var. Length
is adjusted according to the mass value.
Meas. Output Fixed Length
The mass value is specified as 8-digit
Fixed
fixed length. (G is included and blank
Length
parts are specified as space)
5 Appendix

146
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 3(B) I/O.

1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.

Yes Outputs measured values.


No
Serial3(B): Out Outputs measured values with product
Yes Expansion
when ope number added.*2
Expansion
check The measurement value is output during
Expansion 2
an operation check together with product
No., product effect value and phase
Expansion 2

2 Advanced Operations
value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector.*2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial B I/O or
Serial3(B):Total No not by operating Indicator.
Stats Out Yes No Not output.
Yes Outputs in statistics value format.
Selects the type of product number link in serial 3(B) I/O.
Set this to No.

3 Installation and Connection


No
Serial3(B):Prod No Does not output data.
Yes
No. link
Expansion Yes Outputs data.

Expansion Outputs data.*2


Selects whether to output them to the serial3(B) I/O when
an error or alarm occurs.
Serial3(B):Err. No
Does not output errors and alarms to the
Alarm Output Yes No
serial3(B) I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial3(B) I/O.
Selects whether to output equipment state change to the
4 Maintenance

serial3(B) I/O.
Serial3(B):State No
Does not output state change to the serial3(B)
Chg. Output Yes No
I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial3(B) I/O.
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product
barcode by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B):Item No
The item code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
reader. Enter the user code using the touch panel.
5 Appendix

Yes The item code can be read by the barcode reader.

147
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial3(B):Item
2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
code (start
1 Basic Operations

(1 to18) barcode.
digit)
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial3(B):Item
6 product barcode.
code (digit
(0 to 18) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B):User No
The user code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
2 Advanced Operations

reader. Enter the user code using the touch panel.


Yes The user code can be read by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B):User
1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode of
code (start
(1 to 10) the user.
digit)
Specifies the number of digits of the user code in the
Serial3(B):User
0 barcode of the user.
code (digit
(0 to 10) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the user code.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

148
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Adjusting I/O Timing
This screen monitors input and output signals for external control. Use this screen for
input and output signals that require a timing adjustment.

1 Basic Operations
In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and
Setting"  "Unit/connected device set.”
From "Gen. I/O connection”, select "I/O
timing adjustment”.

2 Advanced Operations
The adjustment screen shown on the right is
displayed.

3 Installation and Connection


Description of the buttons on the top and bottom of the screen

Sets a channel to monitor trigger detection timing of [UP] and [DOWN] as


Trigger CH
set in the event.
DOWN Detects a signal when it goes from ON to OFF.
Event UP Detects a signal when it goes from OFF to ON.
No Does not detect events.
Loop Displays the signal regardless of events.
Display
4 Maintenance
Stationary Displays the signal when an event occurs.
When one of items 1 to 8 in the left side of the screen is tapped while
[Input] is displayed, the settings for the item such as signal type and delay
Input
time can be changed.
Signals must be set in advance.
When one of items 1 to 8 in the left side of the screen is tapped while [Set]
Set
is displayed, the signal to display is selected.

Get Starts capturing waveform data and displays the data.

Clear Clears the signal displayed on the screen.


5 Appendix

149
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Connecting Ethernet (LAN)
When connecting to the network via Ethernet, select "Maint. and Setting" 
"Unit/connected device set.”  "Network connection" in the "Menu" screen, and specify
1 Basic Operations

the settings by referring to the table below.

Network common settings


(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Network connection 
Network common settings)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
2 Advanced Operations

IP Address 192.168.0.100 Sets the IP address of the checkweigher.


Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Sets the subnet mask of the checkweigher.
Default
192.168.0.1 Sets the default gateway of the checkweigher.
Gateway
The MAC address of the checkweigher. It cannot be
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx changed.
MAC Address
* Read only The MAC address varies depending on the individual
item.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

150
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Comm. content settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Network connection 
Comm. content settings)

1 Basic Operations
* Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Network: No
Sets whether to connect to the network.
Connection Yes
Standard
Network: Applicable
QUICCA Selects the applicable connection.
connection
Mobile monitor

2 Advanced Operations
Outputs measured value for each weighing.
Outputs measured value by
Variable Length adjusting text length according to
weight value.
Outputs weight value in 8-digit fixed
Fixed length length. (G is included and blank
Invld. parts are specified as space)
Variable Length
Fixed Length Prod. Outputs measured value with
Prod. (variable (variable length) product number at variable length.
length) Prod. Outputs measured value with
Prod. (Fixed (Fixed length) product number at fixed length.

3 Installation and Connection


Network: Individual
length) Outputs detailed measured value
output Detail
Detail for each weighing.
Prod.2 (variable
length) Outputs measured value in variable
Prod.2
Prod.2 (fixed length with product number added.
(variable length)
length) *
Detail 2 Outputs measured value in fixed
Prod.2
length with product number added.
(fixed length)
*
Outputs detailed measured value
for each weighing. This setting is
Detail 2
available for Checkweigher with
M6-h series metal detector.* 4 Maintenance
Network: Mean No
Outputs batch mean value at the end of a batch.
value output Yes
No
Network: Statistics
Stat. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end of a batch.
output
Stat. V. 2
5 Appendix

151
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in network I/O.
Does not output measured value at
1 Basic Operations

No
operation check.
Outputs measured value at operation
No Yes
check.
Yes
Network: Out when Outputs measured values with product
Expansion Expansion
ope check number added.*
Expansion 2
The measurement value is output during
an operation check together with product
Expansion No., product effect value and phase
2 value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
2 Advanced Operations

detector.*
Selects the format of statistics data for the statistics
Network: Total stats. Stat. Value read command.
Contents Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs batch/total statistics data.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs batch/total statistics data 2.
Selects the type of product number link output in
network I/O. Set this to No.
No
Network: Product No Does not output data.
Yes
link
Expansion Yes Outputs data.
3 Installation and Connection

Expansion Outputs data. *


Selects whether to notify the network when an error or
Network: Error No alarm occurs.
alarm output Yes No Does not output errors and alarms.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms.
Selects whether to output equipment state change to
Network: State No external device.
change output Yes No Does not output state change.
Yes Outputs state change.
Network:Ext. No
Leave it as No (Default setting).
system output Yes
4 Maintenance

Sets message format of Ethernet communication.


When connecting to QUICCA, follow the procedures in
the QUICCA operation manual.
Network:ANP
Invld. Version 1
version Used when connected to other than
Invld.
QUICCA
Version 1 Used when connected to QUICCA
5 Appendix

152
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects operation when a communication alarm occurs
during operation.

1 Basic Operations
When data accumulation function is available,
generates
Network:Proc. at Alarm alarm when communication is disconnected and
comm. alarm Error accumulation starts. After reaching limit, operates
according to the settings below.
Processes communication alarm as
Alarm
alarm.
Error Processes communication alarm as error.

2 Advanced Operations
This parameter specifies how long to wait before
regarding connection as being terminated for periodic
data reception from QUICCA (optional) or the PC, in
seconds since the last data was received. The
Network:Keep alive
10 communication status is not monitored if 0 is specified.
timer
The connection status is indicated by the connection
status icon on the QUICCA connection status display
screen. This parameter is valid if “Ethernet” is specified
for the “Data out device” parameter.

3 Installation and Connection


This is used to set the processing to perform if the
connection with QUICCA (optional) or the PC is
terminated during operation.
Network:Proc. upon No No No special operation is performed.
disconnect Yes Outputs a error or alarm when
disconnecting communication. Whether
Yes
error or alarm depends on the setting of
“Network:Proc. at comm. Alarm”.
Network:Data Sets whether data accumulation function is used.
No/Yes
accum. Function Displayed when using network ANP version 2.
This license is required when connecting to the
4 Maintenance

No specified QUICCA.
Network:Connection
Yes
license No The network connection is not licensed.
* Read only
Yes The network connection is licensed.
5 Appendix

153
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Time synchronization setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Network connection 
Time synchronization setting)
1 Basic Operations

Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Network:SNTP time No Selects whether to perform time synchronization
sync. Yes with external server using NTP.
Network:SNTP
0 to 60 (10) min
connect interval (M)
Specifies interval of NTP synchronization.
Network:SNTP
0 to 59 (0) sec
connect interval (S)
2 Advanced Operations

Network:SNTP
255.255.255.255 Specifies IP address of NTP server.
server
Network:SNTP TD -23 to +23 (+9)
adjustment (H) hour Specifies time difference between installation site
Network:SNTP TD and Greenwich mean time.
0 to 59 (0) min
adjustment (M)
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

154
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Setting on the PC
Start the "Command Prompt" on a PC connected to a common network, enter the ping
command with the IP address (e.g. ping 192.168.0.1), and press the [Enter] key.

1 Basic Operations
For Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7, select "All
Programs"  "Accessories"  "Command
prompt" to open the command prompt.

For Windows 8, select "All apps" or


displayed at the bottom of the start screen,
and select "Command prompt" to open the

2 Advanced Operations
command prompt.

For Windows 10, select "All apps"  " Windows System Tool"  “Command prompt” to
open the command prompt.

• Network status
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection →

3 Installation and Connection


Network status)
The network connection status is
displayed.

• Version upgrade
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection
→Version upgrade)
This function updates the software of the
4 Maintenance

device. Use this function only when


requested by your customers.

When the screen to the right is displayed, C:¥>ping 192.168.0.1 ← Command entered
network settings are complete. Pinging 192.168.0.1 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128


Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
5 Appendix

Ping statistics for 192.168.0.1:


Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

155
Other Settings and Adjustments
Other Settings and Adjustments

> Performing an installation check


Installation check
(Maintenance and Setting → Installation check)
1 Basic Operations

 P. 29 Turning on the System for the First Time

> Adjusting Touch Screen


If the system does not respond when a screen button or key is pressed, perform
readjustment in the following steps.

Center of the screen


1 With the power switch turned OFF, turn
2 Advanced Operations

on the power switch while pressing the


center of the screen. "Touch Upper Left" Power switch button
is displayed on the screen.

Square
2 Press the square button on the screen. button
3 Installation and Connection

3 Press the (1), (2), and (3) square buttons


in this order. "Push [YES] button" is
displayed, and a 15-second countdown
starts.
(1)

4 Before the countdown is complete, press


[Yes]. The adjustment will be completed, (2)
(3)
and the [Start] screen is displayed a few
seconds later.
4 Maintenance

Push [YES] button : 10

If you choose not to press [YES] before the end of YES YES
countdown, the system returns to Step 2.
5 Appendix

156
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Checking Version Info
Press Help [?] → [Version Info.] to display
the checkweigher model, serial number,

1 Basic Operations
version information of the software, and
details on options.

> Changing and Initializing Password

2 Advanced Operations
The password can be changed or initialized by following the steps below.

1 In the "Menu" screen, by selecting "Control Panel"  "Password Change", "Password


Change" screen will be displayed. Tap [Next].

3 Installation and Connection


2 Press [Next] and select change or
initialization.

After selection, tap [Next].


4 Maintenance

Changing the password


5 Appendix

157
Other Settings and Adjustments
▼ Changing the password
3 Select the access level.
After selection, tap [Next].
1 Basic Operations

Selecting the Manager Level

4 Enter "Current password”. When the box is pressed, the keypad will be displayed.
Enter the password and press [OK].
2 Advanced Operations

Password input screen


3 Installation and Connection

When [Next] is pressed, the screen


shown right is displayed. Similarly, use
the keypad to enter a new password two
times.

Enter a password using 18 characters or less.


Only numbers, letters, or a combination can
be used. Operation can be done without
setting any password. When [Next] is pressed
4 Maintenance

with a blank box, the message "New


Password is blank. Access level can be
changed without entering a password." is
displayed. Press [Yes].

When "Completing password change" is


displayed, press [Completed].
5 Appendix

158
Other Settings and Adjustments
▼ Initializing the password
3 Select "Initialize Password", select the
target access level, and press [Yes].

1 Basic Operations
When the initialization is completed
successfully, the following screen is
displayed. Press [Completed].

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

159
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Setting the Date and Time
1 When top area of the screen with date
and time is pressed, the input screen is
1 Basic Operations

displayed.

2 Set Year, Month, and Day in the upper


2 Advanced Operations

column, and Time in the lower column.


When the text box is pressed, the keypad
is displayed. Enter a value and press
[OK].

Upper column:Year/Month/Day
Lower column:Hour:Minute:Second
3 Installation and Connection

Entering “Hour”
After entering values, press [OK] to finish
4 Maintenance

setting.
5 Appendix

160
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Setting the Language
1 Press "Language" in the "Menu" screen.
Or press “?” icon, and select [Language].

1 Basic Operations
The language can also be set by
selecting [?] → "Language".

Setting to English display

2 Select the language and press [OK].

2 Advanced Operations
> Changing the Display Language
By registering the product names and the user names in two languages in advance, the
display language can be switched to suit each operator.

3 Installation and Connection


The display can be switched.

Registering product names in two languages. Displaying in the “Product list” screen.

* Access level 2 or higher is required to set.

1 In the “Menu” screen, select “Control


4 Maintenance

Panel”  “Regional and Language” 


“Standard language”.
5 Appendix

161
Other Settings and Adjustments
2 Select “Standard language” and press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations

The display language is switched


depending on the settings of “Standard
language” and “Display language”.

The following table shows an example when specifying Portuguese as [Disp Type1]
and English as [Disp Type2].

Setting of Standard
Auto Portuguese English
language
2 Advanced Operations

Setting of Language Portuguese English Portuguese English Portuguese English


Product Product Product Product Product Product
Display of Product Name Name Name name 2 name 2 Name
Name * Product Name is * The product name is switched between Product
always displayed. Name and Product name 2.

▪ When starting up, the display language is the one specified as standard language.When
3 Installation and Connection

specifying the standard language setting to “Auto”, the display language is the one specified
as the display language.
▪ Specify the product name to be displayed in either of the following methods:
(1) Disp Type1 and Disp Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen
 P. 36 Registering a New product – Step 4
(2) Product Name and Product name2 in the “Product information” screen
 P. 55 Product information
* For M5, use method (2) for setting.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

162
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ Switching display language on Product list and User list screens
When pressing [Fn] button on the lower right of the screen while the product list is
displayed in the language specified in [Product Name], [Product name change] appears
on top of the submenu list. Press [Product name change] to display the names in the

1 Basic Operations
language specified in [Product name 2]. To display the product names in the language
specified in [Product Name], follow the same procedure to switch the language from
[Product Name] to [Product name 2].

2 Advanced Operations
Switching display language (for product names)

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

163
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Setting Conveyor Speed
This is to set the conveyor speed of the main unit and rejector to be connected.
It is optional for M5.
1 Basic Operations

Set main conveyor


(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Conveyor  Set main
conveyor)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Main Conveyor 50 m/min Sets the CW conveyor higher speed according to the
Speed (High)*1
2 Advanced Operations

(0 to 120) product settings.


Main Conveyor 50 m/min Sets the CW conveyor lower speed according to the
Speed (Low)*2 (0 to 120) product settings.
Main Conveyor 50 m/min
Set the common CW conveyor speed to all products.
Speed*3 (0 to 120)

*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is “2 Speed”, and *3 can be set when the
conveyor speed is set to “Fixed”.
3 Installation and Connection

RJ conveyor settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Conveyor  RJ conveyor
settings)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
RJ Conveyor Speed 50 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High)*1 (0 to 120)
RJ Conveyor Speed 50 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.
(Low)*2 (0 to 120)
50 m/min
4 Maintenance

RJ Conveyor Speed*3 Sets RJ conveyor speed.


(0 to 120)

*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is “2 Speed”, and *3 can be set when the
conveyor speed is set to “Fixed”.
5 Appendix

164
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Statistics Control
This is to make detailed settings for the statistics.

1 Basic Operations
Basic Statistics Setting
(Stats Control  Basic Statistics Setting)

Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Selects contents of printed/output statistics
All Prints statistics data for all products
Prints and outputs the statistics for

2 Advanced Operations
PASS products only (PASS statistics).
All Only Pass
This applies to individual printing as
Statistics Only Pass
well.
Both
Prints and outputs both the total
statistics and PASS statistics (to serial
Both
I/O and USB memory). For individual
printing, the total statistics are printed.
This sets the statistics printing contents.
Prints dispersion range, maximum

3 Installation and Connection


weight and minimum weight at total
statistics print.
All Data
Range = Max – Min. Max and Min are
the maximum and minimum values of
all the data.
All Data
Statistics Print Select Prints mean dispersion, maximum
Batch Data
deviation, and minimum deviation at
total statistics print.
Range Mean indicates the mean value
Batch Data
of the range per batch.
Max D. and Min D. indicate the
4 Maintenance
maximum and minimum values of the
standard deviation per batch.
Sets statistics pattern
At MDNG and EXNG, does not increment
Pattern A Pattern A
Statistics Pattern -NG, PASS and +NG counts
Pattern B
At MDNG and EXNG, increments -NG,
Pattern B
PASS and +NG counts
5 Appendix

165
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Selects Batch Cycle units
Uses count as batch cycle units
1 Basic Operations

For example, when the statistics batch is set


Count
to 10, statistics printing is performed at
Count
Batch Cycle Unit every 10 weight measurements.
Hour
Uses time (minutes) as batch cycle units
For example, when the statistics batch is set
Hour
to 10, statistics printing is performed every
10 minutes.
Selects statistical process when weighed-product
2 Advanced Operations

count reaches 1 million


Does not display alarm even when
weighed-product count reaches 1 million.
The display count is cleared to 0 and the count
re-starts. Select “None” when the count
display is used without requiring all the
No statistical data. As a result, it is possible to use
the count display continuously without clearing
the count. However, count displays in the
3 Installation and Connection

“X-bar” screen and “Histogram” screen are not


cleared and statistical calculation in batch
stops.
No Displays alarm "A006: STAT OVERFLOW"
Statistics Overflow
Yes when weighed-product count reaches 1
million.
The subsequent measurement results are not
saved in the statistics, and are not printed or
output individually unless the statistics are
cleared. Select “Yes” when all the statistical
Yes data are required. To obtain correct total
4 Maintenance

statistics, always clear the statistical data


periodically before the count reaches 1 million.
When the “A006 alarm” is displayed, print the
total statistical data, and clear the data. The
CW will then start saving the measured
weights for statistics including total statistics
again.
Specifies whether to clear the current statistics when
the product is changed.
Product Change No The statistics are not cleared when the
No
5 Appendix

Stats Clear Yes product is changed.


The current statistics are cleared when the
Yes
product is changed.

166
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
If "Yes" is set, statistics data is saved to USB when
statistics are cleared.

1 Basic Operations
USB Stats Save At No Statistics data is not saved to USB when statistics are
Stats Clear Yes cleared from "Serial", "Ethernet", or "General I/O". It
cannot be used with "Smart Guide" or "Product
Change Stats Clear".

> Setting Weighcell


This is to make detailed settings for the weigh cell.

2 Advanced Operations
Zeroset settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Weighcell  Zeroset
settings)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Selects zero-setting operation
Not necessary to change setting in normal use

3 Installation and Connection


Enables auto zero-setting function
Auto
Auto-zerosetting When the interval between products
External Auto
increases during operation, auto
zero-setting is performed.
External Performs zero-setting by external input
1% Selects auto-zeroset range for weight range
Auto-zeroset Range
0.1% Select ±1% or ±0.1%.
Sets Zeroset Alarm Time
0 (minute) If auto zero setting cannot be performed for specified
Zero-setting Alarm
(0 to 99) time, “A011 Auto Zeroset Alarm” is displayed and “PRE
4 Maintenance
STOP” output signal outputs.
Zero-setting Alarm Nonstop
Selects zeroset alarm stop processing ON/OFF
Processing Stop
5 Appendix

167
Other Settings and Adjustments
Weighcell settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Weighcell  Set weighcell)

Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations

(Default:_)
Sets whether or not to round the weight to the nearest
No zero.
Zero Rounding
Yes When Yes is selected, weights near zero (within ±0.1%
of weight range) are displayed as 0 g.
Inputs Ultra Under Limit.
The Ultra Under Limit is used to exclude products that
are very much lighter than the reference value from the
0.00
statistics targets.
2 Advanced Operations

Ultra Under Limit (0 to Weight


If a product is lighter than the Ultra Under Limit, it is
Range)
neither included in the statistics data nor individual
printing (even if individual printing is set to “All”).
However, the rejection signal is output.
When "Abs. Value" is selected, the absolute weight
value is displayed at the "Home" screen.
Abs. Value When "Deviation" is selected, the deviation weight
Weight Value
Deviation value is displayed at the "Home" screen.
(Deviation weight = Absolute weight - Reference
3 Installation and Connection

weight)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

168
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Security and Rules
This is to set prohibited items regarding the operation.

1 Basic Operations
Policy settings view
(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Policy settings list)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Change Parameter Enable Used to disable to change parameters during
(ope.) Disable operation.
Enable
Chg. Prod. (ope.) Used to disable to change product during operation.
Disable

2 Advanced Operations
Selects CW conveyor operation at error
Does not stop conveyor. Products are
rejected in the direction set at the
Nonstop
“ALARM direction” column on the “RJ
Nonstop direction settings” screen.
Processing Error
Stop Stops conveyor. When the conveyor is
stopped, selection of “Stop” and
Stop “Nonstop” settings for the “NG Rate

3 Installation and Connection


Alarm Processing” and “Zeroset Alarm
Processing” alarms is enabled.
Selects operation for +NG products.
* If OK is specified, +NG product data is not included
in the PASS statistics.
Rejects +NG products or stop conveyor for
NG +NG products in accordance with setting for
NG
+NG Product “NG product”.
OK
Does not reject +NG products. +NG products
are classified as PASS products. At statistics
OK count they are calculated as +NG products.
4 Maintenance

Because +OVF product is not correctly


measured, it is +NG product evaluation.
5 Appendix

169
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Selects checkweigher conveyor operation for NG
products.
1 Basic Operations

This setting is given to priority more than the setting in


the "RJ direction settings" screen when this setting is
"Stop" and the setting in the "RJ direction settings"
screen is given to priority when this setting is "Non
Stop".
* If the "NG Product" parameter is set to "Stop”, the
evaluation output is held even when the conveyor
Nonstop
NG Product*1 is stopped by NG product evaluation. The
Stop
evaluation output is released when the [Stop]
2 Advanced Operations

button is pressed. "Stop" setting for RJ direction


parameter at the "RJ Direction Setting" screen
works in the same manner.
When it is set to “Stop”, the product may flow
downstream on the conveyor without stopping.
Does not stop conveyor. The rejector is
Nonstop
used to reject unacceptable products.
Stop Stops conveyor. The rejector is not used.
3 Installation and Connection

Selects the conveyor operation when the network


Stop at communication alarm occurs.
Nonstop
communication
Stop Nonstop Does not stop conveyor.
alarm
Stop Stops conveyor.
The errors/alarms cannot be released at
None
Error/Alarm Batch None once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Release [Stop] button [Stop] The errors/alarms can be released at
button once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Product reg. navi: Yes Displays HIS setting in the items of “Register new
HIS No product.” when “Yes” is set.
4 Maintenance

Product reg. navi: Yes Displays FOCUS setting in the items of “Register new
FOCUS No product.” when “Yes” is set.
Product reg. navi: Yes Displays auto-limit setting in the items of “Register
Auto-limit No new product.” when “Yes” is set.
The errors/alarms cannot be released at
None
Error/Alarm Batch None once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Release [Stop] button [Stop] The errors/alarms can be released at
button once by pressing the [Stop] button.
5 Appendix

170
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Does not display the evaluation value in
No the “General” and “Sensitivity

1 Basic Operations
Evaluation value No Adjustment” screens.
display Yes Displays the evaluation value in the
Yes “General” and “Sensitivity Adjustment”
screens.
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display

2 Advanced Operations
Yes Display
The access level at power-on can be configured.
Auto The access level when the power is next
turned on depends on the access level
when the power was last turned off.
Access level at start Auto Access level at Access level at
of work 1a power-off next power-on
1a 1a

3 Installation and Connection


1b, 2 1b

1a The access level at power-on is 1a.


This parameter is used to set a release limitation by a
(Max. password when releasing an alarm. The input of a
Alarm Reset
alphabetical18 password set here can release an alarm. An
Password
characters) erroneous input of a password cannot release the
password.
You are required to enter a password to
Error/Alarm
Subject to set Error/Alarm release errors and alarms.
password Error You are required to enter a password to
Error
4 Maintenance

release errors.
Auto Logoff Time automatically changes the access
level to 1a if the inspection system is not operated for
Auto Logoff Time 0 to 60 (Min.) a certain period of time after switching to the manager
level (Access level 2). If 0 is set, the auto log-off time
becomes invalid.
* “+NG Product” and “NG Product” are displayed when “Common” is specified for
“Common/By product”.
Common/By product
5 Appendix

(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Common/By product)

171
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Setting related to +NG product processing.
Specifies that +NG product processing be
1 Basic Operations

performed in the same way by all equipment.


Common
Sets +NG product processing in the policy
+NG Product Common setting list to NG or OK.
(operation) By product Specifies +NG product processing by product.
“Menu” → “Adjust registered products” → “RJ
By
operation adjustment” → “RJ Parameter list”
product
→ “+NG product process (by prod.)” and then
set.
2 Advanced Operations

Specifies settings related to the process of the NG (failed)


products.
Specifies the motion to process the NG
(failed) products as the common settings.
Common Specifies either “Stop” or “Nonstop” in “NG
product process” from the “Policy Setting List”
Common/ Common
screen.
By product By product
Specifies on how to process NG (failed)
3 Installation and Connection

products by registered product.


By “Menu” → “Adjust registered products” → “RJ
product operation adjustment” → “RJ Parameter list”
→ “NG product process (by prod.)” and then
set.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

172
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Specifying the installation check settings
Installation check setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Installation check  Installation check setting)

1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
Yes Display

2 Advanced Operations
This records whether "Cautions for safety" on the
Check cautions for Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
safety Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
This records whether "Handling caution 1" on the
Check handling Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
caution 1 Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
This records whether "Handling caution 1" on the
Check handling Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
caution 2 Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.

3 Installation and Connection


This records whether "Installation precaution" on the
Check installation Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
precaution Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

173
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Other Functions
■ Photocell monitoring
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Photocell monitoring)
1 Basic Operations

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets error detection operation of photocell for
measurement.
Photocell error occurs when product
ON interrupts photocell for time set at
ON "Photocell Error Time”.
Photocell Error Notify
ON/OFF In addition to the above error detection,
2 Advanced Operations

a photocell error also occurs when a


ON/OFF product moves onto the weigh
conveyor without interrupting the
photocell while the conveyor is running.
Inputs time that photosensor detects time error. The
error is generated when the interrupted time of the
photo sensor exceeds the set time. The default is 7 s.
7s The set time can be shortened if it is too long.
Photocell Error Time
(1 to 9s) However, do not set the time shorter than the product
3 Installation and Connection

interrupt time, because an error will occur each time


a product passes. When the EEC function is used,
this parameter is disabled and is not displayed.
Set how to release the following photocell errors.
Normally, a photocell error is automatically released
when the cause is improved. Set “Manual” when you
operate the equipment by entering the release
password.
▪ Photocell error E011
▪ RJ photocell error E352, A352
▪ Photocell of Metal detector unit error E511
4 Maintenance

Clear photo Auto


tran/recverror Manual A photocell error is automatically
released when the cause is improved.
Auto You can release the error manually.
However, the photocell error persists if
the cause of the error is not improved.
When you find a photocell error, clear
Manual the cause and press the [//Reset]
button.
5 Appendix

174
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ Smart Guide setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Smart Guide)

Setting
Name Explanation

1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Sets ON/OFF of the function that displays operation
instructions to operate the checkweigher properly on
No
Smart guide the screen.
Standard
If the setting value is Standard, operation instructions
are displayed on the screen.
Displays the [Register new product] button in the
“Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No

2 Advanced Operations
Does not display the [Register new
1a No
Phase 2: Prod Reg. product] button.
1b
2 Displays the [Register new product]
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity] button in
the “Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Adjust detection
Phase 2: Detect. 1a No
sensitivity] button.

3 Installation and Connection


Sense. Adj. 1b
2 Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity]
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Ope. Chk at prod.] button in the “Phase
4” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Ope. Chk at prod.]
Phase 4: Ope. Chk 1a No
button.
at prod. 1b
2 Displays the [Ope. Chk at prod.] button
1a to 2 when the access level is equal to or
higher than the specified level. 4 Maintenance

If you are using the Smart Guide, this setting toggles


Print statistics at end No
the function to automatically print statistics data at
of production Yes
the end of production on and off.
Eva/RJ Confirmation No If "Yes" is set, tap [Others] button to display
Details Yes evaluation/rejection results of smart guide.
5 Appendix

175
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ Full detection
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Full detection)

Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations

(Default:_)
When using the “Full Detection” function, which
detects the full state at the box for NG products or
pass products, this sets the target for full counting
from input of the box-full signal input until the
conveyor stops.
Pass * This is enabled only when “FULL” is set at “Input
BoxFull Target
NG port” and “Output port” in the “I/O Setting” screen.
Stops conveyor when pass product count
2 Advanced Operations

Pass
reaches set full count.
Stops conveyor when NG product count
NG
reaches set full count.
Set the time from the full detection signal on to the
Box full monitoring 5 seconds occurrence of an alarm. Set the time so that no
time (1 to 10 seconds) product overflows from the NG box before an alarm
occurs.
An alarm occurs at full detection and
3 Installation and Connection

gives a warning. An error occurs and


stops the conveyor when a box-full
Error/alarm
quantity of products flows in the box.
Set 0 to 9998 for box-full quantity to
Error/alarm generate an error.
At full detect
Alarm
In the case of full detection, the
conveyor stops when alarm A070
Alarm occurs for warning and products for
“BoxFull Qty.” flow into the box. At
this time, E070 does not occur.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

176
Other Settings and Adjustments
Full Detection Input and Output
When boxes are installed at the weighed product classification outlet, products may not
be correctly classified or products may overflow if the boxes become full. Full detection
I/O avoids this problem.

1 Basic Operations
外部(ボックス)
External (box)
① 重量選別機
Checkweigher
② 外部(パトライト)
External
(Warning light)

Full count start


満杯個数カウント開始

満杯検出入力
Full detect input

2 Advanced Operations
満杯検出出力
Full detect output
"A070 Box FULL" display
「A070 ボックス FULL」表示

5s 1s 個数カウントリセット
Count reset alarm
アラーム表示解除
display released

Conveyor Start/Stop Start 運転


コンベア運転/停止状態
status 停止
Stop

3 Installation and Connection


[ストップ]ボタン後の
Operation restart by pressing
[スタート]ボタンで再運転
[Start] button

[1] Detection full input (signal name: FULL)


This input is for detecting the full status. When this input is continuously ON for more
than 5 seconds, the Indicator displays the “A070 Box Full” alarm to turn the Full
detection output to ON and full counting starts. When the count reaches the set full
count (except when it is set to 0 or 9999), the checkweigher conveyors will forcibly be
stopped. When Full Count reaches the set condition, the conveyor stops and
simultaneously displays the alarm. When Full Count does not reach the set condition,
the conveyor does not stop.
4 Maintenance

The input signal logic can be reversed by changing the input logic setting.

[2] Detection full output (Signal name: FULL)


This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5 seconds. It goes OFF
when the Full detection input is OFF.
5 Appendix

177
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ NG rate
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  NG rate)

Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations

(Default:_)
Set whether NG rate alarm function available or not.
No The NG rate alarm is output when the NG rate in the
NG Rate
Yes NG rate batch exceeds the set value. Set the NG rate
(%) and NG rate batch at "Product settings”.
NG Rate Alarm Nonstop
Selects NG Alarm stop processing ON/OFF.
Processing Stop
2 Advanced Operations

NG Rate Alarm Output


This signal is output when a rate of faulty products (+/- NG. products) exceeds a certain
set value. It is used to monitor a line error such as an operation error of the preceding
filling machine.
Going back by the batch quantity for NG rate (100 pcs. if the batch quantity for NG rate is
100 or more) from the latest weighed products, the signal is output when the number of
faulty products exceeds the set NG rate (0 to 100%); its output continues until a rate of
faulty products drops below the set NG rate.
3 Installation and Connection

Example: When the batch quantity for NG rate is 10 and NG rate is 30%.
If 3 (10 x 30%) or more faulty products are included in the latest 10 pieces, an
NG rate alarm occurs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OK NG OK OK OK OK OK NG OK OK NG OK NG NG
○ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ ○ ○ △ ○ △ △

2 NG products
NG2 個
3 NG products
NG3 個
4 Maintenance

2NG2
NG products

3 NG products
NG3 個
4 NG products
NG4 個

不良率 NG
NG Rate 出力 OFF
Alarm
Output ON

If a rate of faulty products exceeds the set NG rate prior to reaching the batch quantity for
NG rate after starting operation, NG rate alarm output turns on. At power-on, or if
operation is suspended, the previous faulty product data is cleared. This function does not
5 Appendix

work if the NG rate or the batch quantity for NG rate is 0.

178
Other Settings and Adjustments
Timing Chart (When
タイムチャート suspended due to an error)
(異常時停止の場合)

・測
■ 定
Measurement
(T1 to evaluation time)
(T1~判定時間) NG Rate Alarm
↓不良率 NG と判断Output

1 Basic Operations
OFF
■ Evaluated as NG
・不良率 NG 出力 ON
Rate Alarm

■ Motor-ON Output
OFF
・モータオン出力 ON
・ブザー出力
■ Buzzer output OFF
ON
Operating Recovery Key
復帰キー操作 CE

2 Advanced Operations
■ Counter preset
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Counter preset)

Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Selects the counting target when “Counter preset”
used.
PASS
Preset Pattern ALL PASS Only pass products

3 Installation and Connection


RJ1 to RJ5 ALL All products
RJ1 to RJ5 Products rejected to each RJ direction

■ Product check setting


(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Product check setting)

Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Enables and disables the product check function.
The product check function is used to correct the
4 Maintenance

Product Check Yes phases of inspected products during metal


Function No contaminant inspection.
“Product check setting” is displayed on the Product
settings screen when this parameter is set to “Yes”.
Set the processing at the end of product check.

Stop Stop Stops the operation.


Product Check
Operation Operation Proceeds with production.
Finish Proc.
Stop Abnormal
Stop Stops the operation if an error
Abnormal occurs.
5 Appendix

179
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ NGBox door monitoring time
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Electronic locked NGBox setting)

Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations

(Default:_)
This function is used to notify the alarm when the
unacceptable-product box that is installed to the
rejector is opened for the specified time or longer.
Yes
NGBox Lock Alarm can be released by the operation on the
No
screen. In addition, closing all of the
unacceptable-product boxes to be installed
automatically releases alarm.
This parameter is used to set a time for monitoring
2 Advanced Operations

NGBox Monitor 5 seconds the open status of an NG reception box. An A072


Time (1 to 30) NGBox Open alarm occurs when the open status
continues for more than the specified time.
Alarm Alarm An alarm occurs at NGBox open.
At NGBox open
Error Error An error occurs at NGBox open.

■ Auto-limit setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Auto-limit setting)
3 Installation and Connection

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets the count to feed through products when using
the auto-limit setting while the conveyor is running.
20
Auto-limit count Statistics are counted because this operation is
(5 to 99)
performed while in the normal production state.
If a product is evaluated as NG, it is not counted.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

180
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ RJ check (optional)
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  RJ Check Setting)

Setting
Name Description

1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Set how to generate the following RJ check error.
▪ Rejector operation error E015, A015
▪ OK not passed E031, A031
▪ NG product passed E032, A032
▪ NG product rejection error E033, A033
▪ OK product rejected E034, A034
▪ NG product rejection error E035, A035

2 Advanced Operations
▪ Non-evaluation rejecting E036, A036
▪ RJ3 acceptance path conveyance fail E081, A081
▪ RJ3 acceptance path conveyance fail E082, A082
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 accept. path
E083, A083
▪ RJ1 reject path sort failure E084, A084
▪ RJ1 reject path sort failure E085, A085
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ1 reject path
E086, A086

3 Installation and Connection


▪ RJ5 reject path sort failure E087, A087
Alarm ▪ RJ5 reject path sort failure E088, A088
At RJ check error
Error ▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ5 reject path
E089, A089
▪ RJ3 reject path sort failure E281, A281
▪ RJ3 reject path sort failure E282, A282
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 reject path
E283, A283
▪ RJ1 acceptance path conveyance fail E284, A284
▪ RJ1 acceptance path conveyance fail E285, A285 4 Maintenance

▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ1 accept. path


E286, A286
▪ RJ5 acceptance path conveyance fail E287, A287
▪ RJ5 acceptance path conveyance fail E288, A288
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ5 accept. path
E289, A289
▪ Excess product length detected by sorter E290,
A290
Alarm An alarm occurs at RJ check error.
5 Appendix

Error An error occurs at RJ check error.

181
Other Settings and Adjustments
> User Information
This is to specify the user information.
1 Basic Operations

User
(Maint. and Setting  Maintenance Information  User Information  User)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)

Company name and installation line name can be


User
entered (up to 15 characters).
2 Advanced Operations

> Setting Screen Brightness and Key Touch Operation


This is to specify the screen brightness, back light off, and key touch operation.

Display settings
(Control Panel  Display settings)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Adjusts back light brightness.
3 Installation and Connection

4, 3, 2, 1, 0, -1,
Screen brightness
-2, -3, -4 The default "4" is the brightest setting.
Sets the time to turn off the screen light.
When it is set to 0, the screen will never turn off.
Back light out 0 to 30 (min)
To re-display the screen, touch the screen or press
the Home button.

Key touch operation


(Control Panel  Key touch operation)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
4 Maintenance

ON Sets ON/OFF of the touch sound at key/screen


Key Touch Sound
OFF operation.
Specify the keyboard layout.
Displays the QWERTY screen. Note
Auto that the ABCDEF screen is displayed if
Auto
Keyboard Layout QWERTY the screen display language is
Japanese.
ABCDEF
QWERTY Displays the QWERTY screen.
ABCDEF Displays the ABCDEF screen.
5 Appendix

182
Other Settings and Adjustments

1 Basic Operations
QWERTY screen ABCDEF screen

> Entering Device Information


Enters the information for identifying the device.

2 Advanced Operations
Device Information settings
(Maint. and Setting  Device Information  Device Information settings)

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
0000
Line Name Sets "Line Name" to identify the checkweigher.
(up to 4 characters)

3 Installation and Connection


00
Sub-number Sets "Sub-number" to identify the checkweigher.
(00 to 99)

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

183
Options and Peripheral Devices
Options and Peripheral Devices

> Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer


If the optional signal tower or buzzer is installed, set it in the following steps.
1 Basic Operations

1 Select the "Menu" screen  "Maint. and Setting"  "Unit/connected device set.” 
"Signal tower / Buzzer"  "Signal tower common Set”.
2 Advanced Operations

2 In the "Signal tower common Set.”


screen, set Signal Tower to "Yes”. Set the
number and the colors of lights by
referring to the table below.
3 Installation and Connection

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
No Sets the presence of the signal tower or
Signal Tower
Yes buzzer.
3 Sets the number of lamps to 3.
Number of Lights
(0 to 3) For the buzzer, set Number of Lamps to 3.
4 Maintenance

Sets the color of the 1st lamp of the signal


One Red/Yellow/Green/Blue/White
tower .
Sets the color of the 2nd lamp of the signal
Two Red/Yellow/Green/Blue/White
tower .
Sets the color of the 3rd lamp of the signal
Three Red/Yellow/Green/Blue/White
tower.

Resetting the signal tower

Disabling buzzer sound only


5 Appendix

Press the sound button at the top of the screen.


(lamps still illuminate)

Disabling buzzer sound and lamps Press the [//] button at the top of the screen.

184
Options and Peripheral Devices
3 Select the item to set in the "Sig. tower
settings" screen and press [Input]. Set
the Op method and Op Time by referring
to the table below.

1 Basic Operations
Event
When the "Event" box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.

Event Operation timing Pulse Hold 1 Hold 2 Standard


None Disables the set event. - - - -

2 Advanced Operations
Stop Conveyor stopped Disable Disable Disable Enable
Operation Conveyor ON Disable Disable Disable Enable
Ope.Check Operation check Disable Disable Disable Enable
Error Error occurred Disable Disable Disable Enable
Alarm occurrs and product is
Alarm Disable Disable Disable Enable
discharged in alarm direction.
OK OK evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable

3 Installation and Connection


All NG NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
Weight +NG +NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
Weight -NG -NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
Weight NG +NG or -NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
MDNG MDNG occurred Enable Enable Enable Disable
Conveyor NG D-Prod. evaluation or length
Enable Enable Enable Disable
(D-Prod. etc) exceeded
Length error of Metal detection
Product NG Enable Enable Enable Disable
unit (A505) occurred
External NG External NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
4 Maintenance

External NG 2 External NG 2 evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable


According to the setting of OUTP1
OUTP1 Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary
of general I/O output
According to the setting of OUTP2
OUTP2 Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary
of general I/O output
According to the setting of OUTP3
OUTP3 Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary
of general I/O output
For OUTP1 to 3, the operation method and operation time set on the I/O setting screen
5 Appendix

are used.

185
Options and Peripheral Devices
The settings specified in OUTP1 to OUTP3 of general I/O output can be used as a signal
tower event. OUTP1 to OUTP3 can be set in the I/O Output screen
Available events are shown in the table below.
1 Basic Operations

I/O output signal


RJ Alarm Direction
Upstream Stop
Measurable
NG Rate
+Mean alarm
-Mean alarm
2 Advanced Operations

RJ Check Error Output


Printer Paper Out Alarm
Counter Preset
Full Detection
Conveyor Error Output
Reference Value Alarm
Serial Communication
Alarm
3 Installation and Connection

USB Memory-Related
Alarm
READY
NGBOX OPEN RJ1
NGBOX OPEN RJ2
NGBOX OPEN RJ4
NGBOX OPEN RJ5
MD Conveyor Mode
Output
4 Maintenance

Op method
When the "Op method" box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.

Op method Operation
Standard Operates as described in the event.
Pulse Operates during the Op Time.
Hold 1 Operates until the end of evaluation of the next product.
Hold 2 Operates until the Reset button on the screen is pressed to reset.
5 Appendix

186
Options and Peripheral Devices
Illumination method
When the level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.

Illumination method Operation

1 Basic Operations
Off Turns it off.
No change Does not affect the light.
On Turns it on.
Blink 1 Repeats short blinks.
Blink 2 Repeats long blinks.
Blink 3 Repeats short blinks with a break in between sets.

2 Advanced Operations
Beep method
When the top level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.

Beep method Operation


Mute Turns off the sound.
No change Does not affect the beep sound.
Beep 1 Generates short beeps.
Beep 2 Generates long beeps.

3 Installation and Connection


Op Time
When the "Op Time" text box is pressed,
the input screen is displayed.
This is the time for which the signal tower
is operated when [Op method] is set to
[Pulse].

Op Time input screen


4 Maintenance

■ Adding a new event


To add a new event, select a blank line
as shown right, and press the [Input]
button.
5 Appendix

Selecting a blank event

187
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Sequence change
Sets the lamp to highlight (give preference) at the upper tier.
1 Basic Operations

1 Press [Seq. chg] to set the lamp to


highlight (give preference) in an earlier
number.
2 Advanced Operations

(Example) Selecting the 2nd event

2 When the up arrow button in the right end


of the screen is pressed, the selected
event moves to the top.
3 Installation and Connection

Moves to the top

■ Delete event
Select the event and press the [Delete] button at the bottom of the screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

188
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Setting a Printer
This section describes the printer settings when the optional printer is installed.

1 Basic Operations
■ Setting a printer to use
Printer settings
(Menu → Maint. and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Printer  Printer
settings)

Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets printer disable or enable Data Printer or

2 Advanced Operations
commercially used printer.
Disable
Disable Not used
Excl. Use
Printer Excl. Use Optional Data Printer used
General 1
General 2 Commercially manufactured printer
General 1,
used. For the model that can be used,
General 2
consult Anritsu.

■ Selecting printer output target product

3 Installation and Connection


1 In the "Menu" screen, select "USB
memory/printer"  "Output to printer”,
and press "Set”.

2 Select the products (all or one product) to


print out.
4 Maintenance

To select only one product, touch the text


box to display the Product Table screen.
Select the product and press [OK].
In the right screen, press [Printout] to
start printing.

To feed paper without printing, press [Feed].


5 Appendix

Output all product data during suspension. You cannot output the data during operation.

189
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Settings for products other than print target products
Printer output settings
(Menu → Maint. and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Printer  Printer output
settings)
1 Basic Operations

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Normal
Print Direction Sets the print direction.
Reverse
No Sets whether or not to print a histogram.
Histogram Print
Yes A histogram is printed at batch statistics printing.
No Sets whether or not to print time. Individual printing
Time Print
Yes contents depend on the setting of “Individual Print”.
2 Advanced Operations

Selects print contents for individual products.


* Individual print is not performed when "Statistics
Print" is set to "PASS and "Individual Print" is set to
"NG Prod. Only”. If "All" or "Only NG" is specified, be
sure to stop the conveyor before turning off the
system. If you turn off the system without stopping
No the conveyor, individual printing might not be
All performed correctly.
Individual Print
Only NG
No Does not print individual data.
MDNG
Prints weights of all products
3 Installation and Connection

All
(PASS/UNDER/OVER).
Print only weights of +NG, -NG, MDNG,
Only NG
EXNG and Dbl. Prod products.
Prints only weights and MD evaluation
MDNG value of MDNG products but does not
print for separate MD.
Inputs individual product printing cycle (up to four
digits [0 to 9999]).
For the individual product printing cycle, specify the
interval for individual product printing in product
counts. At this time, make sure to specify a value
less than that specified for “Batch Print Cycle”.
1 Individual statistics are not printed if a value equal to
4 Maintenance

Each Print Cycle or greater than that specified for “Batch Print Cycle”
(0 to 9999)
is specified.
(If the measurement speed is 300 ppm or more,
specify 2 or more for the individual product printing
cycle.)
When 0 is specified, individual product printing is not
performed.
Specifies batch printing cycle (up to four digits [0 to
9999]).
0 For the batch printing cycle, specify the batch printing
Batch Print Cycle
(0 to 9999) interval in batch counts.
5 Appendix

When 0 is specified, batch statistics printing is not


performed.

190
Options and Peripheral Devices
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets ON/OFF for the function that automatically
prints operation check results at the end of an
Print at Operation No operation check.

1 Basic Operations
Check End Yes
Operation Check …(Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ
Confirmation)
Print stats at No Specifys whether to print statistical data at the end of
production end Yes production when smart guide is being used.

No Selects whether to print the evaluation result of the


Check Mode Print
Yes product fed in the check mode.

The print directions (Normal/Reverse) are as shown in the sample below.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
Normal Reverse

Paper feed direction


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

191
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Print contents and format
The checkweigher can print the following data with the optional printer installed.

Data Print contents


1 Basic Operations

Total Statistics Printing


Statistics Data
Batch Statistics Printing
Individual Print
Individual Data
Time Print
Eva/RJ Confirmation Printing
Operation Check Data Accuracy Check Print
Check Mode Print
2 Advanced Operations

For print samples, refer to the following.

Total Statistics Printing


At Total Statistics Printing, the statistics data after statistics clear is printed when the
[Print] button is pressed.
In addition, set values at each screen can be printed.
Print contents vary by the settings of "Menu"  "USB memory/Printer"  "Output to
3 Installation and Connection

printer" and "Menu"  "Stats Control"  "Basic Statistics Setting".


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

192
Options and Peripheral Devices
(All products statistics)
Statistics start time
(Time when the first product
was measured after the P001=== G.TOTAL ==== ALL
statistics data was cleared.) Start 2011-11-01 15:30
End 2011-11-01 18:30 Statistics end time

1 Basic Operations
Indicates how many times a Product name ---- Confectionery
batch measurement has been Lot No. --- BCD1234
performed since the start of Batch 2
Any products other than the
statistics. -NG products 4.9% 2
pass products are not printed
PASS products 87.8% 36 when pass product statistics
Metal NG count +NG products 7.3% 3 is set.
MDNG 0.0% 0
External NG count
EXNG 0.0% 0 MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, and
EXNG2 0.0% 0 D-Prod. are not printed if they
D-Prod. 0.0% 0 are excluded from statistics.
Total count 41 Total count includes the

2 Advanced Operations
Indicates the number of number of D-Prod. products
No. of products 41 when double product print is
products subject to statistics.
Total weight 1.79716 kg set.
Mean 43.8332 g
Only the pass products are
subject to statistics for pass
Standard deviation 9.3374 g The statistic contents to be
product statistics. printed can be selected by
External NG products are Dispersion 46.40 g Statistics Print Select on the
excluded from statistics even Maximum value 49.78 g Basic Statistics Setting screen,
for all product statistics. Minimum value 3.38 g which is displayed by selecting
“Menu”  “Stats Control” 
“Basic Statistics Setting”.
Reference value-- 46.00 g All Data: Dispersion range,
Prints the tare weight when Lower limit ------ -4.00 g maximum weight,
Upper limit ------ 4.00 g

3 Installation and Connection


Tare Subtract is set. and
Lower limit of histogram Tare weight ------ 0.80 g minimum weight
Product length ---- 120 mm Batch Data: Mean dispersion,
Scale of histogram Lower limit of deviation --- 43.69 g maximum deviation,
Rank pitch ---- 1.00 g and
minimum deviation
-* 2
The upper limit and lower limit 7 0
values are indicated by a 6 0
dotted line. 5 0
4 0
3 ---------------------- 0 Vertically displays the ranks and
2 *************** 34 horizontally displays the
1 0 histograms of each rank with up
0 ---------------------- 0 to 15 “*” marks.
1* 1
4 Maintenance

Indicates the count or time 2* 1


per batch measurement. 3 ---------------------- 0
The printed contents depend 4 0
on the Batch Cycle Unit on 5 0
the Basic Statistics Setting 6 0
screen, which is displayed by 7 0
selecting “Menu”  “Stats + ** 3
Control”  “Basic Statistics
Setting”.
Time: Batch cycle time
Batch count ---------- 20
Count: Batch count Each print cycle ----- 1
Batch print cycle---- 1
======================
5 Appendix

193
Options and Peripheral Devices
Batch Statistics Printing
Printing of statistics results at every predetermined number of products or every
predetermined time is called batch statistics printing.
The printed contents vary by the parameter settings on the Printer output setting screen,
1 Basic Operations

which is displayed by selecting “Menu”  “USB memory/printer”  “Printer output setting”,


and settings on the Basic Statistics Setting screen, which is displayed by selecting “Menu”
 “Stats Control”  “Basic Statistics Setting”.

(All products statistics)


Statistics start time
Product No.
(Time when the first product
was measured after the Product No. -------- 001
2 Advanced Operations

statistics data was cleared.) Start 2011.11.01 15:30


End 2011.11.01 18:30 Statistics end time
Indicates the number of Product name ---- Confectionery
batch measurements Lot No. --- ABCD1234
since the Batch 3 Any products other than the
-NG products 9.1% 2 pass products are not printed
PASS products 90.0% 20 when pass product statistics
Metal NG count +NG products 0.0% 0 is set.
MDNG 0.0% 0 MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, and
External NG count
EXNG 0.0% 0 D-Prod. are not printed if they
EXNG2 0.0% 0 are excluded from statistics.
D-Prod. 0.0% 0
3 Installation and Connection

Indicates the number of Total count 22


products subject to statistics. Total count includes the
No. of products 22 number of D-Prod. products
Weight 0.91432 kg when double product print is
Batch measurement results. set.
Only the pass products are Mean 41.5600 g
subject to statistics for pass Standard deviation 12.8921 g
product statistics.
External NG products are Dispersion 44.88 g
excluded from statistics even Maximum value 45.64 g
for all product statistics. Minimum value 0.76 g

Reference value ---- 46.00 g


Lower limit ----- -3.00 g
Upper limit ------ 3.00 g The statistical histogram is
Prints the tare weight when printed if Histogram Print is
Tare Subtract is set. Tare weight ----- 0.80 g
set to “Yes”.
4 Maintenance

--------------------------------------

The batch statistics are printed at the following timing.


▪ When products are measured the number of the batch cycle count
(when Batch Cycle Unit is set to “COUNT”)
For all product statistics, the batch statistics are printed when the measurement count
reaches the batch count.
For pass product statistics, the batch statistics are printed when the number of pass
5 Appendix

products reaches the batch count.


▪ When the batch cycle time has passed (when Batch Cycle Unit is set to “Time”)
▪ When the total statistics printing is executed in the middle of a batch measurement

194
Options and Peripheral Devices
Individual Print
Individual Print is used to print individual data of product.
In the example below, “46.05” next to “1” at the top left indicates the first data item of the
batch, followed by odd numbers (3, 5, 7,…). “46.08” to the right is the second data item,

1 Basic Operations
followed by even numbers (4, 6, 8,…).

(All)
The measurement time is printed
Data of odd-numbered when Time Print is set to “Yes”.
products The measurement time is not
2011-05-17 16:43:34
printed when the products are
1 46.05+M 46.08 measured at the same time.
Note: Only the pass 3 46.60E 46.03
products are
printed when
2011-05-17 16:44:03
5 110.26+* -***.** W

2 Advanced Operations
pass products Data of even-numbered products
t ti ti i t 7 -***.** W +***.**
9 46.31e 43.89-*

The meanings of the characters and symbols printed to the right of the numeric data are
as shown below.

+* : +NG product (+***.** indicates a positive overflow)


-* : –NG product (+***.** indicates a negative overflow)

3 Installation and Connection


110.26 E, e : EXTNG, EXTNG2
Weight
W : Double product
M : MDNG

(Only NG)
The time when an NG
product is measured is
Product No. 2011-11-17 13:44:44 printed when Time Print is
P001 Snacks set to “Yes”.
Serial number (1 to 9999) 1 43.11-*
The number restarts from 2011-11-17 14:06:51 Product
1 when it exceeds 9999 P001 Snacks
2 50.34+*
4 Maintenance
・・・
2011-11-17 15:24:18
P005 Candies
3 -***.** W
5 Appendix

195
Options and Peripheral Devices
(Only MDNG)
The time when an MDNG
product is measured is
Product No. printed when Time Print is
2011-11-17 13:44:44
set to “Yes”.
P099 Snacks
1 Basic Operations

Serial number (1 to 9999) 1 MDNG 58.725g Product


The number restarts from Fe/SUS 5.70/ 5.0 Indicates the effect value
1 when it exceeds 9999
Ext 0.55/ 5.0 measured by the metal
detector. The printed
contents depend on the
evaluation mode selected.
The numeric value on the
right of the slash (/) is the
metal evaluation limit.
(Only MDNG)
The time when an MDNG product
2 Advanced Operations

is measured is printed when Time


Product No. 2011-11-17 13:44:44 Print is set to “Yes”.

P099 Snacks
Product
Serial number(1 to 9999) 1 MDNG 58.725g
The number restarts from ML1 4.86/ 5.0 Indicates the effect value measured
1 when it exceeds 9999
ML2 2.87/ 5.0 by the metal detector. The numeric
ML3 2.87/ 5.0 value on the right of the slash (/) is
the metal evaluation limit.
ML4 2.87/ 5.0
Check metal contamination
ML1: Evaluation value
3 Installation and Connection

for ML1 side


ML2: Evaluation value
for ML2 side
ML3: Evaluation value
for ML3 side
ML4: Evaluation value
for ML4 side
Check missing product
ML1: Evaluation value
for ML1 side
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

196
Options and Peripheral Devices
Operation Check Print
(Eva.RJ Confirmation/Procedure Fixed)
Product No.
Product
===Eva/RJ Confirmation===

1 Basic Operations
Access level of the user No.001 Confectionery
who performed the
Eval/RJ check
2011-11-01 11:30:21 Time when the Eval/RJ
Access level 1b check was performed
Individual data Result OK Pass/fail result of the
Indicates the evaluation 1 [ OK] OK 46.34 g Eval/RJ check
reference value and result for Fe/SUS 0.57 Ext 1.02
each evaluation. 2 [ MDNG] MDNG
The evaluation reference can
Fe/SUS 88.38 Ext 1.35 Indicates the effect value
be set by selecting “Menu”  measured by the metal
“Operation Check”  “Eval. & 3 [ MDNG] MDNG
Fe/SUS 86.40 Ext 1.34 detector. The printed
RJ check settings”. contents depend on the
evaluation mode selected.

2 Advanced Operations
Characters in [ ] indicates Reference value ---- 46.00 g
evaluation reference Lower limit --------- 49.00 g
while those out of [ ] Upper limit ---------- 43.00 g
indicates evaluation Fe/SUS --------------- 5.0
result. Ext -------------------- 5.0 Setting values for evaluation
Printed when using metal Test pieces
detector. Size Fe φ 2.0
Indicates the limit value to
Size SUS φ 2.0 evaluate metal NG. The
contents changes based
======================= on the selected
"evaluation mode".

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

197
Options and Peripheral Devices
(Eva.RJ Confirmation/Procedure Fixed)
Product No. Product
===Eva/RJ Confirmation===
Access level of the user No.001 Confectionery
who performed the Eval/RJ 2011-11-01 11:30:21
1 Basic Operations

Time when the Eval/RJ check


check Access level 1b was performed
Result OK
Pass/fail result of the Eval/RJ
1 [ OK] OK 29.59 g check
ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0 )
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) Indicates the effect value measured
Individual data ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) by the metal detector.
Indicates the evaluation ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) Check metal contamination
reference value and result for 2 [MDNG]MDNG
each evaluation. ML1: Evaluation value
The evaluation reference can be ML1 (14.86/ 5.0 ) for ML1 side
set by selecting “Menu”  ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML2: Evaluation value
2 Advanced Operations

“Operation Check”  “Eval. & ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) for ML2 side
RJ check settings”. ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML3: Evaluation value
3 [MDNG]MDNG for ML3 side
Characters in [ ] ML1 (14.86/ 5.0 ) ML4: Evaluation value
indicates evaluation ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) for ML4 side
reference while those ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) Check missing product
out of [ ] indicates ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML1: Evaluation value
evaluation result.
for ML1 side
Reference value - 46.00 g
Lower limit ---- 49.00 g
Upper limit ---- 43.00 g
Test pieces Setting values for evaluation
3 Installation and Connection

Printed when using


Size Fe φ 2.0
metal detector.
Size SUS φ 2.0
======================
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

198
Options and Peripheral Devices
(Accuracy Check)
Product No. Product
======Accuracy check=====
Access level of the No.001 Confectionery
user who performed
2011-11-01 11:30:21

1 Basic Operations
the accuracy check
Access level 1b Time when the accuracy
Result OK check was performed
Allowable accuracy 3.00 g Pass/fail result of the
Meas. Accuracy 0.2364 g accuracy check
Product measurement count Count 10
Weight of master product Master 46.44 g
Mean value X-bar 46.3200 g
Standard deviation S 0.0388 g
Range R 0.12 g
Maximum value Max 46.38 g
Minimum value Min 46.26 g

2 Advanced Operations
1 46.30 g
2 46.38 g
3 46.34 g
4 46.32 g
Measured data of 5 46.36 g
products for the number of
6 46.34 g
times of measurement
7 46.26 g
8 46.32 g
9 46.32 g
10 46.26 g
=======================

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

199
Options and Peripheral Devices
Check Mode Print

Product
1 Basic Operations

Product No.
Time when shifting to the
P001 Check Mode check mode screen.
Start 2013-08-12 11:05:51
[OK ] 1234.56 g
Evaluation result
Fe ( 4.86/ 5.0 ) Indicates the effect value
SUS ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) measured by the metal
Individual data [MDNG ] 1234.56 g detector. The printed
contents depend on the
Indicates the evaluation Fe ( 5.17/ 5.0 ) evaluation mode selected.
reference value and result SUS ( 2.08/ 5.0)
for each evaluation. The numeric value on the
[MDNG ] 1234.56 g right of the slash (/) is the
2 Advanced Operations

Fe (11.25/ 5.0 ) metal evaluation limit.


SUS ( 9.95/ 5.0 )
End 2013-08-12 11:07:25
Time when exiting the check
mode screen.

Product
Product No.
Time when shifting to the check
No.001 Check Mode mode screen.
3 Installation and Connection

Start 2013-08-12 11:05:51


[OK ]
Evaluation result
ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0 ) Check metal contamination
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML1: Evaluation value
ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) for ML1 side
ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML2: Evaluation value
[MDNG ]
Individual data for ML2 side
ML1 (11.86/ 5.0 )
Indicates the evaluation ML3: Evaluation value
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 )
reference value and result for ML3 side
for each evaluation. ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 )
ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML4: Evaluation value
[MDNG ] for ML4 side
ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0 ) Check missing product
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML1: Evaluation value
ML3 (22.87/ 5.0 ) for ML1 side
4 Maintenance

ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 )


End 2013-08-12 11:07:25
Time when exiting the check
mode screen.
5 Appendix

200
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Using Smart Measurement Function (SMF)
■ SMF (optional)
If the intervals between fed products are small as in a high-speed line, a product may be

1 Basic Operations
put on the weigh conveyor before the previous measurement is completed. In this case, a
conventional checkweigher cannot measure the weight of each product correctly, so both
products are rejected as products unable to be measured.
This function improves the yield by automatically adjusting measurement conditions so
that the weight of each product can be measured when two products are put on the weigh
conveyor.

When two products are put on the weigh conveyor, the weight of each product can be

2 Advanced Operations
measured by automatically shortening the measurement time set previously. Decreasing
the limit range of the upper and lower limits according to the shortened time can prevent
+NG and -NG products from being evaluated as PASS products.

■ Using SMF

This function will not be displayed if it is not installed.

3 Installation and Connection


1 Perform settings to use SMF as a device.
In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and Setting"  "Functions"  "SMF”. Press
"Input" and set "SMF" to "Yes”.

2 Set SMF for each product using SMF.


In the "Menu" screen, select "Adjust registered products"  "Product settings" 
"SMF"  "SMF settings" screen. Set "SMF" to "Yes”.

3 In SMF allowance, enter the accuracy


4 Maintenance

allowance affected by the use of this


function.

Example:"0.5" if the measurement


accuracy is 0.5g (3)

Note that the original specification accuracy


cannot be obtained for the measured product SMF allowance Input screen
when this function is used.
5 Appendix

201
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ SMF Info screen
This screen displays the improvements in productivity caused by SMF.
The displayed improvement of the yield is based on a comparison with the values when
this function is not used.
1 Basic Operations

In the "Menu" screen, select "Stats Control"  "SMF info screen" to display this screen.

Total Total number of products inspected


Invld. D-Prod. Double products that could have occurred if SMF is disabled.
Valid D-Prod. Double products that occurred even if SMF is enabled.
Displays the improvement effect of use of SMF in count.
Save yield The weight value displayed at the right side of the screen is total
weight of products not rejected because of the improvement effect.
2 Advanced Operations

Percentage of double products reduced compared to the value when


Dbl. Cnt reduction
SMF is not used.

">>" in the left side of the screen


indicates that the SMF function is
enabled.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

202
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Setting Rejector
This is to make detailed settings for the rejector.

1 Basic Operations
Common set of RJ
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Rejector  Common set
of RJ)

Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
39 m/min
RJ Conveyor Speed Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
(5 to 120)

2 Advanced Operations
RJ Conveyor Speed 39 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High) (5 to 120)
RJ Conveyor Speed 39 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.
(Low) (5 to 120)
RJ belt speed detail 39.0 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High) (5 to 120.0)
RJ belt speed detail 39.0 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.
(Low) (5 to 120.0)
This function detects product intervals resulting in

3 Installation and Connection


unstable rejection (detection distance: between the
back end of one product and the front end of the
following one) as RJ overcapacity and surely
No discharges the faulty products in the higher-priority
RJ Capacity
Yes NG direction to avoid unstable rejection. If this
Exceeded
* Read only function is used, the displayed NG count may not
match the number of faulty products discharged into
the NG box, because secure discharge is preferred.
It can be used when connected to the flipper or
dropout rejector.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

203
Options and Peripheral Devices
RJ Direction Settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Rejector  RJ Direction
Settings)
1 Basic Operations

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Automatically set by RJ model.
This sets the gate standby position during operation
to PASS or NG.
* This function is enabled when the RJ output type
OK is "Pulse" and it is ignored when the RJ output
No Prod. Dir. type is "Hold”.
NG
2 Advanced Operations

OK Set gate to RJ3 direction after T4 termination.


Set gate to RJ1 or RJ5 direction after T4
NG termination depending on gate standby
position parameter.
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
-NG Sets -NG rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
OK Sets OK rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
3 Installation and Connection

+NG Sets +NG rejection direction.


RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets MDNG rejection direction.
MDNG
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 (when metal detector is installed)
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
EXNG Sets EXNG rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
EXNG2 Sets EXNG2 rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets the rejection direction for an alarm (A015, A031,
ALARM
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 A051 to A055, and A504).
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets Dbl. Prod and Length error (A039 Product
4 Maintenance

D-Prod.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 Length Exceeded) rejection direction.
Rejects the products forcibly in the specified
direction under the following conditions.
▪ Before the start of rejection of correctly evaluated
products since the machine starts running
RJ1,
▪ During auto-setting
Forced RJ2, RJ3,
▪ During HIS settings
RJ4, RJ5
▪ During the auto-limit (from the stop of running to
the start of rejection
5 Appendix

▪ During FOCUS settings


▪ After switching the product during running

204
Options and Peripheral Devices

▪ The initial setting of the rejection direction varies depending on the connected rejector.
▪ When the rejection direction is set to Stop, the product may flow on the conveyor to the
downstream without stopping.

1 Basic Operations
▪ D-Prod is the status in which the next product is placed on the weighing conveyor while the
weight of the previous product is being measured during rejection by weight.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

205
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Rejection direction

3-way classification (STD) (Top view)


RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5
1 Basic Operations

RJ1
RJ3 RJ3
Flow RJ1 RJ5 Flow
5-way classification (option) (Top view)
RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5 RJ1
RJ4 RJ2
RJ3 RJ3
2 Advanced Operations

Flow RJ2 RJ4 Flow


RJ1 RJ5

2-way classification (STD)


Dropout (side view)
RJ direction
RJ3
3 Installation and Connection

Flow
RJ1
Air jet (top view)
RJ direction
RJ3
Flow

RJ1 Rejection direction

Set directions for each of the following: –NG, OK, +NG, ALARM, MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2,
DBL P.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

206
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ RJ test mode
The operations of the rejector can be checked.

▪ In this mode, evaluation and rejection are not performed when a normal product is fed through.

1 Basic Operations
▪ Be sure to stop the operation before using this feature.

1 Tap the [Start] button on the RJ direction


settings screen.

2 Advanced Operations
2 Select the "Above content acknowledged"
check box and then tap [Operate].

3 Installation and Connection


3 The operation starts in RJ test mode.

4 Maintenance

4 Tap a button for the rejector whose


operation is to be checked, such as
[RJ1].

The rejector operates one second after


the button is tapped.
5 Appendix

207
Options and Peripheral Devices
5 Tap the [Stop] button to exit RJ test
mode.
1 Basic Operations

■ Evaluation Priority
When several NG statuses occur simultaneously, the priority rank is as follows:
優先順位
Rank
2 Advanced Operations

優先度が高い
Priority High 1 At アラーム判定(異常発生時)
error occurrence (ALARM)
2 金属 NG 判定
2 MDNG
3 外部 NG2
3 External 判定
NG2 (EXNG2)
4 外部 NG
4 External 判定
NG (EXNG)
5 2 個乗り判定
5 Double product (DBL P.)
6 アラーム判定(アラーム発生時)
6 Alarm evaluation (at alarm)
7 質量判定(軽量・過量)
7 Weight evaluation (-NG, +NG)
優先度が低い
Priority Low 8
8 Pass product in EXNGNG
良品振分用外部 判定SPS)
(EXNG:
9 質量判定(正量)
9 Weight evaluation (PASS)
3 Installation and Connection

Rejection direction at alarm


At "A001 Dbl. Product”, a product is rejected to the DBL P. direction.
At "A039 Product Length Exceeded”, a product is rejected to the DBL P. direction.
When the Dbl. Product direction and ALARM direction occurred at the same time, the Dbl.
Product direction has priority.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

208
Other Useful Functions
Other Useful Functions

> Using Smart Guide


Follow the instructions shown on the Smart Guide screen to prevent incorrect operation or
omission of steps.

1 Basic Operations
For equipment with the standard specifications, Smart Guide is set by default. To enable
Smart Guide after disabling it, follow the instructions below.

1 Select "Menu" screen  "Maint. and


Setting"  "Functions"  "Smart guide
settings", and tap [Input], and press [OK].

2 Advanced Operations
2 Select "Standard", and press [OK].

After the setting is changed from "No" to "Standard" as shown above, press the [Home]
button to display the Smart Guide initial screen. Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify the settings.

3 Installation and Connection


■ Selecting the manufacture date and manufacture unit
Select the manufacture date and manufacture unit by using the Smart Guide. By selecting
the manufacture date and manufacture unit, production can be performed based on date,
time, and user. Production information can also be checked in the form of a daily report
output according to the manufacture date and manufacture unit.
Tap [Select Manufacture Date] on the "Phase 1" screen of the Smart Guide and select the
manufacture date and manufacture unit on the following screen.
■ Select [No Manufacture Unit] if you do

not want to set a production unit. 4 Maintenance

■ Select [Test] if you want to perform a


confirmation check before starting
production.
5 Appendix

209
Other Useful Functions
■ Displaying a daily report
Information about production performed by using the Smart Guide can be displayed on
the Smart Guide in the form of a daily report.
The screen can be switched to the daily report screen by tapping the [Display Daily
1 Basic Operations

Report] button at the bottom of the screen.


The daily report displays information about the production of the manufacture unit
selected on the "Phase 1" screen of the Smart Guide, performed on the manufacture date
selected on the initial screen of the Smart Guide.
The screen on the right is an example of a daily report that displays information about the
production of manufacture unit 3 that was performed on April 24.
■ Even if [No Manufacture Unit] or [Test]
2 Advanced Operations

has been selected, the information is


handled in the same was as if
manufacture units 1 to 3 were selected
and is displayed in the daily report as the
information of a single manufacture unit.
■ [Start Time] is the time at which the
pre-production operation check using the
test piece (both Fe and SUS) is first
3 Installation and Connection

completed successfully.
■ If production was not performed even
after the product type was changed, that
product type is not recorded in the daily
report.
(Example) No. 5 on the screen on the right

The meanings of the symbols in the pre-production/post production operation check


results displayed in the daily report are as follows:
4 Maintenance

Symbols Description
O Operation check successful
X Operation check failed
Blank Not implemented
- Canceled (stopped)
* Forcibly terminated
5 Appendix

210
Other Useful Functions
■ Selecting the daily report to display
The daily report to display on the daily report screen can be selected by tapping the
[Select Daily Report] button at the bottom of the daily report screen.
Changing the daily report to display on the

1 Basic Operations
daily report selection screen does not change
the manufacture date or manufacture unit
selected on the "Phase 1" screen of the
Smart Guide.
The latest 200 daily reports can be displayed.

■ Saving daily report data

2 Advanced Operations
The data of the daily report showing the information of the selected manufacture date and
manufacture unit can be saved to a USB flash drive by tapping the [Save to USB] button
on the bottom of the daily report screen. The daily report data is recorded in a file called
"HDR_△△.csv" in the HIST folder.
Data is recorded to the USB flash drive in CSV format in the following order, with each
item delimited by a comma.
Item Remarks
ID Code History Type [4]

3 Installation and Connection


No. Serial number of daily report data for production of the specified
manufacture unit performed on the specified manufacture date
Product Product No.
Product Name Product name
Manufacture Date Specified manufacture date YYYY/MM/DD
Manufacture Unit Specified manufacture unit
No manufacture unit :-
Manufacture unit 1 to 3 : 1 to 3
Test :0 4 Maintenance

Start Time Time at which pre-production operation check first completed


successfully YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
End Time Time at which post-production operation check first completed
successfully YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM (0/00/00 00:00 in the case of a
forcible termination)
Pre-production Results of three most recent pre-production operation checks
Operation Check Not implemented :0
Results Canceled (stopped) :1
Operation check successful :2
5 Appendix

Operation check failed :3


Production forcibly terminated :4
Work forcibly terminated :5

211
Other Useful Functions
Item Remarks
Pre-production The name of the user who performed the pre-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
1 Basic Operations

Post-production Results of three most recent post-production operation checks


Operation Check The numbers have the same meaning as the pre-production operation
Results check results.
Post-production The name of the user who performed the post-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
Prod Count Conveyed item count
OK OK product count
2 Advanced Operations

MDNG Metal NG count


D-Prod. Double product count

■ Terminating a process forcibly


The operation according to the smart guide can be stopped and go back to the operation
at the beginning.
3 Installation and Connection

1 Select [Others] → [Terminate process].

2 Press [Yes] shown on the right screen to


display the initial screen.
4 Maintenance

Press the [Start] button to move to “1.


Start process”, in which products can
newly be produced.
5 Appendix

212
Other Useful Functions

▪ The forcible termination can be performed by the authorized users assigned in the “Set Access
Authority” setting.
▪ The forcible termination can be performed any time during smart guide operation. However,

1 Basic Operations
when the conveyor is running, the display screen does not change and only the message is
displayed to indicate that the forcible termination is executed once the conveyor stops.
▪ Statistics from the start of work to forcible termination are cleared once the screen is moved to
[1. Work before commencing operations] in the Smart Guide and the manufacture date and
manufacture unit are selected.

> Displaying Product List


When "Display product list" is pressed in the "Menu" screen, a list of the product names

2 Advanced Operations
and reference weight values of registered products are displayed.
▪ The following marks are displayed to indicate the setting status of each product.

Mark Description
The inspection can be performed.

The minimum settings required for the inspection are completed.
Not registered.

The inspection cannot be performed since the product registration is not completed.

3 Installation and Connection


The auto-setting is not performed.
?
The inspection cannot be performed since the auto-setting is not performed.
The mode is conveyor mode, in which products are transferred without being
inspected.
When “CW conveyor mode” is “Yes”, weight measurement is not performed.
! The metal detection is not performed when “Yes” is specified for “MD conveyor
mode”. When [CW Conveyor mode] is [Yes (Force Motor ON)], weight evaluation,
MDNG (metal NG) evaluation, and EXNG (external NG) evaluation are not
performed.

For the products with “” or “?” displayed, perform inspection after product registration.


4 Maintenance
P. 35 Registering a New Product

■ By switching between 1 and 2 in [Display], the number of items displayed on a screen


can be changed (5 or 8 products).
5 Appendix

5 products/screen 8 products/screen

213
Other Useful Functions
■ To change the product for production, select the product to change and press [Prod.
Chg.].

■ The "Show product list" is also displayed when the "Product" area is pressed in the
1 Basic Operations

"General" screen.

> Copying and Deleting Registered Product


■ Copying a registered product to another product number
1 Select the product to copy from the product list screen.
2 Press the [Fn] button at the lower right of the screen, and select "Copy”.
2 Advanced Operations

3 Select the product number of the destination.


4 Press the [Fn] button at the lower right of
the screen and press "Paste".
3 Installation and Connection

■ Deleting from Product Table screen


1 Select the product to delete.
2 Press the [Fn] button and press "Delete”. When the "Confirm delete" screen is
displayed, press [Yes].

> Clearing Statistics


1 Select "Others"  "Clear Stats”.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

214
Other Useful Functions
2 When [Yes] is pressed, only the statistics
related to the currently selected product
are cleared.

1 Basic Operations
This example is in the "General" screen,
but the statistics data is cleared in other
screens such as "Histogram" and
"Enlarge bar" simultaneously.

To clear the statistics of all the recorded products, select "Clear all product Stats." and
press [Yes].

The statistics of all products cannot be cleared from the screen or IO during operation.

2 Advanced Operations
> Setting All Products
This feature is used when specifying parameters of all products at once.
This feature improves the parameter setting efficiency when there are a lot of registered
products.

1 Open the menu screen, and select “Fn”

3 Installation and Connection


 “All prod setting” on the bottom right of
the screen.

Select [Yes] when the confirmation dialog


box appears to start the all product
settings.

2 The “All prod setting” appears on the top


of the screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

215
Other Useful Functions
3 Open the screen that contains the
parameter to be set for all products, enter
the value to be changed, and then press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations

Example: CW Belt Speed

4 Press [//] (End) button on the top of the


screen.
2 Advanced Operations

Select [Yes] when the confirmation dialog


box appears to notify the completion of
all product setting.

The processing to apply the changed


parameter to all the products starts. This
processing takes a while. Do not turn the
power off until the processing completes.
3 Installation and Connection

5 The main screen is displayed when the


all product setting completes.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

216
Other Useful Functions
> Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu
The submenus displayed by pressing a button on the bottom of the “Home” screen can be
customized. This feature is used to reduce the items displayed on the submenu.

1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
The items on the submenu that can be customized

1 Select “Menu”, “Control Panel”, and then


“Home display settings”, and then select
the screen or menu to be customized.

3 Installation and Connection


Example: When customizing
“Home screen disp. sel.”

2 Select the item to be hidden, press [Delete] and then [Yes].

4 Maintenance

Example: When hiding “Statis”

The field that “Statis” was displayed


becomes “-” and “Statis” disappears from
the submenu in the “Home” screen.
5 Appendix

217
Other Useful Functions
■ Showing the hidden items
To show the hidden submenu items, select
the blank field and then press [Enter]. When
the menu selection screen is displayed,
1 Basic Operations

select items to be shown, and then press


[OK].

Example: When showing “Clear Stats.”


hidden from the “Pro Cntl” submenu

Only for the “Home” screen, the screen


2 Advanced Operations

image is displayed when selecting [Enter].


The screen image can be switched using
the [<] and [>] buttons.

When pressing [Back] while the target


screen image is displayed, the image is
displayed in the “Home” screen.
Example: When displaying “Statis”
3 Installation and Connection

“Smart guide” in the “Home” screen cannot be customized.


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

218
Other Useful Functions
> Using Conveyor Mode
If you do not perform weight measurement by product, set “CW Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.
If you do not perform metal detection by product, set “MD Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.

1 Basic Operations
When the conveyor mode is set to [Yes], the status of the equipment is as follows:
In CW conveyor mode (only the metal detector is used):
■ The Start button blinks during operation.

■ "-" will be shown in all the weight display and "OK" (green) will be shown in evaluation.
Product counting and weight data capture will not be performed.
■ For serial measured output and individual print, "0 g" will be output.
■ Products on the conveyor are not counted.

2 Advanced Operations
■ "CW Dbl. Product" will be ignored.
■ Auto calculation of measurement timing for weight measurement will not be performed.
Timing to capture EXNG and MDNG will automatically be set.
■ Enable “Yes (Forced motor ON)” setting when the sorting capability (processing
capability per minute) is high.

3 Installation and Connection


In MD conveyor mode (only the weighing function is used):
■ The metal detecting level bar does not light up.

■ Products are not counted during the conveyor mode.

Setting the conveyor mode


1 From the “Menu” screen, select “Adjust
registered products”  “Product settings”
 “Conveyor mode”.

2 Select either one of the two and then


4 Maintenance

press [Input].

3 Select “Yes” and press [OK].


The conveyor operates when the Start
button is pressed, and it stops when the
Stop button is pressed.

To change conveyor speed, refer to the following;

 P. 164 Setting Conveyor Speed


5 Appendix

219
Other Useful Functions

■ Do not feed a product that has a weight exceeding the upper limit of the weighing range if you
set the CW conveyor mode. The weighing unit might be broken due to overload.
■ The conveyor belt speed does not change when the conveyor mode is changed from Yes to
1 Basic Operations

No.
■ In the MD conveyor mode, be careful that products are fed through downstream without
checking metal contamination and missing products.
■ When the conveyor mode is set to [Yes (Force Motor ON)], serial measured value output and
individual printing are not performed. Counting and RJ of MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, MD Prod.
Length Alarm, and MD Dbl.Prod are also not performed.

> Viewing History


2 Advanced Operations

When "History" is pressed in the "Menu" screen, past equipment state and production
state are displayed.
Up to 1000 past events can be recorded, such as occurrences of NG products and
operation histories.

Select the target item and press [Set].


3 Installation and Connection

Viewing operation history

■ Alarm occurrence status


The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed. Select an error
or alarm and tap [Date/Time] to narrow down the list based on the event that caused the
4 Maintenance

selected error or alarm and display the operation history. The list of occurrence dates can
also be checked.
The number displayed on this screen is the result of counting the events in the operating
history.
Please note that this number might differ from the number recorded in the alarm history.
5 Appendix

220
Other Useful Functions
■ Ope. history
The operation history is displayed chronologically. The events shown in the operation
history include power-on, access level change, alarm occurrence and clearance, product
change, and other items. Select one of the events and tap [Info] to display a narrowed

1 Basic Operations
down history.
Tap [Expanded] to cancel the narrowed-down display.

■ Param. History
The target product No., parameter type, and details of change appear chronologically
every time a parameter is changed.

2 Advanced Operations
■ NG history
NG histories are displayed in chronological order with the product name and description
of NG. Among NG products, only MDNG and EXNG products are displayed.
+NG and –NG products are not covered.To save data to the USB memory, press [Save].

■ Alarm History
Histories of error and alarm occurrences are displayed in chronological order. “No.” shows

3 Installation and Connection


the target product number, and “Details” shows the error code and error details. Tap the
[Info] button to show details of any errors. Note that some errors or alarms are not
recorded on this screen, such as a double product.

4 Maintenance

An example of "History details"


for Alarm History

■ Operation Check History


Implementation status of Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ Check are displayed in
chronological order.
5 Appendix

221
Other Useful Functions
■ Saving history
To save data, press [Save], select the data
(Operation History / Parameter History / NG
History / Operation Check History/ Alarm
1 Basic Operations

History), products (all or one product) to


save, and output range (all data or past 24
hours), and press "Save”.
Saving operation check history to USB

■ Number of history items that can be saved


Up to 1000 history items can be displayed for all cases. If this is exceeded, the oldest
history items will be deleted first.
2 Advanced Operations

■ Clearing history
For "NG History" and "Operation Check History”, all data can be cleared by pressing the
[Fn] button on the button right of the screen.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

222
Other Useful Functions
> Setting Access Level By Function
Unexpected parameter changes can be prevented by setting an access level for each
function.

1 Basic Operations
1 In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and
Setting"  "Security and rules"  "Set
Access Authority" to open the following
screen.

2 The available access levels for functions

2 Advanced Operations
are displayed.
Select the function to set and press
[Input] to display the setting screen.

3 Select the access rights to the lowest


level. Press [OK] to complete setting.

3 Installation and Connection


The description above is an example of settings for "Product Registration".
When "1b" is set, operators of Level 1b and Level 2 will be allowed to access.

The table below shows the operational limitations that can be specified for each item.
Item Description
4 Maintenance

Operate/Stop Limits the operation to operate/stop the equipment.


Chg Prod Limits the operation to change the product.
Detect-lvl Chg. Limits the operation to change the detection limit parameters.
Limits the operation for performance check.
Ope. Check
Target: Eva/RJ confirmation
Limits the operations to register the products and to change
Prod Reg.
parameters of the products.
Clear Statistics Limits the operation to clear the statistics.
5 Appendix

Limits the operation to change the parameters related to basic


Maintenance
operations of the equipment.
NG stop authority Limits the operation to release the NG stop state.

223
Other Useful Functions
Item Description
Forcible Limits the operation to stop the operation according to the smart
termination guide halfway through.
Limits the operation for lot number change.
1 Basic Operations

It is enabled only on the following screens.


Lot No. Change • "Parameter adjustment screen" that can be selected from the
General screen
• Statis screen
Limits the operation for tare weight change.
Tare weight It is enabled only on the following screens.
Change • "Parameter adjustment screen" that can be selected from the
General screen
2 Advanced Operations

Fine Adjustment Execution authority for Fine Adjustment


Timing Adjust Execution authority for Timing Adjustment

> Using Check Mode


By using Check Mode, weight measurement or metal contamination/missing detection
can be done separately from nomal operation. This is used to check the accuracy of
3 Installation and Connection

weighcell or recheck NG products.


・ Can be used whenever needed, irrespective of steps set by Smart Guide.
・ The confirmed results are not included in the statistics or history.
・ The rejection directions are same as set for normal operation.

1 Select “Others” → “Check Mode”.


The check mode can be selected by
configuring the following settings.

The check modes can be displayed by


4 Maintenance

selecting [Menu] → [Control Panel] →


[Home display settings] → [Others], and
then adding Check Mode.

2 Press [Start] button and feed the product.


Tap [Back] to return to the operation
screen.
5 Appendix

224
Other Useful Functions
> Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting Method

Use this when measuring a product to which auto settings have been applied (the

1 Basic Operations
properties are already known) or when changing a sensitivity mode determined by the full
automatic method.

■ Differences with the Full-auto method (recommended)


The Full-auto (recommended) method actually measures the master product and
automatically evaluates the product properties based on the measurement results. The
auto setting method described in this section skips the measurement of the master

2 Advanced Operations
product for evaluating properties by specifying the product properties in advance.
Merits: The number of times the master product needs to be fed to the
checkweigher is decreased.
Demerits: The acquired sensitivity may not be optimal if an appropriate property is
not specified. Difference in devices and installation environments may
not be considered.

■ How to change the auto setting method

3 Installation and Connection


1 Select “Make auto setting newly” on the
Selection of new or readjust screen and
press [Next].

See the following for starting auto setting.

 P. 35 Registering a New Product,


 P. 99 Auto Settings (Readjusting
registered products)

4 Maintenance

2 Select “Specifies sens mode.” (for metal


contamination check, missing product
check) or “Specify product property.” on
the Auto-set Method screen.

Select “Specifies sens mode.” on


the Auto-set Method screen.
5 Appendix

225
Other Useful Functions
■ Specify Sens. Mode
A sensitivity mode can be automatically set by selecting “Specify Sens. Mode”.
Use this only when you have automatically set the same product with another product
number or another device that is the same model, and you know the sensitivity mode.
1 Basic Operations

1 Select “Specify Sens. Mode.” on the


Auto-setting method selection screen
and press [Next].
2 Advanced Operations

2 Select a sensitivity mode to be specified


on the Select Sens Mode (Fe-SUS)
screen.

▼ Metal contamination check

There are 10 options. The initial setting is


3 Installation and Connection

[A-A] for unregistered products.

▼ Missing product check

There are 3 options. The initial setting is


[B-B] for unregistered products.
4 Maintenance

For unregistered products, select the same setting as that of the sensitivity mode
determined by the other product number or other device that is the same model.
For registered products, the current setting is already selected.
5 Appendix

226
Other Useful Functions
3 Perform auto setting.
 P. 44 Registering a New Product - step 18

1 Basic Operations
▼ Metal contamination check

Master products are fed 5 times when


“Specify Sens. Mode” is selected (15
times for full automatic mode).

When auto setting finishes, the determined


sensitivity mode and the estimated

2 Advanced Operations
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press
[Completed] to apply the new settings.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply
the results of the auto setting.

The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after
performing the auto settings.

3 Installation and Connection


▼ Missing product check

Master products are fed 4 times and


missing products (NG samples) are fed
once when the sensitivity mode is
specified. (The master product is fed 8
times and missing product is fed 2 times
in the full automatic mode.)
4 Maintenance

When auto setting finishes, the determined sensitivity mode and the estimated
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press [Completed] to apply the new settings. Press
[Cancel] if you do not want to apply the results of auto setting.

The selection criteria for the sensitivity mode are complex, and specialized knowledge is
required for determining the sensitivity mode of products to which auto setting has not been
performed and changing the sensitivity mode determined by auto setting. Perform the normal
auto setting in [Full-auto (recommended)].
5 Appendix

Contact an Anritsu or its distributor for service if you need to manually specify the sensitivity
mode to adjust the detection sensitivity, and do not perform the specification by yourself.

227
Other Useful Functions
■ Specify prod. Type
The product properties can be automatically set by selecting [Specify prod. Type] if the
product properties are those shown in the following table.
However, this method cannot be used to check missing products.
1 Basic Operations

Property Example products


Dry Rice crackers, rice, flour, frozen foods, etc.
Wet Meat, cheese, sausage, salted fish products, etc.
Aluminum-evaporated Potato chips, products wrapped by metalized film

1 Select “Specify product property.” on the


2 Advanced Operations

Auto-setting method selection screen


and press [Next].
3 Installation and Connection

2 Select a property corresponding to the


product on the Select P-Effect screen.

Select either “Dry”, “Wet”, or “Al Evap.”


using the above table or the on-screen
guidance as a reference.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

228
Other Useful Functions
3 Perform auto setting.
 P. 44 Registering a New Product - step 18

1 Basic Operations
Master products are fed 5 times when the
“Specify product property.” is selected
(15 times for full automatic mode)

The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after
performing the auto settings.

2 Advanced Operations
When auto setting finishes, the
determined sensitivity mode and the
estimated detecting sensitivity are
displayed. Press [Completed] to apply
the new settings. Press [Cancel] if you do
not want to apply the results of the auto

3 Installation and Connection


setting.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

229
Other Useful Functions
> Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (product check function)

The product check function corrects the phase of the metal detector immediately before
starting operation. This function is used only if the type of product is wet.
1 Basic Operations

If the phase of the metal detector deviates from the optimum setting value due to a reason
such as changes in the product or device temperature, the metal detection signal
fluctuates greatly and may lead to metal NG evaluation even if the product contains no
metal contamination. Use this function to suppress a false detection due to phase
dispersion by feeding the master product at the start of operation to correct the phase of
the metal detector.
2 Advanced Operations

▪ As a missing product check is not affected by temperature changes, the product check
function is not required.
▪ As dry products ( P. 228) are not prone to phase shifting, the product check function is not
required.
▪ The number of master products fed through during a product check is excluded from the
statistics.

■ Initial setting of a product check


1 From the Menu screen, select “Maint.
3 Installation and Connection

and Setting”  “Functions”  “Product


check setting” to open the Product check
setting screen.

2 Select “Yes” for “Product Check Function”.

3 From the Menu screen, select “Adjust


registered products.”  “Product settings”
4 Maintenance

 “Product check setting” to open the


Product check setting screen.

4 Set each parameter.


See the following for details on setting
the required parameters.

 P. 66 Product check
5 Appendix

230
Other Useful Functions
■ How to use a product check
1 If a product matches the product check
conditions, press the [Start] button to
display the data collection screen shown

1 Basic Operations
to the right.

2 Feed master products the required


number of times. The screen then shows
the weight of the master product.

3 When you have corrected the phase, the

2 Advanced Operations
message “Completed normally” is
displayed. Press the [Start] button to start
production.

Confirm the following items if the message


“Not right product. Retry product check after
confirm the products.” appears.

3 Installation and Connection


▪ The product differs from the master
product.
 Set the correct product number.
( P. 35)
▪ The phase dispersion has exceeded the
correctable amount.
 Try auto setting again. ( P. 99)
▪ The product check has been performed on
dry products.
 Set the “Default Phase Correction” of
this product to [No] to avoid checking
this product.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

231
Other Useful Functions

If "Bulk" is specified and the processing does not advance from the Data collection screen even
after a product is fed through several times, specify a smaller value for the settings below. The
effective value of a product that is fed through for a product check might be smaller than the value
1 Basic Operations

specified by auto-setting.
▪ Prod. Detection level (Fe), Prod. Detection level (SUS)
▪ Prod. Detection level (ML1), Prod. Detection level (ML2), Prod. Detection level
(ML3), Prod. Detection level (ML4)
 P. 66 Product check
* The default value is 0.8. Do not specify a smaller value. Adjust the setting value so that
detection is performed only when a product is fed through.
If the problem is not resolved even after performing the adjustment described above, perform
2 Advanced Operations

auto-setting using the procedure below and then perform a product check again.
(1) Select "Menu", "Adjust registered products", and "Auto-set" to open the Auto-set screen.
(2) Select "Make auto setting by using current settings" to perform auto-setting.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

232
Other Useful Functions
> Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity
The evaluation reference value for the metal contamination (or missing products) check
are automatically determined by the auto setting function.

1 Basic Operations
Metal contamination check: Evaluation limit magnification 5.0 (MDNG resulted if the effect
value is more than 5 times that of the master product)
Missing product check: Evaluation limit magnification 0.7 (missing product NG resulted if
the effect value is 70% or less than that of the master product)
You can use these settings under normal conditions. For further stability or sensitivity,
change the metal detection sensitivity by using the following procedure.

After you have changed the metal detection sensitivity, be sure to check the detection

2 Advanced Operations
performance of the control sensitivity reference test piece (or the reference contaminants).

■ How to call the Sensitivity Adjustment screen


Touch the metal detection level bar on the Basic display or press [Set/Adj] button and
select [MD sensitivity adjustment].

You can restrict the access level. The access level is set to 1b or higher at factory shipment.
 P. 223 Setting Access Level By Function

3 Installation and Connection


The screen on the right appears.

4 Maintenance
By tapping the [Display] button, the screens to adjust the detection sensitivity can be
switched.
1: Sensitivity Adjustment screen
2: Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen
3: Product effect monitor screen
4: Noise monitor screen

There are two sensitivity adjustment screens: the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and the
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen.
5 Appendix

233
Other Useful Functions
■ Sensitivity Adjustment screen (for a metal contamination check)
You can adjust the detection limit by checking the metal effect value on the bar graph. At
the same time, you can check the estimated detection sensitivity after changing the
setting.
1 Basic Operations

< button > button


Press to decrease the detection Press to increase the detection Evaluation limit magnification
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit Press here to enter a numeric
magnification increases). magnification decreases). value directly.

Upper:
2 Advanced Operations

Fe detection sensitivity*

Sens mode
Shows the determined
mode by Auto-set.

Lower:
SUS detection sensitivity* Effect value display bar
Shows the effect value
Blue line in real-time.
3 Installation and Connection

[H]: Displayed for products for


Indicates the relative effect
which the sensitivity
value of the master product Inverted triangle ()
improved after setting HIS. saved by auto-set, as the
Indicates the relative
Displays algorithm 1, 2 for < and > buttons are pressed.
position of the evaluation
the adjacent number. limit.
Estimated detection sensitivity
[T]: Displayed for products for
(displayed automatically)
which autotracking is used.
[P]: Displayed for products for
which the product check
function is used.
4 Maintenance

* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
5 Appendix

234
Other Useful Functions

[F]: Displayed for products that set the FOCUS


setting

1 Basic Operations
[T]: Displayed for products for which Effect value indicator
autotracking is used. Indicates the
[P]: Displayed for products for which the real-time effect Estimat detection
product check function is used. values. sensitivity

Sensitivity mode
(Displays the
predetermined
Inverted triangle
auto-setting values.)
(▽)

2 Advanced Operations
ML1 detection sensitivity Indicates the

ML2 detection sensitivity relative evaluation

ML3 detection sensitivity limit position.

ML4 detection sensitivity

< button > button Evaluation limit magnification


Decreases the detection sensitivity Increases the detection sensitivity value
(the evaluation limit magnification (the evaluation limit magnification Tap this to directly input values.
value increases). value decreases).

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

235
Other Useful Functions
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a metal contamination check)
▪ To decrease the detection sensitivity
Increase the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant exceeds the evaluation limit due to a wide variety of effect of the product
1 Basic Operations

or changes in the components of the product.


▪ To increase the detection sensitivity
Decrease the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant has a sufficient margin for the evaluation limit due to a small variety of
effect of the product or changes in the components of the product.
Example: Product effect value (reference) for stably use
Decrease the evaluation limit magnification so that the average of the product
2 Advanced Operations

effect value will be a third of the evaluation limit and may not exceed a half of
the maximum evaluation limit.

1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.

2 If the deflection is within 2 scales, go to step 3.


If the deflection is 3 scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
3 Installation and Connection

magnification and repeat steps 1 and 2 until the deflection falls within 2 scales.

: The evaluation limit magnification of Fe or SUS

: The evaluation limit magnification of ML1, ML2, ML3 or ML4

Increasing the deflection of the detection sensitivity display increases the detection sensitivity.
However, this increases the possibility of false detection due to the shape of the product and the
differences in components.

3 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to the master product, feed it through several
4 Maintenance

times, and adjust the evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections.

4 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to different positions on the product and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections for any position.

5 Feed master products several times and make sure that NG is not detected. If the
master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.

If a false detection occurs when you feed only the master product, Fe and SUS test pieces as
5 Appendix

well as contaminants such as rust cannot be detected.

236
Other Useful Functions
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a missing product check)
Although the setting screen differs, the procedure to adjust the detection sensitivity of a
missing product check is the same as that of an adjustment for a metal contamination
check. See the following figure for the main differences.

1 Basic Operations
< button > button
Press to increase the detection Press to decrease the detection
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit
magnification increases). magnification decreases).

2 Advanced Operations
Common bar graph
to adjust (Fe/SUS)

Stabilization index R
(fixed value)

3 Installation and Connection


Stabilization index R
(fixed value)
Sens mode
Shows the
determined mode by
Auto-set.

Common bar graph


to adjust (ML1)
4 Maintenance

< button > button


Press to increase the detection Press to decrease the detection
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit
magnification increases). magnification decreases).
5 Appendix

237
Other Useful Functions
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.

2 If the deflection is 3 red scales or more (right side of ), go to step 3.


1 Basic Operations

If the deflection is within 2 red scales, decrease the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and repeat it until the deflection reaches 3 red scales or more.

3 Feed a missing product (NG sample) several times.


If the deflection is 3 green scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and adjust the deflection so that it will be within 2 green scales.

4 Change the orientation to feed the missing product (NG sample) and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections at any orientation.
2 Advanced Operations

If there is a problem with NG detection at a certain orientation, feed a missing product


(NG sample) at that orientation and adjust the evaluation limit magnification again
according to step 3.

5 Feed the master product several times and make sure that NG is not detected.
If the master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.
3 Installation and Connection

If a false detection occurs when you feed the master product only, a missing product check
cannot be performed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

238
Other Useful Functions
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a metal contamination check)

Latest/Latest 10 tab Estimated detection


sensitivity (displayed ˄ button

1 Basic Operations
Latest: Displays the latest item only.
Latest 10: Displays latest 10 items. automatically) Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the detection
Left: Right: sensitivity decreases).
Fe detection sensitivity* SUS detection sensitivity*
Evaluation limit
magnification value
Tap this to directly input
Indicates the values.
relative

2 Advanced Operations
evaluation limit ˅ button
position. Lowers the evaluation limit
If this line is magnification value (the
exceeded, the detection sensitivity
product is increases).
evaluated as NG.

Packaged type products:

The screen is switched Indicates the effect value of the last-inspected product.
Bulk type products:

3 Installation and Connection


by tapping the
Latest/Latest 10 tab. The maximum value every 10 seconds is indicated by the white part, and
the changing value updated in real time is indicated by the green part.

Restore the evaluation


limit magnification value to
its former value that was
changed by this display.
4 Maintenance

Performs auto-setting.
Packaged type products:
Indicates the effect values of the latest 10 products.
Bulk type products:
The maximum values of the previous 9 products every 10 seconds
and the maximum value of the latest product every 10 seconds are
indicated by the white frame, and the changing values updated in
real time are indicated by the green part.
5 Appendix

* Ext (effect value display bar for metal contaminant other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext can be detected by the Fe or SUS circuit.

239
Other Useful Functions

ML1/ML2, ML3/ML4 tab


ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ML1
1 Basic Operations

and ML2.
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ML3
˄ button
and ML4.
Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the
Estimated detection detection sensitivity
sensitivity decreases).

Evaluation limit
2 Advanced Operations

Indicates the magnification value


relative Tap this to directly input
evaluation limit values.
position.
If this line is
˅ button
exceeded, the
Lowers the evaluation
product is
limit magnification value
evaluated as
(the detection sensitivity
NG.
increases).
3 Installation and Connection

Packaged type products: Performs auto-setting. Restore the evaluation limit


Indicates the effect values of the magnification value to its
latest 10 products. former value that was
changed by this display.
4 Maintenance

Bulk type products:


The maximum values of the previous 9 products every 10 seconds and the maximum value
of the latest product every 10 seconds are indicated by the white frame, and the changing
values updated in real time are indicated by the green part.
5 Appendix

240
Other Useful Functions
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a missing product check)

˄ button

1 Basic Operations
Latest/Latest 10 tab Stabilization index R Increases the evaluation limit
Latest: Displays the latest item only. (fixed value) magnification value (the detection
Latest 10: Displays latest 10 items. sensitivity increases).

Evaluation limit
Indicates the magnification value
relative Tap this to directly input
evaluation limit values.

2 Advanced Operations
position.
If the value falls ˅ button
below the line, Lowers the evaluation limit
the product is magnification value (the
evaluated as detection sensitivity
NG. decreases).

Indicates the effect value of the last-inspected product.

The screen is switched

3 Installation and Connection


by tapping the
Latest/Latest 10 tab.

Restore the evaluation limit


magnification value to its
former value that was
4 Maintenance

changed by this display.

Performs auto-setting.
Indicates the effect values of the latest 10 products.
5 Appendix

241
Other Useful Functions

˄ button
Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the detection Stabilization index R
1 Basic Operations

sensitivity increases). (fixed value)

Evaluation limit
magnification value
Tap this to directly input
Indicates the values.
relative
evaluation limit
position. ˅ button
If the value falls Lowers the evaluation
2 Advanced Operations

below the line, limit magnification value


the product is (the detection sensitivity
evaluated as decreases).
NG.

Performs auto-setting. Restore the evaluation limit


Indicates the effect values of the magnification value to its former
latest 10 products. value that was changed by this
display.
3 Installation and Connection

> Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the Product (Product effect monitor)

The value of effect from products and metal contaminants can be checked by viewing the
effect value history of the last 100 weighed products on the Product effect monitor screen.
The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.
However, the screen displays the value affected during measurement when metal 3 (for a
product that does not block the photocell) is selected.

■ How to call the Product effect monitor screen


4 Maintenance

Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 3 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 3 of “Display”.

* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.


5 Appendix

242
Other Useful Functions
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen
(for a metal contamination check)

1 Basic Operations
^ button
White horizontal line Increases the evaluation limit Evaluation limit magnification
Indicates the relative position of magnification (the detection sensitivity Press here to enter a numeric
the evaluation limit. decreases). value directly.

Upper: Fe detection sensitivity

2 Advanced Operations
Lower: SUS detection sensitivity

Effect value display


The effect values of up to the last 100 [Clear] button

3 Installation and Connection


products are chronologically displayed. The Clears the display of
latest value is on the rightmost. all effect values.
Green bars indicate no metal contamination,
and red bars indicate MDNG.
v button
Decreases the evaluation limit magnification (the
[Stop] button detection sensitivity increases).
Temporary stops updating of effect value history
display and fixes the display. Press this button
again to release stopping of the effect value display White vertical dotted line
update (the effect values of the products that have Indicates the point where the detection sensitivity
been fed while updating is stopped are displayed at (detection limit magnification) is changed
once).
4 Maintenance

* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
5 Appendix

243
Other Useful Functions

ML1/ML2, ML3/ML4 tab


ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity ^ button
Increases the evaluation limit
1 Basic Operations

for ML1 and ML2.


ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity Estimated detection magnification (the detection

for ML3 and ML4. sensitivity sensitivity decreases).

White horizontal
line
Indicates the
relative position Evaluation limit

of the evaluation magnification

limit. Press here to enter a


2 Advanced Operations

numeric value directly.

v button
Decreases the
White vertical dotted line evaluation limit
Indicates the point where the magnification (the
[Clear] button
detection sensitivity (detection detection sensitivity
Clears the display of
limit magnification) is changed. increases).
all effect values.
3 Installation and Connection

Effect value display [Stop] button


The effect values of up to the last 100 products Temporary stops updating of effect value history display
are chronologically displayed. The latest value and fixes the display. Press this button again to release
is on the rightmost. stopping of the effect value display update (the effect
Green bars indicate no metal contamination, values of the products that have been fed while
and red bars indicate MDNG. updating is stopped are displayed at once).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

244
Other Useful Functions
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen (for a missing product check)

^ button v button

1 Basic Operations
Increase the evaluation limit magnification (the Decrease the evaluation limit magnification (the
detection sensitivity increases). detection sensitivity decreases).

Common bar graph to


adjust (Fe/SUS)

2 Advanced Operations
Effect value display
Green bars indicated no missing products, and red
bars indicate missing product NG.

3 Installation and Connection


^ button
Stabilization index R
Increase the evaluation limit magnification
(fixed value)
(the detection sensitivity increases).

Common bar graph to


adjust (ML1)

4 Maintenance

Effect value display v button


Green bars indicated no missing products, Decrease the evaluation limit magnification
and red bars indicate missing product NG. (the detection sensitivity decreases).
5 Appendix

245
Other Useful Functions
> Checking the Effects such as External Noise (Noise monitor)
You can view metal detecting signals in real-time on the Noise monitor screen to check
whether disturbance noise is present and the value of effect from products and metal
1 Basic Operations

contaminants. The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.

■ Differences between the Noise monitor screen and the Product effect monitor
screen
The Noise monitor screen displays the effect value from the metal detected by the metal
detector head even when the system is paused or when products are not being fed. This
function is useful to monitor the noise level from the surrounding area, which might cause
a false detection, and check the value of effect from a product that does not block the
2 Advanced Operations

photocell.

■ How to call the Noise monitor screen


Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 4 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 4 of “Display”.
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

246
Other Useful Functions
■ Description of the Noise monitor screen

Although the figure below shows a screen for a metal contamination check, the screen
display for a missing product check is the same except that a common bar graph to adjust

1 Basic Operations
(Fe and SUS) is displayed.

White horizontal line Evaluation limit magnification and evaluation limit adjust buttons
Indicates the relative position of * Same function as that on the Product effect monitor screen
the evaluation limit. ( P. 243).

2 Advanced Operations
Upper: Fe detection sensitivity

Lower: SUS detection sensitivity

3 Installation and Connection


Effect value display
The effect values are displayed chronologically in [Clear] button
the cycle of 0.1 second. The latest value is on the Clears the display of all effect values.
rightmost.

[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this button again to
release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the products that have been fed
while updating is stopped are displayed at once).

* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

247
Other Useful Functions

ML1/ML2, ML3/ML4 tab


^ button
ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity
Increases the evaluation limit
1 Basic Operations

for ML1 and ML2.


Estimated detection magnification (the detection
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity
sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
for ML3 and ML4.

White Evaluation limit


horizontal line magnification
Indicates the Press here to enter a
2 Advanced Operations

relative numeric value directly.


position of the
evaluation
limit. v button
Decreases the
evaluation limit
Effect value display [Clear] button magnification (the
The effect values are displayed Clears the display of all detection sensitivity
chronologically in the cycle of 0.1 second. effect values. increases).
T he latest value is on the rightmost.
3 Installation and Connection

[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this button again to
release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the products that have been fed
while updating is stopped are displayed at once).

Although the figure below shows a screen for a metal contamination check, the screen
display for a missing product check is the same except that a common bar graph to adjust
(ML1) is displayed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

248
Other Useful Functions
> Using HIS Setting Function
The HIS setting function increases the detection probability by registering the properties
of OK products and NG products into the metal detector and automatically specifying the

1 Basic Operations
settings suited for the test pieces to be detected. The target metal can be detected with
higher probability by performing the HIS setting function after auto-setting.
Be sure to prepare the following before executing the HIS setting function.
 If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.

 Usually, place NG products so that the test piece passes around the center of detector
head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to increase the

2 Advanced Operations
detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected products.

 The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the HIS setting several times.

 The HIS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for any metal.
The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting, depending on the type of
the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity, etc.), metal type (material, shape,
etc.), and the installation environment of the system.
 Estimated improvement rate after performing the HIS setting varies depending on type of test

3 Installation and Connection


piece or inspected products.
 0% of the estimated improvement rate indicates no improvement compared with the detection
sensitivity obtained at auto-setting.
 If evaluation mode is “Check missing product”, HIS setting function is not available.
 By newly performing the auto-setting ( P. 43 Registering a New Products – step 16), HIS
setting is restored to the default value.
 For the M5 type, the HIS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again.
 P. 99 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)
 Set “Algorithm auto selection” and “S1 auto selection” to “Yes” in advance.
 P. 67 HIS setting details
 In the case of a false detection after executing the HIS setting, perform the auto setting again 4 Maintenance
by using the product causing the false detection. If "H2" is displayed on the detection
sensitivity adjustment screen, perform the following procedures for the related product.
(1) Adjust the flow direction and angle of the product causing a false detection, and execute
the HIS setting again.
(2) Select [Restore the default algorithm] on the HIS setting execution method selection
screen, and execute the HIS setting again.
(3) Set “Algorithm auto selection” to "No", and execute the HIS setting again.
5 Appendix

249
Other Useful Functions

To assure stable metal detection, warm up the system after power-on


Caution for at least 60 minutes before performing the HIS setting function.
However, if the target product is packaged in aluminum-evaporated
1 Basic Operations

materials or has a high salt concentration, warm up the system for at


least 90 minutes.
For M5, turn the power on, and wait for 10 minutes or longer before
executing the HIS setting.

The rejector does not operate during HIS setting. Do not feed OK or
Caution NG product to the downstream.
2 Advanced Operations

■ Items to be prepared for HIS setting


Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria (the material
Test piece
provided by Anritsu is included).
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and package
state) of the products to be fed through on the normal line. If the characteristics
OK product
differ, prepare the multiple number of products. The results obtained after an
OK product is fed through 5 times will be taken as the measurement data.
3 Installation and Connection

An NG product is made by attaching a test piece to an OK product. To make the


detection sensitivity at an appropriate level, use all the prepared NG products.
NG product
The results obtained after an NG product is fed through 6 times will be taken as
the measurement data.

The following shows a place to attach a test piece:


Horizontal center of Attach a test piece Vertical center of
detector head opening here. detecor head opening Attach a test piece at the top.

OK
product
OK
product
4 Maintenance

Conveyor belt Conveyor base plate


Detector head

If the OK product is taller than the vertical If the OK product is shorter in height than
center of detector head opening the vertical center of detector head opening
5 Appendix

250
Other Useful Functions
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [HIS Setting] on the
right screen.

1 Basic Operations
The [HIS Setting] menu can be displayed
by pressing [Menu] → [Control Panel] →
[Home Screen Setting] → [Other Menu]
and adding “HIS Setting”.

2 Press [Next] on the “Start of HIS Setting”

2 Advanced Operations
screen

3 Select [Specify new HIS settings] and

3 Installation and Connection


press [Next].

[Restore the default algorithm] and


[Restore the default HIS settings]
become available when setting the next
time.

Selecting [Restore the default algorithm],


restores the algorithm to the default
value.
Selecting [Restore the default HIS
4 Maintenance

settings] restore the HIS settings to the


default settings (those before HIS setting
is performed).

4 Prepare the items required for the


settings (test piece, OK product, and NG
product) and press [Next].
5 Appendix

251
Other Useful Functions
5 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK
product.
1 Basic Operations

6 Feed the OK product 5 times.


If multiple OK products are prepared,
feed them all.
2 Advanced Operations

Do not feed a product while ‘Wait for a


while.’ is displayed.
3 Installation and Connection

7 The screen shown to the right appears


after the product is fed 5 times. Press
[Next].
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

252
Other Useful Functions
8 Feed the NG product 6 times.

1 Basic Operations
▼ When the message “The effect from the
NG product is too small” appears

The test piece attached to the NG product

2 Advanced Operations
is not detected. If there are multiple types
of test piece, feed the product with the test
piece one-size larger than that used.

▼ When the message “The effect from the


NG product is too large” appears

The test piece attached to the NG product

3 Installation and Connection


has already been detected. Check
whether the correct test piece is attached.

9 The “End of HIS setting” screen appears


after the setting is correctly completed.
Press [Completed].

The value enclosed in brackets ([ ]) on


4 Maintenance

the screen indicates the estimated


improvement rate of the detection
sensitivity compared with that obtained at
auto-setting.

The estimated improvement rate of the detection sensitivity is not a guaranteed value but an
indication. Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the HIS setting function.
5 Appendix

253
Other Useful Functions
> Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function
The auto-limit-setting function automatically sets the optimum evaluation limit based on
randomness in inspected products and test piece effects. This function reduces
1 Basic Operations

misdetection and assures stable inspection.


If performing the HIS setting and auto-limit-setting functions at the sametime, perform the
HIS setting function first.

■ Items to be prepared for auto-limit-setting function


Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria (the
Test piece
material provided by Anritsu is included).
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and
2 Advanced Operations

OK product package state) of the products to be fed through to the normal line. If the
characteristics differ, prepare the multiple number of products.
An NG product is made by attaching a test piece to an OK product. To set
NG product
appropriate detection sensitivity, use all the prepared NG products.

■ Setting method selection


There are two methods to set auto-limit-setting function.
3 Installation and Connection

To set the function, in whichever method, an inspected product should be fed through 5 to
99 times. The more the product is fed, the less incorrect detection occurs which leads to
more stable inspection.

(1) Feeding OK product only


Select this method if no test piece used as a reference for detection is prepared.
The appropriate evaluation limit is set in consideration of variation of OK product only.

(2) Feeding OK and NG products


Select this method if a test piece to be referenced for detection is prepared.
The appropriate evaluation limit is set in consideration of variation of OK and NG
4 Maintenance

products.
If the difference between evaluation values of OK and NG products is small, incorrect
detection frequently occurs. In such case, select method (1) to set the function.
5 Appendix

254
Other Useful Functions

The method to feed OK products only can be set during operation.


 In the “General” screen, select [Set/Adj] → [Auto Limit Setting], and specify the setting
according to the instructions on the screen.

1 Basic Operations
 If a product is evaluated as NG during setting, the data of the product is not reflected on the
setting, and the product is rejected as an NG product.
 Set the count to feed an OK product during operation in [Auto-limit count] in advance.
 P. 180 Auto-limit setting
 If the inspected product is bulk type, the parameter [MD Ultra under limit] must be set.
 P. 56 Ins. condition set
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] with the operation

2 Advanced Operations
stopped and press [Auto Limit Setting] on
the right screen.

The [Auto Limit Setting] menu can be


displayed by pressing [Menu] → [Control
Panel] → [Home Screen Setting] →
[Other Menu] and adding “Auto Limit
Setting”.

3 Installation and Connection


2 Press [Next] on the “Start of auto-limit
setting” screen.

3 Select the execution method of auto-limit


4 Maintenance

setting and press [Next].


5 Appendix

255
Other Useful Functions
4 Prepare OK or NG product according to
the instructions on the screen.
1 Basic Operations

5 If the product feeding orientation is


unstable during production, feed the
product appropriately to the possible
situation to obtain the correct settings.
2 Advanced Operations

6 Press the [Start] button.


3 Installation and Connection

7 Feed OK or NG product according to the


instructions on the screen and settings.
4 Maintenance

8 When “Auto-limit setting finished.”


appears, press [Completed].
5 Appendix

256
Other Useful Functions
> Using FOCUS Setting Function
The FOCUS setting is the function to attempt an enhancement of the detection sensitivity
for metallic foreign materials such as metallic wire that are not different from Fe- or SUS-

1 Basic Operations
metallic balls to be used as a normal metallic contaminant. By registering the properties of
OK products and NG products into the metal detector, and the settings suited for the test
pieces to be detected is done automatically.
* The FOCUS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for
any metal. The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting,
depending on the type of the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity,
etc.), metal type (material, shape, etc.), and the installation environment of the
system.

2 Advanced Operations
* The FOCUS setting overwrites the setting details determined by Auto-setting. The
FOCUS setting corresponds to the characteristics of metallic foreign materials.
Therefore, the sensitivity for test pieces that can be detected in accordance with
Auto-setting may decrease. After setting, check the detection sensitivity using a test
piece. If Auto-setting is required again, do not use the current settings but configure
Auto-setting.

 P. 100 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products – Step 3)

3 Installation and Connection


Be sure to prepare the following before executing the FOCUS setting function.
▪ Performs auto-setting before the FOCUS setting function.

▪ If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.

▪ Usually, place NG products so that the metallic contaminant passes around the center
of detector head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to increase
the detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected products.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

257
Other Useful Functions

▪ The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the FOCUS setting several times.
▪ Estimated improvement rate after performing the FOCUS setting varies depending on type of
metallic contaminant or inspected products.
1 Basic Operations

▪ If evaluation mode is “Check missing product”, FOCUS setting function is not available.
▪ If an NG product that has been used in the FOCUS setting cannot be set, the FOCUS setting
is not available.
▪ By newly performing the auto-setting ( P. 38 Registering a New Products – step 7),
FOCUS setting is restored to the default value.
▪ The FOCUS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again.
 P. 99 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)
▪ In the case of a false detection after executing the FOCUS setting, perform the auto setting
again by using the product causing the false detection.
2 Advanced Operations

To assure stable metal detection, warm up the system after power-on


Caution for at least 10 minutes before performing the FOCUS setting function.

The flipper-type, dropout-type, or carrier-type rejector rejects OK


Caution
3 Installation and Connection

products and NG products used for the FOCUS setting in the forced
rejection direction. Other rejectors do not function for the FOCUS
setting. Be careful to prevent OK products and NG products to be
used from flowing to the downstream.

■ Items to be prepared for FOCUS setting


Metallic
Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria
contaminant
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and package
state) of the products to be fed through on the normal line. If the characteristics
OK product
4 Maintenance

differ, prepare a multiple number of products. The results obtained after an OK


product is fed through 5 times will be taken as the measurement data.
An NG product is made by attaching a metallic contaminant to an OK product.
To make the detection sensitivity at an appropriate level, use all the prepared
NG product
NG products. The results obtained after an NG product is fed through 6 times
will be taken as the measurement data.
5 Appendix

258
Other Useful Functions
The following shows a place to attach a metallic contaminant:
Center width of metal Center height of metal
detector head opening Attach here detector head opening Attach here

OK

1 Basic Operations
OK
product product

Conveyor belt Transport belt plate Detection Head

OK product height > Center height of metal OK product height ≦ Center head of metal
detector head opening detector head opening

2 Advanced Operations
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [FOCUS Setting] on
the right screen.

The [FOCUS Setting] menu can be


displayed by pressing [Menu] → [Control
Panel] → [Home Screen Setting] →

3 Installation and Connection


[Other Menu] and adding “FOCUS
Setting”.

2 Press [Next] on the “Start of FOCUS


Setting” screen

4 Maintenance

3 Prepare the items required for the


settings (metallic contaminant, OK
product, and NG product) and press
[Next].
5 Appendix

259
Other Useful Functions
4 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK
product.
1 Basic Operations

5 Feed the OK product 5 times.


If multiple OK products are prepared,
feed them all.
2 Advanced Operations

Do not feed a product while ‘Wait for a


while.’ is displayed.
3 Installation and Connection

6 The screen shown on the right appears


after the product is fed 5 times. Press
[Next].
4 Maintenance

7 Feed the NG product 6 times.


5 Appendix

260
Other Useful Functions
▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too small” appears

The metallic contaminant attached to the


NG product is not detected. If there are

1 Basic Operations
multiple types of metallic contaminant,
feed the product with the metallic
contaminant one-size larger than that
used.

▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too large” appears

2 Advanced Operations
The metallic contaminant attached to the
NG product has already been detected. If
there are several types of metallic
contaminants, attach a smaller metallic
contaminant to a product and feed it.

3 Installation and Connection


8 The “End of FOCUS setting” screen
appears after the setting is correctly
completed. Press [Completed].

▪ Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the FOCUS setting function.
4 Maintenance
▪ If an impact of the NG product is poorly checked, the detection sensitivity may decrease.
5 Appendix

261
3 Installation and Connection
This chapter describes the installation method of the checkweigher
and the connection method with external equipment.

Selecting Installation Location and Transportation 263

Installation 264

Connecting External Equipment 266

Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power 269


3 Installation and Connection

262
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation

■ Installation location
Install the Checkweigher in a location meeting the following conditions.

• Where the temperature range is within 0 to 40°C

1 Basic Operations
• Where the relative humidity is within 30% to 85% with no condensation.

• Where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or radiant heat from a stove or heater.

• Where the power supply voltage does not fluctuate more than +10%, -15%.

• Where there is little or no vibration. Where vibration is not easily generated.

• Where the air is clean and dust free.

2 Advanced Operations
500 mm
• Where there are no flammable, active gases or salt sprays. Back
side
• Where it will not be exposed to drafts from an air
conditioner, etc.
Checkweigher
• Where the location will not be affected by
noise from the checkweigher.

500 mm
Front
(The noise level of the checkweigher side

does not exceed 70 dB (A).)

3 Installation and Connection


• Where the space shown in the figure (shaded area) can be reserved to support
operations and maintenance.

■ Transportation

When transporting the checkweigher, keep it so that there is no more


Warning than 10 degrees of tilt in any direction to prevent it from falling.

■ DO NOT apply a strong force or mechanical shock to the weigh


Caution
4 Maintenance

conveyor, otherwise the weighcell may be damaged.


■ Lock the weighcell before moving the checkweigher.
 P. 264 Installation

1 Using a fork lift for transportation


Insert the fork beneath the round pipe.
Round pipe
5 Appendix

Correct
places of fork

263
Installation
Installation

If excessive force is applied, the equipment may tip over and cause
Warning personal injury. Use the optional anchors to secure the equipment to
the floor.
1 Basic Operations

Before installation, make sure that all four rubber feet protectors have been removed.

1 Releasing the lock on the weighcell

▼ KWS6XXX type
2 Advanced Operations

Change the position of the lock spring of the


weighcell.
(1) Remove the 4 screws on the weighcell
unit with the provided spanner, and
remove the cover.
The weighcell cover is on the exit side of Lock spring

the weigh conveyor.


3 Installation and Connection

(2) Adjust the lock spring to the release


position.

Condition Lock spring position


Released
In use

When shipped, transported, or Locked


when not used for a long time

(3) Install the weighcell cover.


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

264
Installation

▼ KWS5XXX type

Replace the screw on the bottom of the


weighcell.

1 Basic Operations
(1) Remove the screw in the LOCK part.
Loosen the lock nut with the spanner, LOCK part ← part
and remove the screw with a Phillips
screwdriver.
Lock nut
(2) Remove the screw in the ← part with a Long screw
Phillips screwdriver.
Sealing washer

2 Advanced Operations
(3) Replace the LOCK part screw and the Short screw
← part screw.
Make sure to attach the sealing
washers.

Condition LOCK part ← part

In use

3 Installation and Connection


When shipped, transported, or
when not used for a long time

(4) Make sure that the lock nut is fully tightened.

2 Installing

Do not set any one of the 4 foot bolts too high or too low. It may cause
Warning the checkweigher to topple.
4 Maintenance

■ When adjusting foot bolts, do not hold the thread part by hand. Your
Caution hand may be injured by the edges of the thread.
■ When adjusting the height of the carrying belt surface, be careful so
that your finger does not get caught between the checkweigher and
upstream/downstream conveyors.
5 Appendix

265
Connecting External Equipment

(1) Loosen the lock nut of the foot bolts with


a spanner.
Foot bolt adjustment
Lock nut
1 Basic Operations

Raise bolt Lower belt


surface surface

Foot bolts (4 locations)

(2) Adjust the foot bolts to align the conveyor belt heights with the production line.
• Place a level on the weighcell conveyor section to make sure it is level.

• Make sure that the checkweigher does not come into contact with the
2 Advanced Operations

upstream/downstream devices.

• The foot bolts should not come off the floor.

• Products should be carried smoothly.


Flow
No unevenness

Downstream conveyor

Infeed conveyor Weigh


Upstream conveyor conveyor Adjust within 0 to 2 mm
3 Installation and Connection

depending on products.
Should not come off the floor and should be stable (4 locations). 0 to 2 mm

You may need to lower the carrying belt surface of the downstream conveyor by 0 to 2
mm, depending on the product being measured.
4 Maintenance

(3) Tighten the lock nut of the foot bolts with a spanner.

Connecting External Equipment

Connect the checkweigher with I/O and external equipment.


For applicable cables and I/O specifications, refer to “External I/O Specifications”.
 P. 385 External I/O Specifications

To connect the Anritsu rejector, refer to the operation manual of the rejector.
5 Appendix

266
Connecting External Equipment

Do not connect the power plug to the socket until the connection is
Warning complete. If you connect the cables while the power is connected,
there is a risk of receiving an electric shock, or of damage to the

1 Basic Operations
electronic components. Connect the devices and cables correctly,
following the descriptions below. Connection errors may result in
losing the waterproof and dustproof properties of the equipment.

After connecting the equipment, turn on the power and set the I/O signals.
 P. 123 Setting External I/O Signals

2 Advanced Operations
> SSV-h/f Series
1 Remove the back panel of the indicator.
Loosen the 6 screws with a spanner, and
remove the back panel.

3 Installation and Connection


2 Route the external connection cable.
(1) Loosen the screw with a hex key wrench,
and remove the cable cover.

(2) Run the cable through the cable inlet.


MPU2010
(3) After connecting the cable to the
connector, connect the connector to X53 GPIO
X53
4 Maintenance
(GPIO) of the MPU2010.

 P. 385 External I/O Specifications

(4) Route the cable as shown in the figure.

(5) Close the cable cover, and tighten the Cable cover
Cable inlet
screw with a hex key wrench.
3 Attach the back panel.
Attach the back panel of the indicator,
5 Appendix

and tighten the 6 screws with a spanner.

267
Connecting External Equipment

> SSV-i Series


1 Basic Operations

Caution Be careful of burrs after punching out the knockout parts.

1 Remove the back panel of the indicator.


Loosen the 6 screws with a spanner, and
remove the back panel.
2 Advanced Operations

2 Punch cable wiring holes.


Knockout part
Punch out the knockout parts with a (dent)
punch and a hammer.
3 Installation and Connection

Punch out
3 Route the external connection cable.
Cable clamp
(1) Loosen (A) of the cable clamp, and run (B)
(C) (A)
the cable as shown in the figure.

(2) After connecting the cable to the


Cable
connector, connect the connector to X53 MPU2010
(GPIO) of the MPU2010.
GPIO
 P. 385 External I/O Specifications X53
4 Maintenance

(3) Insert (B) into the knockout part, hold it


Cable clamp
securely with (C) from the inside of the
indicator, and tighten (B).

(4) Route the cable as shown in the figure.

(5) Tighten (A) fully.


Pull the cable lightly to make sure it will
not come off.
4 Install the back panel.
5 Appendix

Install the back panel of the indicator, and tighten the 6 screws with a spanner.

268
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power

■ Class D grounding must be performed. Turning on the power


without grounding may cause an electric shock that leads to an
injury or death.

1 Basic Operations
Warning ■ Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the specified
range. Running the checkweigher while the power supply voltage is
out of the specified range might cause failure or fire.

1 Check the specified power supply voltage range indicated on the checkweigher
nameplate.

2 Advanced Operations
2 Connect the power supply and grounding.
Make sure to ground the earth terminal.

▼ 100V specification
Standard power supply plug

Connect the power supply plug to the socket.


If the power supply plug cannot be used,
remove the tip of the plug and connect the Ground terminal

3 Installation and Connection


wires to the plug to be used. Brown
Blue Power supply

Green/yellow Ground terminal

▼ 200V specification
Brown
Connect the power supply cable. Blue Power supply

Green/yellow Ground terminal

3 Turn on the power switch.


⇒ The [Start] screen is displayed. ON
4 Maintenance

OFF
5 Appendix

269
4 Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance of the checkweigher and
troubleshooting.

Daily Maintenance 271

Cleaning 273

Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series) 278

Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series) 291

Check Items for Failure 300

Error Messages and Solutions 316

Adjusting Photocell 348


4 Maintenance

270
Daily Maintenance
Daily Maintenance

When inspecting the conveyor while operating, be careful not to touch


Caution the roller belt. When operating the conveyor with a separately installed
indicator (optional), make sure no one is around the conveyor.

1 Basic Operations
Do not operate the conveyor if the conveyor belt is misaligned. If the
Caution conveyor belt is misaligned, correct the alignment before starting
operation. The end face of the conveyor belt may touch the drive belt
and generate wear debris, which may contaminate the product.

> Daily Maintenance

2 Advanced Operations
(1) Before operation
Check the following items before starting operation.
■ Touching parts
Check that the checkweigher and upstream/downstream conveyors are not touching
with each other.
■ Misalignment of the conveyor belt
Make sure that the belt is not misaligned.

3 Installation and Connection


■ Parameters
Check that the reference weight, upper limit, and lower limit settings are correct.
■ Accuracy
Feed a master product and check the displayed weight. Repeat this ten times to
confirm the accuracy.
■ Checking the detection sensitivity
Feed a master product or a master product with test pieces attached (or defective
master product) and make sure that they are correctly detected. 4 Maintenance

■ Rejection (only when rejector connected)


Feed OK, +NG, -NG, and MDNG products to check the rejection.

(2) After operation


Clean the checkweigher after operation is ended. After cleaning, check the following.
■ Remove residues near the weighcell.
■ Remove conveyors to clean both belt surfaces.
■ Clean the equipment.
5 Appendix

271
Daily Maintenance

If products cannot properly be rejected by the rejector, check the following points. After the
check and the adjustment, operate the rejector to check if products are properly rejected.
– Checkweigher and rejector –
1 Basic Operations

Conveyor
▪ The transfer timing for products is not deviated due the transfer error.
▪ The belt tension for conveyor belt and drive belt are strong enough.
▪ The timing belt and roller are not abraded.
▪ The transfer speed for products is not temporarily slowed down due to the collision between
the gate and the warpage or the ravel of the belt.
▪ The air cylinder or the actuator operates properly at the first run after non-working day.
– Rejector –
Drive unit
2 Advanced Operations

▪ The air pressure is sufficient enough.


▪ The voltage is not lowered.
Actuator
▪ The tightening screws on the gates are not loosened.
▪ The gate drive unit is not abraded.
▪ The bearing is not abraded.
Pusher type
▪ Two products are not placed closely on the conveyor at the same time (double product).
Carrier type
▪ The connection shaft is not stained.
3 Installation and Connection

Air jet type


▪ The direction of the air blow is appropriate.
Others
▪ The downstream conveyor is not full of products and the products do not contact each other.

> Weekly Maintenance


Check the following items once a week.
■ Conveyor belt

Detach the conveyor belt and check that there is no fraying on the edges.
4 Maintenance

■ Motor, Rollers, and Conveyor belt


Run the conveyor to check for abnormal noise or belt meandering.
5 Appendix

272
Cleaning
Cleaning

DO NOT apply a strong force or mechanical shock to the weigh


Caution conveyor section, otherwise the weighcell may be damaged.

1 Basic Operations
> SSV-h/f Series
Do not wash the checkweigher with water. Make sure to turn off the
Warning power switch before cleaning.

■ Wipe off stains with a cloth soaked in water or a mild detergent.

Never use a metal brush.

2 Advanced Operations

■ Do not use organic solvents, such as thinner and toluene.


■ Clean the carrying belt, roller, and detection head according to the waterproof
specifications (IP66).

> SSV-i Series

3 Installation and Connection


Before cleaning, make sure to turn off the power. Before washing the
Warning checkweigher with water, make sure to pull out the power plug.

After using the equipment, the conveyor rollers, conveying surface,


Caution conveyor belt, tension roller and the opening of the metal detecting
unit should be thoroughly cleaned and/or washed with water for the
next usage. If the equipment is used without being cleaned or washed
thoroughly, mold may develop on the conveyor belt.
4 Maintenance

(1) Weigh/Infeed conveyor section

Wipe off stains with a cloth soaked in water or a mild detergent.


For severe stains, remove and clean the conveyor. The quick-release part of the conveyor
can be sterilized with boiling water. The estimated lifespan is as follows:
Condition: Washed with water at 100°C for 5 minutes once per day after normal use
(8 hours per day).
■ Conveyor belt life: 6 months
■ Roller: 1 year
5 Appendix

The life depends on the usage. Use above figures as a guideline.

273
Cleaning
(2) Conveyor belt

After operation, remove the conveyor belt and wash it thoroughly. Mold
Caution might grow if you continue using the conveyor belt with remnants from
1 Basic Operations

previous operations left on the conveyor. In addition, the metal detector


may detect the remnant.

Clean the conveyor belt thoroughly and dry it. If you cannot reserve
Caution enough drying time, keep a spare belt. Never use a dryer.

Remove the conveyor belt from the conveyor unit and clean it.
Examples of required cleaning
2 Advanced Operations

■ Wash off remains of products using neutral detergent and rinse the belt with water.

■ Immerse the belt in boiling water (100°C) for 5 minutes max.


■ Wash the belt in a solution of hypochlorous acid (200 ppm) and rinse it with water
(5 minutes max.).
■ Naturally and thoroughly dry the conveyor belt.
3 Installation and Connection

■ When using neutral detergent or a solution of hypochlorous acid, always rinse the belt with
water, otherwise mold may grow and packings may deteriorate in early stages to disturb
operation.
■ Do not use a soft plastic brush to clean the conveyor surface. It may accelerate wear of the
belt surface. If you continue using a worn roller for a long period, the metal detection unit
might yield false detections due to the influence of wear debris. Thoroughly clean and remove
the wear debris on the conveyor belt.
■ Never use a dryer to dry the belt.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

274
Cleaning
(3) Roller

The alumite-treated roller surface improves corrosion resistance. If the treated surface is
damaged due to a scratch on the roller, corrosion may occur from the damaged area.

1 Basic Operations
Accordingly, take care not to scratch the roller.
Additionally, the alumite-treated surface may corrode if not cleaned properly. Clean the
roller according to the instructions in the table below.
If the roller is badly stained, remove and clean it. Do not soak or boil the roller when
cleaning.

Cleaning methods
Alkaline detergent ×

2 Advanced Operations
Organic solvent such as thinner or toluene ×
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.

3 Installation and Connection


(4) Metal detection unit

Clean the areas around the detector head periodically. Mold might
Caution grow if you continue operating with residues from previous operations
left on that area. In addition, the metal detector may detect residues as
contaminants.

Resin or packing in the area around the detection head opening deteriorates earlier in
accordance with how to wash it. Wash it in accordance with the following table. 4 Maintenance
Cleaning method
Organic solvent such as thinner or ×
toluene
Alcohol △
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
5 Appendix

*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.

275
Cleaning
(5) Main Unit

The main unit is rated IP66 using the Ingress Protection Rating.
1 Basic Operations

What is IP66?
The main unit is protected against intrusions of dust and water to the interior.
It can withstand water projected in powerful jets (12.5mm nozzle) at 100 liters per minute from all
directions from a distance of 2.5-3m. (IEC 60529)

■ Clean the checkweigher using water that is up to 60°C. Clean the metal detector with
water that is 40°C or lower.
■ Before cleaning with water, check that the indicator cover, cover of optional printer etc.,
2 Advanced Operations

are completely closed.


■ Use a soft plastic brush or cloth to clean. Use a cloth to clean the surface of the
conveyor belt. If you use a soft plastic brush, you may accelerate the wear of the belt
surface. Never use a metal brush.
■ Use neutral detergent for cleaning. Never use solvents such as thinners or toluene.
■ Do not wash with steam.
■ Wash the checkweigher gently by running water from a hose. Do not apply water
3 Installation and Connection

pressure from a horizontal direction on the side plate of the weigh conveyor section.
Doing so may cause a weighcell failure.
■ The tube under the weighcell is an air breather; take care not to allow water to enter
the end of the tube.
■ The signal tower (optional) mounted on the side of the indicator is equivalent to IP54
and has a splash-proof structure. Do not to spray it with water.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

276
Cleaning
> Maintenance of Stainless Steel
Stainless steel is very rust-resistant, but it is not completely rust-free under all conditions.
It can sometimes become soiled or rusty depending on the environment and usage

1 Basic Operations
conditions. Periodic maintenance is required.
When any stain or rust appears, clean it by using the following methods. After cleaning,
wipe it thoroughly with water to wipe off all chemicals used.

Conditions Cleaning method


Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or
soapy water.
Palm and fingerprint deposits
If the stain still remains, wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in

2 Advanced Operations
an organic solvent (such as alcohol, benzene, or acetone).
Rust
Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or
(due to rust-promoting ferrous
soapy water.
particles or salts)

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

277
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)

> Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations

is turned to the OFF position.

When removing the catch clip, be careful so that your finger does not
Caution get caught.

Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
2 Advanced Operations

■ KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, and KWS54XX types

Remove the product guide or optional cross plate in advance if they are being used.

1 Loosen the knurled screw with a


flat-bladed screwdriver and remove the
belt cover.
3 Installation and Connection

Knurled screw

Belt cover

2 Remove the two catch clips.


4 Maintenance

Catch clip

3 Remove the weigh conveyor unit from


Weigh conveyor unit
the weigh conveyor section. Lift

(1) Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove Drive belt
the drive belt.
5 Appendix

(2) Remove the weigh conveyor unit.

278
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ KWS55XX type

Remove the product guide or optional cross plate in advance if they are being used.

1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the roller cover and belt cover.
(1) Loosen the two screws with a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the two roller
covers. Roller
cover
(2) Loosen the screw (at one location) with a
Phillips screwdriver and remove the belt

2 Advanced Operations
Belt cover
cover.

2 Loosen the four screws with a spanner.

Screw

3 Installation and Connection


3 Remove the weigh conveyor from the
Weigh conveyor section.

(1) Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove


the drive belt.
Weigh conveyor unit
(2) Remove the weigh conveyor unit.
Lift

Drive belt
4 Maintenance
Pull toward
you to
remove
5 Appendix

279
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations

is turned to the OFF position. For your safety, make sure to install the
belt cover and roller cover before operation. Contact Anritsu if any of
these components are broken.

Make sure that all catch clips are firmly locked before starting
Warning operation.
2 Advanced Operations

Caution Be careful of your fingers when locking the catch clip.

■ KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, KWS54XX type

1 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the


Weigh conveyor unit
weigh conveyor section.
Lower
3 Installation and Connection

(1) Mount the weigh conveyor unit and Drive belt


install the drive belt.

(2) Lower the weigh conveyor unit slowly to


fit it onto the weigh conveyor section.

2 Lock the two catch clips.


4 Maintenance

Catch clip

3 Install the belt cover and tighten the


knurled screw with a flat-bladed
screwdriver.

Knurled screw
5 Appendix

If you are using a product guide or optional


cross plate, install it at the end. Belt cover

280
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ KWS55XX type
1 Install the weight conveyor to the weigh Weigh conveyor unit
conveyor section.

1 Basic Operations
Lower
(1) Mount the weigh conveyor unit and
install the drive belt.
Drive belt
(2) Lower the weigh conveyor unit slowly to
fit it onto the weigh conveyor section.

2 Advanced Operations
2 Tighten the four screws with a spanner.

Screw

3 Install the roller covers and belt cover,

3 Installation and Connection


and tighten the screws.

(1) Install the two roller covers and tighten


the two screws with a Phillips Roller
screwdriver. cover

(2) Install the belt cover and tighten the


Belt cover
screw (at 1 location) with a Phillips
screwdriver.

4 Make sure that the screws in Steps 2 and 3 have been tightened.
4 Maintenance

If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate, install it at the end.
5 Appendix

281
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations

is in the OFF position.

Caution Be careful of your fingers when removing the catch clip.

Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
2 Advanced Operations

Remove the product guide and optional cross plate in advance if they are used.

1 Remove the catch clip and the belt cover.

▼ For a belt width of 160 mm or 250 mm


(1) Remove the two catch clips (one on
3 Installation and Connection

each side).

(2) Loosen the knurled screw with a


flat-blade screwdriver and remove the
belt cover.

Catch clip

Belt cover

Knurled screw
4 Maintenance

▼ For a belt width of 350 mm


(1) Remove the four catch clips (two on
each side).

(2) Remove the belt cover.


5 Appendix

Belt cover

Catch clip

282
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
2 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from the
weigh infeed section.

(1) Lift the infeed conveyor unit to remove

1 Basic Operations
the drive belt.

(2) Remove the infeed conveyor unit.


Infeed conveyor unit

Lift

2 Advanced Operations
Drive belt

Pull toward
you to
remove

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

283
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations

is in the OFF position. For your safety, make sure to install the belt
cover before starting operation. Contact Anritsu if any of these
components are broken.

Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.
2 Advanced Operations

Caution Be careful of your fingers when locking the catch clips.

1 Install the infeed conveyor section to the


infeed conveyor unit.

(1) Mount the infeed conveyor unit and


install the drive belt.
3 Installation and Connection

(2) Lower the infeed conveyor unit slowly to


fit it onto the infeed conveyor unit.
Infeed convey unit

Lower
slowly

Drive belt
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

284
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
2 Install the belt cover and lock the catch clip.

▼ For a belt width of 160 mm or 250 mm

1 Basic Operations
(1) Install the belt cover and tighten the
knurled screw with a flat-blade
screwdriver.

(2) Lock the two catch clips (one on each


side).

Catch clip

2 Advanced Operations
Belt cover

Knurled screw

▼ For a belt width of 350 mm


(1) Install the belt cover.

(2) Lock the four catch clips (two on each

3 Installation and Connection


side).

Belt cover

Catch clip
4 Maintenance

If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate, install it at the end.
5 Appendix

285
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller
The removal procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor and the infeed conveyor.
1 Basic Operations

For your safety, remove the conveyor belt on a workbench with


Caution sufficient space. Be careful not to drop the rollers.

■ Weigh conveyor unit


1 Remove the weigh conveyor unit from the
conveyor section.

 P. 278 Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit


2 Advanced Operations

2 Loosen the two adjusters by hand.

Adjuster

Loosen Tighten

3 Pull out the conveyor belt and remove it.


3 Installation and Connection

Pull out
Be careful not to drop the rollers. Pull out

Carrying
belt

Drive roller

Driven roller
Drive belt
4 Maintenance

■ Infeed conveyor unit


1 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from the
Pull out
infeed conveyor section.
Pull out
 P. 282 Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Carrying belt
2 Pull out the conveyor belt and remove it.
Drive roller
Be careful not to drop the rollers.
5 Appendix

Driven roller
Drive belt

286
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Installing the Conveyor Belt/Roller

For your safety, remove the conveyor belt on a workbench with


Caution

1 Basic Operations
sufficient space. Be careful not to drop the roller.

■ Weigh conveyor unit


1 Install the conveyor belt and rollers. Carrying belt

(1) Put the drive belt on the drive roller. Drive


roller
(2) Install the drive roller and driven roller
onto the conveyor surface.

2 Advanced Operations
(3) Install the conveyor belt. Driven roller
Frame Drive belt
The flow of products should match the
direction indicated inside the belt.

Install

2 Adjust the tension of the conveyor belt

3 Installation and Connection


with the two adjusters.

Adjuster

Loosen Tighten
3 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the weigh
conveyor section.

 P. 280 Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

4 Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.


4 Maintenance

 P. 289 Adjusting Belt Alignment


5 Appendix

287
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ Infeed conveyor unit
1 Install the conveyor belt and rollers. Carrying belt

(1) Put the drive belt on the drive roller.


Drive roller
1 Basic Operations

(2) Install the drive roller and driven roller


onto the conveyor surface.

(3) Install the conveyor belt. Driven roller


Frame
The flow of products should match the Drive belt

direction indicated inside the belt.

Install
2 Advanced Operations

2 Install the infeed conveyor unit to the infeed


conveyor section.

 P. 284 Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

3 Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.


 P. 289 Adjusting Belt Alignment
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

288
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor unit and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.

1 Basic Operations
The procedure for adjusting belt misalignment is the same for both the weigh conveyor
and the infeed conveyor.

■ Weigh conveyor section


1 Operate the conveyor and check the belt misalignment state of the conveyor belt.
If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
Adjust them so that the gaps on the roller ends are equal.

2 Advanced Operations
Adjuster 2
Misalignment state
Adjustment
(conveyor viewed from above)
Flow
The gap on the adjuster 2 side is Tighten adjuster 1 or
wide. loosen adjuster 2. Adjuster 1
Adjuster 1 Adjuster 2
Loosen
Flow
Gap

3 Installation and Connection


Tighten

Carrying belt A gap on the roller ends

The gap on the adjuster 1 side is Loosen adjuster 1 or


wide. tighten adjuster 2.
Adjuster 1 Adjuster 2
Flow
Gap

Carrying belt
4 Maintenance

2 Feed a product with a weight approximately 2 times the maximum weight range.
If it cannot be carried, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.

3 Operate the checkweigher for 2 to 3 minutes and then check the conveyor belt for belt
misalignment.
5 Appendix

Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or cause
uneven rotation.

289
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ Infeed conveyor section
1 Operate the conveyor and check the belt misalignment state of the conveyor belt.
If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
Adjust them so that gaps on the roller ends are equal.
1 Basic Operations

Misalignment state
Adjustment
(conveyor viewed from above)
The gap on the knob 2 side is Tighten knob 1 or
wide. loosen knob 2.
Loosen
Flow
Gap
2 Advanced Operations

Knob 1 Knob 2

Knob 1 Knob 2 Tighten


Carrying belt
A gap on the roller ends

The gap on the knob 1 side is Loosen knob 1 or


wide. tighten knob 2.

Flow
Gap
3 Installation and Connection

Knob 1 Knob 2
Carrying belt

2 Feed through a product.


If it cannot be carried, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters
(one on each side).
4 Maintenance

3 Operate the checkweigher for 2 to 3 minutes and then check for belt misalignment.

Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or cause
uneven rotation.
5 Appendix

290
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)

> Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning

1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position

When removing the optional product guide or pulling out the motor, be
Caution careful that your finger does not get caught by the catch clip.

When pulling out the motor, be careful that your fingers do not caught
Caution between the motor and the indicator.

2 Advanced Operations
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.

1 Remove the motor. Motor


Catch clip
(1) Remove the two catch clips on the motor
Pull out
while holding it by hand.

3 Installation and Connection


(2) Pull out the motor.
If it is difficult to pull out the motor, gently
shake it to pull it out.
Drive roller

2 Remove the two catch clips of the


conveyor.
Catch clip
4 Maintenance

Remove the product guide or optional cross plate


now if they are installed.

Weigh conveyor unit


3 Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove
it.
Lift
5 Appendix

291
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations

is in the OFF position.

Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.

Caution Be careful of your fingers when locking the catch clip.


2 Advanced Operations

1 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the Weigh conveyor unit

weigh conveyor section.


Mount the weigh conveyor unit, and lower Lower
slowly
it slowly to fit it onto the weigh conveyor
section.
3 Installation and Connection

2 Lock the two catch clips of the conveyor.

If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate,


install it now. Catch clip

3 Install the motor. Motor


Catch clip
4 Maintenance

(1) Insert the coupling into the drive roller.


Insert
If it is hard to insert, push and rotate the
conveyor belt while inserting it.

Drive roller
5 Appendix

292
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
(2) Lock the two catch clips on the motor by
holding the motor by hand.
Remove the gap between the motor and
drive roller, and lock the catch clips.

1 Basic Operations
When installing the motor, make sure there is no No gap
gap, as shown in the figure. If any gap exists, install
it again. A motor that is not installed correctly may
cause the coupling to wear quickly or poor weighing
accuracy.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

293
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations

is turned to the OFF position

When removing the optional product guide or pulling out the motor, be
Caution careful that your finger does not get caught by the catch clip.

Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
2 Advanced Operations

1 Remove the motor. Motor


Catch clip
(1) Remove the two catch clips on the motor
Pull out
while holding it by hand.

(2) Pull out the motor.


If it is difficult to pull out the motor, gently
shake it to pull it out.
Drive roller
3 Installation and Connection

2 Remove the two catch clips of the


conveyor.

Remove the product guide or optional cross plate


now if they are installed. Catch clip

3 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from


the infeed conveyor section.
4 Maintenance

(1) Lift the infeed conveyor unit to remove


the hook.
Infeed conveyor unit
(2) Remove the infeed conveyor unit.

Lift

Hook
5 Appendix

Remove

294
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning

1 Basic Operations
is in the OFF position.

Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.

Caution Be careful of your fingers when locking the catch clip.

2 Advanced Operations
1 Install the infeed conveyor unit to the
infeed conveyor section.

(1) Mount the infeed conveyor unit and lock


in place with the hook.

(2) Lower the infeed conveyor unit slowly to


fit it to the infeed conveyor section.

3 Installation and Connection


Infeed conveyor unit

Lower
slowly

Hook

lock
4 Maintenance

2 Lock two catch clips on the conveyor.

Remove the product guide or optional cross plate


now if they are installed.

Catch clip
5 Appendix

295
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
3 Install the motor. Motor
Catch clip
(1) Insert the coupling into the drive roller.
If it is hard to insert, push and rotate the Insert
1 Basic Operations

conveyor belt while inserting it.

(2) Lock the two catch clips on the motor by Drive roller
holding the motor by hand.
Remove the gap between the motor and
drive roller, and lock the catch clips.
2 Advanced Operations

When installing the motor, make sure there is no No gap


gap, as shown in the figure. If any gap exists, install
it again. A motor that is not installed correctly may
cause the coupling to wear quickly or poor weighing
accuracy.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

296
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Removing the Conveyor Belt
The removal procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor section and the infeed
conveyor section.

1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the weigh/infeed conveyor from
the weigh/infeed conveyor section.

 P. 291 Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit


 P. 294 Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

2 Pull the knob to turn the driven roller part.

2 Advanced Operations
Knob

Driven roller part


Turn

3 Pull the conveyor belt out to remove.

3 Installation and Connection


Pull out
Pull out
Carrying
belt

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

297
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Installing the Conveyor Belt
The installation procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor section and the infeed
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations

1 Align the protruding profile inside the belt


Carrying belt
to the groove of the roller, and install the
conveyor belt.

Profile inside
carrying belt
2 Advanced Operations

Conveyor groove

2 Open the driven roller part while pulling the knob.

Knob

Driven roller
3 Installation and Connection

part Turn
3 Install the weigh/infeed conveyor unit to
the weigh/infeed conveyor section.

 P. 292 Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit


 P. 295 Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

4 Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.


 P. 299 Adjusting Belt Alignment
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

298
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor unit and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.

1 Basic Operations
The procedure for adjusting belt misalignment is the same for both the weigh conveyor
section and the infeed conveyor section.

■ The water-proof conveyor normally does not require belt alignment adjustments because the
profile attached to the conveyor belt serves as a mechanism that prevents belt misalignments.
■ The belt might become misaligned if the checkweigher is used with foreign material

2 Advanced Operations
accumulated on the back of the conveyor belt. Using a misaligned belt for a long time may
shorten the lifespan of the profile. Clean the front and back surfaces of the conveyor belt and
roller periodically.

1 Operate the conveyor and check if the belt is misaligned.


If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt by turning the tension
bolts with a spanner. Adjust them so that the gaps on the roller ends are equal.

3 Installation and Connection


Tension bolt

A gap on the roller ends

4 Maintenance

2 Feed through a product.


If the product cannot be carried on the conveyor belt, adjust the tension by turning the
tension bolts with a spanner.

3 Operate it for 2 to 3 minutes and then check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.
5 Appendix

Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or
cause uneven rotation.

299
Check Items for Failure
Check Items for Failure

(1) If a failure occurs, check the following items first.


■ Are the settings correct according to the operation manual?
■ Are the connectors, cables and signal wires connected correctly?
1 Basic Operations

■ Are the codes disconnected, and is the wiring short-circuited?


■ Check that all screws and parts are secured tightly.
■ Is any part of the checkweigher damaged?
■ Is any part of the checkweigher rusty or dirty?

(2) Refit removed connectors and parts at their original locations after check.
2 Advanced Operations

(3) If sudden environmental changes, lightning, power failure due to abnormal voltage,
mechanical shock, or unusual usage are the direct causes of the fault, overall
inspection is necessary.

(4) If the operation unit or controller is faulty, use this belt as a conveyor for forced
operation.

 P. 313 Forced Operation


3 Installation and Connection

> Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve troubles.
If the problem is not resolved after taking the appropriate actions, or if the problem occurs
again, contact Anritsu. At this time, Anritsu might ask you to submit support data.
 P. 311 Outputting support data

■ Cannot Turn On Power

The lock knob (yellow) of the power NO Push in the knob.


switch is fully pushed. The power switch cannot be turned
4 Maintenance

on when the knob is not pushed in.


YES

NO
Voltage is supplied to the power
Check the power source.
receptacle.

YES

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the power turns off immediately after it is
turned on, request a repair.
5 Appendix

300
Check Items for Failure
■ The Screen Becomes Blank
YES
Tap the touch screen. Does the The blank screen was caused by a
screen return to the original state? function that turns off the back light

1 Basic Operations
when no operation is performed for a
NO
period of time. This is not a failure.

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the screen is not displayed, request a repair.

■ Conveyor Does Not Move/Conveyor Motor Error (E141) Occurs

The Stop button was pressed after NO After an error occurs, press the Stop button

2 Advanced Operations
the error message occurred. once before starting the checkweigher. This is
not a failure.
YES

YES Adjust the installation location so that the


The checkweigher is in contact with
the upstream/downstream equipment. checkweigher does not come into contact with
the upstream/downstream equipment, and
NO operate it again.

3 Installation and Connection


NO
The conveyor belt can be moved Check the installation of the conveyor unit,
smoothly by hand. conveyor belt, and rollers. Clean the conveyor if
it is soiled, and operate it again.
YES

Both the Start button and Stop Internal system error. Turn off the power and
YES
button lamps light. turn it on again. If the problem persists, ask us
for a repair.
NO
4 Maintenance
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix

301
Check Items for Failure
■ NG Products Not Rejected

Compressed air is supplied NO Check the air source.


(pneumatic rejector).
1 Basic Operations

YES

YES
There is a stain or foreign object on Clean the rejector and make sure it
the rejector. moves smoothly.

NO

NO
2 Advanced Operations

Operation timing of the rejector is in Adjust the conveyor system to obtain


sync with the passing of products. a stable conveyor state, or adjust the
RJ timing manually ( P. 99).
YES

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.

■ Poor Measurement Accuracy


3 Installation and Connection

Wind or vibration is affecting the YES Change the direction of the air conditioner.
checkweigher. Install the checkweigher away from the
machine generating vibrations.
NO

Products are transferred smoothly NO Adjust the height and gap of the
from/to the upstream/downstream
upstream/downstream equipment.
equipment.
YES

YES
4 Maintenance

Adjust the conveyor speed to obtain a


Products slip or jump while being YES
stable conveyor state, or adjust the
carried.
weighing timing manually ( P. 97).
NO

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix

302
Check Items for Failure
■ Product Length Exceeded (A039)/Dbl. Product Alarm (A001)/CW Capacity
Exceeded (A012) Occurs
Photocell Error (E011) Occurs
NO
Product length is set correctly. Set the product length correctly in

1 Basic Operations
the product registration.
YES

Products slip or jump while being YES Adjust the conveyor speed to
carried. obtain a stable conveyor state.

NO

Products block the photocell Check the photocell position and

2 Advanced Operations
NO
completely. detection state ( P. 348), or use
the optional sensor for transparent
YES products.

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

303
Check Items for Failure
■ Manual Zero-set Error (E008) / External Zero-set Error (E009) Occurs
Zero-setting Error (E040) / W. cell contact detection (E049) / -OVF occurrence
(E116) Occurs
1 Basic Operations

NO
Weighcell lock is released. Release weighcell lock.

YES
YES Adjust the installation location so that
The checkweigher is in contact with the
the checkweigher does not come into
upstream/downstream equipment.
contact with the upstream/downstream
NO equipment, and operate it again.
2 Advanced Operations

YES
There is a stain or foreign object on Clean the equipment.
the weighcell or weigh conveyor.

NO
Change the direction of the air
YES
Wind or vibration is affecting the conditioner.
checkweigher. Install the checkweigher away from the

NO machine generating vibrations.


3 Installation and Connection

YES
The system is recovered by Place an item whose weight is known
performing a weighcell self-check
on the weighcell and make sure that
( P. 345).
the sensitivity is normal.
NO Also, make sure that Operation check
YES
The system is recovered by could be performed successfully.
performing sensitivity correction
( P. 94).

NO
4 Maintenance

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix

304
Check Items for Failure
■ Operation Check Fails

Pass products and NG products are NO Perform an operation check in the


being fed in the correct order. correct order by following the

1 Basic Operations
on-screen instructions.
YES

The weight of the sample product NO Perform an operation check in the


for the operation check is correct. correct order by following the
on-screen instructions.
YES

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

305
Check Items for Failure
■ General check items about troubles in relation to metal detection
The metal detector is susceptible to electromagnetic waves and vibrations from the
surrounding area and metal. Install the equipment in a place that is subject to as little of
these external influences as possible. Contact Anritsu for a consultation on specific
1 Basic Operations

measures.
Major items to be checked
Item Effect on the metal detector Example actions
The power system used is the Electromagnetic noise
same as that of another piece of enters through the power Use another power system.
equipment. line.
The element responds to
A device equipped with an Change the carrier frequency
the electromagnetic noise
2 Advanced Operations

inverter is placed nearby. of the inverter.


of the inverter.
The magnetic fields
Multiple metal detectors (or Change the sensitivity mode *.
generated by the metal
checkweighers with a metal Change the installation
detector interfere with each
detector) are used nearby. location.
other.
The element responds to Change the sensitivity mode *.
High-voltage wire and railroad
the electromagnetic noise Change the installation
lines are nearby.
issued from the wire. location.
3 Installation and Connection

The heights of devices before


Adjust the conveyor surface to
and after the line differ from that The magnetic field is
install the equipment at a
of the conveyor surface, or the disrupted by vibrations
distance that prevents the
conveyor unit touches these when the product is put.
conveyor from touching it.
devices.
Set a neutralization apparatus
The product is prone to The product discharges to
or use the earth of the main
accumulating static electricity. the checkweigher.
unit.
* Contact Anritsu to change the sensitivity mode.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

306
Check Items for Failure
The detection performance becomes YES Use a different power system from
stable if an upstream, downstream, that for the peripheral devices, or
or peripheral device is stopped (or install the equipment away from the
turned off). peripheral devices.

1 Basic Operations
NO

The metal bar graph reaches red at


YES
a certain interval while the Clean the conveyor belt or replace it.
checkweigher is running, even
though no product is fed.

NO

2 Advanced Operations
Adjust the height of the conveyor
surface level to the upstream and
The metal bar graph reaches red YES
downstream devices. Also make
when a product is moved onto the
sure that the inspected product is
MD conveyor.
not charged with static electricity.
NO

YES Remove metal products such as


The metal bar graph reaches red
when a person passes by. watches or cellular phones.

3 Installation and Connection


■ A test piece is not detected or a pass product is incorrectly evaluated as an
NG product.

The characteristics of the inspected Perform the auto-setting again (


product (such as temperature, YES P. 99).
moisture content, and shape) Also correct the initial phase by the
changed after auto-setting. product check function ( P. 230).

NO
4 Maintenance

The detection sensitivity is not YES Perform “Make auto setting newly”.
improved even after performing The current setting might not be
“Make auto setting by using current optimum if the characteristics of the
settings”. inspected product have changed.
NO

The position of the products and NO Adjust the carrying unit so that the
product feeding interval are stable. product conveyance status is stable.
5 Appendix

YES

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.

307
Check Items for Failure
■ The bar graph reaches red, but the product is not evaluated as MDNG.

The product consistently blocks the NO


Make sure that the position and
photocell on the metal detector. detecting status of the photocell on
1 Basic Operations

the metal detector are correct.


YES
Note: When measuring a product that does not block the photocell
on the metal detector, select “No” when you are asked
whether to block the photocell during product registration.
Use under the mode of [Metal 3] ( P. 41).

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
2 Advanced Operations

■ The number of products rejected as MDNG is not the same as the MDNG
quantity displayed in the statistics.

Measurement is performed in Metal YES


MDNG Count indicates the number
3 mode ( P. 41). of products for which metal
contamination is detected, and that
NO
3 Installation and Connection

does not necessarily match the


number of NG products.

A double product is detected when products are fed through at an interval of less
than 280 mm.
When a double product is detected, two products might be rejected for each D-Prod.
NG detection.
If the rejection performance is not high, two products might be rejected with one
rejecting operation.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

308
Check Items for Failure
■ One of the following metal detector errors has occurred: Dbl. product (A501),
Capacity exceeded (A504), Length exceeded (A505), or Photocell error (E511).

NO
The set product length is correct. Set the correct product length at

1 Basic Operations
product registration.
YES

The product slips or bounces while YES Adjust the conveyor speed so as to
it is being conveyed. make the conveyance status
stabilized.
NO

The product consistently blocks the NO Make sure that the position and

2 Advanced Operations
photocell on the metal detector. detecting status of the photocell on
the metal detector are correct (
YES
P. 348).
Or, use a transparent sensor
(optional).

NO Perform auto-setting at product


Auto-setting has been performed.
registration.

3 Installation and Connection


YES

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.

■ Auto balance adjustment amount error (E543) or balance error (E544) has
occurred.
There is a large metal object near YES Remove the metal object near the
the metal detector. metal detector.

NO
4 Maintenance

There is a person who has a metal YES


item such as a watch, cellular Keep metal items away from the
phone, and tool near the metal metal detector.
detector.

NO

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix

309
Check Items for Failure
■ Other Unexpected Problems Occur

Is there any wind or vibration YES Change the direction of the air conditioner.

affecting the checkweigher? Install the checkweigher away from the


1 Basic Operations

machine generating vibrations.


NO
YES
The products are electrically charged. Install a static eliminator.

NO

Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

310
Check Items for Failure
> Outputting support data
If a problem occurs in the system, support data for recovery can be output.
If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data, output it to a USB

1 Basic Operations
memory and send the USB memory to the sales engineer at Anritsu.

Problem occurred
↓ ←If the problem is not resolved even after troubleshooting
Contact an Anritsu sales engineer
↓ ←If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data
Output support data

2 Advanced Operations
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.

Support data output method


1 Tap the [Home] button to go to the General screen.
2 Tap the [Help] button, select
"Saving data for service tech.", and then
tap [Save] under "Support data".

3 Installation and Connection


3 Tap [Yes]. If [No] is tapped, the support data will be saved but a status check will not
be performed.

4 Maintenance

If [No] is selected
5 Appendix

311
Check Items for Failure
4 Select the [Check the weighcell state]
check box, and then tap [Yes].
1 Basic Operations

5 On the Save to USB memory screen,


select "Support data" and then tap [Save].
2 Advanced Operations

6 The following file is output to the USB memory.


SUPPORT_Model_SN_Software version_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.pwy
3 Installation and Connection

(Example: SUPPORT_KWS6001AF04_4600000001_V01010001_20121108122346.pwy)

7 Compress the output file for submission.


File compression method
Example: Windows 7
Right-click the file to be output. From the drop-down menu, select "Send to" and then
"Compressed (zipped) folder". A zip-format file is saved in the same folder, with the
same name as the original file.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

312
Check Items for Failure
> Forced Operation

The forced operation must be performed by a person in charge of


Caution

1 Basic Operations
equipment maintenance only.

The forced operation must be performed in an unavoidable case only,


Caution such as a failure of the operation unit, as an emergency measures
until completion of repair.
Normal start/stop operation is invalid during the forced operation. The
operation can be started or stopped only by using the power switch.

2 Advanced Operations
– The conveyor starts running immediately after the power-on.
– The conveyor does not stop by pressing the stop button.
<If the emergency stop switch is provided>
During the forced operation, the conveyor starts running immediately
after the emergency stop switch is released.

Stay close to the checkweigher during the forced operation.


Caution If you leave the checkweigher for an unavoidable reason, turn the

3 Installation and Connection


power switch off and lock it. This prevents the power switch from
being operated by mistake.
<How to lock the power switch>
Turn the power switch to the off position, pull out
the yellow knob at the top edge of the handle, and
then lock it using a commercially available
padlock.

4 Maintenance
Evaluation (OK/NG) and rejection are not performed during the forced operation.

■ Forced operation setting

1 Turn off the power switch.

2 Remove the rear cover of the indicator.


5 Appendix

 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment

313
Check Items for Failure
3 Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to ON.
1 Basic Operations

Dip switch S3
X9 S3
Printer
X17
S3-1
1:MANU
PAT 2:SELF
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT
2 Advanced Operations

4 Install the rear cover.


 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment

■ Forced operation/stop of conveyor


3 Installation and Connection

(1) Operation

Make sure that there is no person around the conveyor. The conveyor
Caution starts running when the following procedure is performed.

1 Turn on the power switch.

If the conveyor does not start running by turning on the power switch,
Caution the motor control unit is faulty. Turn off the power switch immediately.
4 Maintenance

(2) Stopping
1 Turn off the power switch.
5 Appendix

314
Check Items for Failure
■ Releasing forced operation

1 Turn off the power switch.

1 Basic Operations
2 Remove the rear cover of the indicator.
 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment

3 Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to OFF.

2 Advanced Operations
Dip switch S3
X9 S3
Printer
S3-1
X17 1:MANU
PAT 2:SELF S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT

3 Installation and Connection


4 Install the rear cover.
 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

315
Error Messages and Solutions
Error Messages and Solutions

For information on how to reset errors and alarms, refer to "Handling Errors and Alarms".
 P. 71 Handling Errors and Alarms

E: Error, A: Alarm
1 Basic Operations

Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Controller FLASH Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E001 ROM Error the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service
Backup Battery Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Detected again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
* The set values disappear a few hours after turning the
2 Advanced Operations

E003
power supply off. To continue production, press the
error release key, set the relevant values, and use the
equipment without turning the power supply off.
Controller RAM Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E004 the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service
Controller EEP ROM Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E005 Error the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
3 Installation and Connection

for service
Low 24 V Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E006 Supply Voltage again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
Detected
A zero-set error Zero-setting might have been performed while a product
occurred due to the was placed on the weigh conveyor.
screen operation. Perform zero-setting while nothing is being fed through
on the weigh conveyor.
Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
4 Maintenance

E008
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
the cables due to bumping.
Are all the parts attached to the weigh conveyor?
Check that all the parts are attached to the conveyor,
referring to the instruction manual.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
5 Appendix

316
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
A zero-set error has Zero-setting might have been performed from the
occurred due to external device while a product was placed on the weigh

1 Basic Operations
external device conveyor.
control. Check the input timing of the external zero-set signal.
Perform zero-setting while nothing is being fed through
on the weigh conveyor.
E009 Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
the cables due to bumping.

2 Advanced Operations
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
Photocell signal is not Is there any product or something interrupting between
detected. the photocell and reflection plate?
If so, remove them.
Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.

3 Installation and Connection


Is the green LED on the photocell lit?
If it is not lit, the photocell might be faulty or a cable
might be disconnected. Call Anritsu or its distributor for
service and request repair.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for that product before making
E011 adjustments.
Does only the green LED on the photocell light up when
a product is being fed through?
Adjust the photocell so that the following is observed.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
4 Maintenance

documentation for that product before making


adjustments.
Are the anchoring brackets for the photocell and
reflection plate tightened?
Fix the brackets in place.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
5 Appendix

317
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
A mass was detected A product might have been fed through on the weigh
without the photocell conveyor without interrupting the photocell. Adjust the
1 Basic Operations

being interrupted. photocell so that the following is observed.


* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for that product before making
adjustments.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): Off
▪ When no product is fed;
2 Advanced Operations

LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Did your body or clothes come into contact with the
weigh conveyor? Be careful not to touch the weigh
conveyor when operating the equipment.
Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts warped or
frayed? If so, replace the belt or cut the fraying so that
the frayed part of the belt does not interrupt the weigh
E013
conveyor photocell.
3 Installation and Connection

Is a conveyor or cable contact the weigh conveyor? A


conveyor or cable might contact the weigh conveyor if
the weigh conveyor is bumping. Adjust so that nothing
contact the weigh conveyor.
Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts dirty? If
they are dirty, clean them.
Is vibration produced by other devices or caused by
conveying items being transmitted to the equipment?
Prevent vibration from being transmitting to the
equipment. If the equipment is unstable, adjust the
4 Maintenance

adjustable feet to minimize bumping.


Is there vibration produced due to dirt, worn-out, or
deflection of the roller? Adjust or replace the roller to
avoid vibration.
Is wind from an air-conditioner or other devices blowing
to the equipment? Avoid wind from blowing to the
equipment.
RJ Operation Error Products might have been detected incorrectly. Stop the
Detected conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.
E015
5 Appendix

To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector is


A015
operating correctly. If this alarm occurs again, contact
your dealer's customer support.

318
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
RJ Error Detected Check the connection with the rejector. After checking
the connection, turn the motor on and then off again or

1 Basic Operations
E016 turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* For details, see the operation manual of the rejector.
RJ Output The circuit protector of the rejector output contact has
Overcurrent Error been activated to protect the device from overcurrent.
Detected Turn the main power supply off, and check that the
connection to the rejector is appropriate.
When connecting to devices other than those
E017

2 Advanced Operations
manufactured by Anritsu, check that the device is being
used at the rated voltage.
After checking this, restore the circuit protector. If this
error occurs again, contact your dealer's customer
support.
RJ Motor Overcurrent Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
Error Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E018
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.

3 Installation and Connection


RJ Motor Speed Error Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E019
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
RJ Error Detected An error has occurred in either the gate drive solenoid,
control board or connection cable of the rejector. Turn
E020 the motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
RJ Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the rejector manometer, 4 Maintenance
Detected and adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn
E021 the motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
RJ DC Power Voltage Turn the motor on and then off again or turn the main
E022 Error Detected power supply on again. If this error occurs again, the
parts must be replaced. Request repair.
RJ Gate Operation Check whether the gate is overloaded or the power
Error Detected supply of the rejector is on. After checking this, turn the
motor on and then off again or turn the main power
5 Appendix

E024
supply on again. After starting the rejector, check its
operation. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.

319
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
RJ CPU Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E025
Detected call Anritsu or its distributor for service
1 Basic Operations

Rejector Setting Error Re-adjustment of the rejector is required. Call Anritsu or


E026
its distributor for service
RJ Gate Actuator Turn off the main power supply and wait at least 15
Overheating Error minutes then turn it on again. If the RJ Gate does not
Detected work after power-on, contact your dealer's customer
support.
E027 * This error occurs when the gate is opened and closed
too frequently. The frequency of opening and closing
2 Advanced Operations

can be decreased by changing the rejection method


from Pulse to Hold or by lowering the production
capacity.
Overcurrent Error RJ is emergency stop mode. The parts in the controller
Detected at RJ Output unit must be replaced. Contact your dealer's customer
E028 Contact support.
* This error occurs when the fuse for the rejector output
contact blows.
+/- Limit Setting Error The current product setting is incorrect.
3 Installation and Connection

Check the following condition.


E029 * +Limit >= -Limit
* Reference Value + -Limit >= 0
* Reference Value + +Limit <= Weight Range
RJ Alarm Products may be stuck in the rejector or OK products
may have been rejected incorrectly. Take measures to
recheck the product.
E031
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A031
and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an OK product has not passed
4 Maintenance

through the photocell on the PASS side.


NG Prod. RJ Error NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.
Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the
product.
E032
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A032
and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an NG product has passed through
the photocell on the PASS side.
5 Appendix

320
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No Eval. Prod. NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.
Passed Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the

1 Basic Operations
product.
E033 To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A033 and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated
yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
RJ Alarm OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
measures to recheck the product.
E034

2 Advanced Operations
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A034 and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an OK product has passed through
the photocell on the NG side.
NG Prod. RJ Error Products may be stuck in the rejector or NG products
may have been fed in the OK direction. Stop the
conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.
E035
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A035
and rejector operation are correct.

3 Installation and Connection


* This appears if an NG product has not passed
through the photocell on the NG side.
No Eval. Prod. OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
Rejected measures to recheck the product.
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
E036
and rejector operation are correct.
A036
* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated
yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
Zero-set Error Auto-zero setting might have been performed while a
product was placed on the weigh conveyor.
4 Maintenance

Check that products have not been fed through


incorrectly and there is no product on the weigh
conveyor.
Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
E040
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
the cables due to bumping.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
5 Appendix

above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.

321
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Fine Adjust. Error Check that the measurement timing is correct, the
master product weight matches the setting value, and
1 Basic Operations

the measured value is within the range in which


E041
adjustment can be performed.
* The range in which adjustment can be performed is
usually 3%, or 30% if product weight is 50g or less.
Tare Overflow Remove the product and clear the tare storage count.
Check that the product blocks the photocell and product
E042 interval is kept.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
2 Advanced Operations

above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.


Tare Underflow Remove the product and clear the tare storage count.
Check that the product blocks the photocell and product
E043 interval is kept.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
The zero-point Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
deviates widely. motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
3 Installation and Connection

arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching


the cables due to bumping.
Check that nothing is placed on the weigh conveyor.
E049 After checking, perform zero-setting.
Are all the parts attached to the weigh conveyor?
Check that all the parts are attached to the conveyor,
referring to the instruction manual. After checking,
perform zero-setting.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
4 Maintenance

Parameter Error Unable to measure as product length input too long or


conveyor speed setting too fast.
E051 Check a setup of product length. If correct, reduce
conveyor speed.
* This error occurs when T1+T2 exceeds 13000.
Equipment was The power was turned off without resetting the
powered down without error/alarm. Click the reset button [//] on the top right of
E053
resetting the the screen and enter the password.
error/alarm.
5 Appendix

322
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the manometer, and
Detected adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn the

1 Basic Operations
E061 motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
NGBox Full NGBox has become full. NG products may not be fed
E070
correctly while NGBox remains full during production.
A070
Empty NGBox.
E072 NGBox Open NGBox is unlocked. Lock it.
A072

2 Advanced Operations
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ3 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ3 path. Stop the
E081 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ3 path
A081 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E082
path the RJ3 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.

3 Installation and Connection


A082
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E083
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
A083
inspected * Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ3 path.
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ1 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ1 path. Stop the
E084 reject path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ1 path 4 Maintenance
A084 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ1 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E085
the RJ1 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A085
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ1 path.
5 Appendix

323
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E086
1 Basic Operations

prod. not inspected the beginning for inspection.


A086
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ1 path.
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ5 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ5 path. Stop the
E087 reject path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ5 path
A087 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ5 path.
2 Advanced Operations

Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ5
the RJ5 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E088
the RJ5 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A088
* Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ5 path.
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ5
the RJ5 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E089
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
3 Installation and Connection

A089
inspected * Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ5 path.
Weighcell Error Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E101
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Zero Calibration Error Check the weighcell for the following and perform
sensitivity correction again.
▪ Nothing is placed
▪ No dirt or foreign objects are adhering
E102
4 Maintenance

▪ It is not touching the upstream/downstream conveyors


▪ All the parts are attached
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
Sens Correction Error Check that the weight of the master weight matches the
specified weight, and retry sensitivity correction.
E103
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Auto-sensitivity Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E107
Correction Error call Anritsu or its distributor for service
5 Appendix

324
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Weighcell Connection Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
Error indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E108

1 Basic Operations
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Weighcell Error Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E109
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
The zero-point The weighcell might be locked. Check that the lock is
deviates widely in the released.

2 Advanced Operations
negative direction. For how to release the lock, see the instruction manual.
After checking, perform zero-setting.
Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
E116 the cables due to bumping.
After checking, perform zero-setting.
Are all the parts attached to the weigh conveyor?

3 Installation and Connection


Check that all the parts are attached to the conveyor,
referring to the instruction manual. After checking,
perform zero-setting.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

325
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Overload of the Is the upstream conveyor touching the equipment?
carrying conveyor was The motor might have received an excessive load due
1 Basic Operations

detected. to contact with the upstream conveyor. Keep the


equipment away from the upstream conveyor.
Is there any dirt between the belt and support plate?
If there is dirt, wipe it off.
Is the conveyor belt tension is correct?
Adjust the belt tension by rotating the tension
E141 adjustment knob.
Is the belt leaning to one side?
2 Advanced Operations

Adjust the center of the belt to that of the conveyor.


Are the rollers, gears, or couplings worn out?
Adjust or replace the moving parts (such as rollers or
motors).
After checking, turn the main power on again.
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Carrying UNIT Error Carrying unit error. Remove all products from the
3 Installation and Connection

carrying unit, and check if there is a problem.


E161 After checking, turn the main power on again. If this
error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ3 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ3 path. Stop the
E281 reject path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ3 path
A281 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
4 Maintenance

Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E282
the RJ3 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A282
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of product in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E283
product not inspected the beginning for inspection.
A283
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ3 path.
5 Appendix

326
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ1 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ1 path. Stop the

1 Basic Operations
E284 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ1 path
A284 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ1 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E285
path the RJ1 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A285
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ1 path.

2 Advanced Operations
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E286
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
A286
inspected * Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ1 path.
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ5 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ5 path. Stop the
E287 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ5 path

3 Installation and Connection


A287 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ5 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ5
the RJ5 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E288
path the RJ5 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A288
* Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ5 path.
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ5
the RJ5 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E289
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
4 Maintenance

A289
inspected * Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ5 path.
Product length was Sorter detected a product length longer than the result
not correctly detected of multiplying the product length by the maximum
E290 by the sorter product length detection ratio. Multiple products may be
A290 sent onto the conveyor without any gap between them.
Make sure products are separated when placed on the
conveyor.
5 Appendix

327
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
RJ Photocell Alarm Is there anything (a product or other object) between the
photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations

If there is, remove it.


Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
2 Advanced Operations

adjustment.
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
E352 checking the following.
A352 * If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
adjustment.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
3 Installation and Connection

LED (Or): Off


▪ When no product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and
reflection plate stable?
Make sure that they are stable.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
4 Maintenance

Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed


Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of
the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
E401
and the network settings are correct. If this error occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
MD Head Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E509
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
5 Appendix

328
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Photocell Error Is there anything (a product or other object) between the
photocell and reflection plate?

1 Basic Operations
If there is, remove it.
Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing

2 Advanced Operations
adjustment.
E511
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
checking the following.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
adjustment.
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and

3 Installation and Connection


reflection plate stable?
Make sure that they are stable.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Head Sys. Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E524
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD TRX Unit Tuning Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E528
Reg. Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Send Output Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E541
again, contact your dealer's customer support. 4 Maintenance

MD Send Coil Current Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E542
Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
5 Appendix

329
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
MD Auto-balance Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector
Correction Error head?
1 Basic Operations

MD Head Sys. Error If there is, remove it.


This error may also occur when doing the following.
Check the situation.
E543 ▪ Inserting the product guide in and removing it from the
metal detector head
▪ Removing the conveyor part for cleaning, etc.
After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If the problem is not resolved even after checking
2 Advanced Operations

the above, contact your dealer's customer support.


MD TRX Unit Tuning Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector
Reg. Error head?
If there is, remove it.
This error may also occur when doing the following.
Check the situation.
E544 ▪ Inserting the product guide in and removing it from the
metal detector head
3 Installation and Connection

▪ Removing the conveyor part for cleaning, etc.


After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If the problem is not resolved even after checking
the above, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Send Output Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
E545 * This error occurs if setting conditions that exceed the
send output specifications continue for 10 or more
minutes.
Auto-setting Error The effect of the product fed in auto setting is too large.
Check the product does not contain any metal. After
4 Maintenance

E549 checking, perform auto setting with a normal product. If


this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
5 Appendix

330
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No Connection with Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables
MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not

1 Basic Operations
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the
MD-SIG02 is set below.
E550 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of
MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.

2 Advanced Operations
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E551
with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Communication The connection with the detector head is incorrect. The
with MD Head connection cable and connector may not be connected.
E552
Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E553
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.

3 Installation and Connection


No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E554
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E555
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E556
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E557
with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E558
with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
4 Maintenance

No Communication Detection might have been affected by external noise.


E559 with MD Head Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Communication with The detection operation may be affected by external
the metal detection noise and others. Turn ON the main power again. If this
E560
head cannot be made. error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service.
5 Appendix

331
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
MD Head Temp. Error The metal detector head temperature exceeds the
permitted limit. Inspection cannot continue.
1 Basic Operations

If this equipment is used in an environment in which the


temperature exceeds the upper limit (40ºC), lower the
E571 operating environment temperature or move the
equipment to another location. Turn the power supply
off, cool down the equipment sufficiently, and then start
using it again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.

MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
2 Advanced Operations

E572
* This error occurs due to a failure in the main power
supply.

MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
E573
* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply
to the board (PRE, POW).

MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
E574
3 Installation and Connection

* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply


for the SIG internal digital.

No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E580 with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.

No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
E581
* This error occurs when missing metal detector head
transmission data is detected.

MD Model Name Abnormal connection with detection head.


4 Maintenance

Incorrect The connected metal detector head is not available in


this device.
Check whether the model name of the metal detector
head is correct.
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the
E590 MD-SIG02 is set below.
▪ M5 S1:2, 2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
5 Appendix

MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of


MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.

332
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No Communication Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables
with MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not

1 Basic Operations
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the
MD-SIG02 is set below.
E609 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of
MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.

2 Advanced Operations
EXT-I/O(A) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E621
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(A):connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
EXT-I/O(B) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on

3 Installation and Connection


again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E622
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(B):connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
CW-TPC/BCD unit The function of option(External prod input, Trend
connection error. control, Measured value output) does not work. Turn the
main power on again. If this error occurs again, the unit
E623 might have failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for
service.
* If "CW-TPC/BCD:connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
4 Maintenance

MOT-CONT unit Ext conveyor does not work. Turn the main power on
connection error. again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E625 failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "MOT-CONT:connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
Network Connection Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Disconnected network is disconnected. Check whether the power
supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is
E930
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
5 Appendix

error occurs again after checking the above, contact


your dealer's customer support.

333
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Dbl. Product Alarm The next product moved into the weighcell before the
product weight was measured.
A001
1 Basic Operations

The alarm is canceled automatically when the product


interval becomes normal.
RJ Capacity The interval between products exceeds the rejection
Exceeded. capacity. The alarm is released automatically when the
A002 interval is adjusted to the correct value. If this alarm
occurs frequently, expand the interval between
products.
Average(+) Alarm The average value exceeds the batch + limit.
2 Advanced Operations

A003 The alarm is canceled automatically when the average


value falls within the range.
Average(-) Alarm The average value is less than the batch - limit.
A004 The alarm is canceled automatically when the average
value falls within the range.
Mean weight of pass The mean weight of pass products is less than the
product is less than reference weight.
A005
ref. Value. This alarm is released automatically when the mean
weight becomes the reference weight or more.
3 Installation and Connection

Statistics Overflow More than 1 million products cannot be registered in the


A006
statistics. Clear the statistics.
NG Rate Alarm The specified NG rate is exceeded. The alarm is
A007 released automatically when the NG rate falls below the
specified value.
Checkweigher Remove all products from the conveyor, and reset this
A010 operation has been alarm.
stopped.
Auto zero-setting The alarm is canceled automatically when the product
A011
Alarm interval becomes longer. Widen the product interval.
4 Maintenance

CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product


Exceeded interval.
A012 * This alarm occurs when 10 or more products are
tested simultaneously until rejection starts after the
product is evaluated.
Backup Battery Alarm The backup battery must be replaced. Contact your
A014
dealer's customer support.
Watchdog Alarm Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A016 again, the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its
5 Appendix

distributor for service

334
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Ope. Check Operation cannot be started since an operation check
A018
Untouched has not been performed. Perform an operation check.

1 Basic Operations
Controller Comm. Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A023
Timeout again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
The product length is A product that is shorter than "Product Length x
short. P.Len.Detection Multi.(-Lim)" is detected. The number of
product packs might not match the specified number.
(For example, 2-pack products are fed while the setting
is 3.) Check the packing machine.
The products might have become misaligned while

2 Advanced Operations
A037 being conveyed. Either attach a product guide to align
the products, or change the settings below to specify a
minimum product length that is equal to or more than a
value of "Product Length x P.Len.Detection Multi.(-Lim)".
▪ Product length
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(-Lim)
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(+Lim)
The product length is A product that is longer than "Product Length x
exceeded. P.Len.Detection Multi.(+Lim)" has been detected. The

3 Installation and Connection


products might have been conveyed too close together.
Keep sufficient gaps between products when conveying
them.
The packing might not have been removed properly.
Check the packing machine.

A038 Product was processed as failed product because it


reached the rejector before its back edge was detected.
Either attach a work guide to minimize balance loss, or
change the settings below to specify a maximum
product length equal to or less than "Product Length x
P.Len.Detection Multi.(+Lim)".
4 Maintenance

▪ Product length
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(-Lim)
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(+Lim)
5 Appendix

335
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Can not recognize the The products might have been conveyed too close
product Length together. Keep sufficient gaps between products when
1 Basic Operations

conveying them.
The product length setting might be too long. Check if
the length is proper.
▪ Product length
A039
If the stop measurement option is used, the product
length setting might be too short. Check if the length is
proper. If the specified product length is too short, the
measurement stop timing becomes too fast to be
2 Advanced Operations

performed correctly.
▪ Product length
CW Capacity Turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
Exceeded occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
A051 * This alarm occurs if 50 or more products have been
fed through during the time between T2 (Scale
balance time) and T3 (Rejector delay time).
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.
3 Installation and Connection

A052
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T2 (Scale balance time).
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T3 (Rejector delay time). This
A053
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through between T3 (Rejector delay time) and T4
(Rejector operation time) when the ranking shift
function (option) is used.
4 Maintenance

CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval


Exceeded between products.
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T4 (Rejector operation time). This
A054
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through during T4 (Rejector operation time) or T7 (RJ
check delay time) when the RJ check function
(option) is used.
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.
5 Appendix

A055 * This alarm occurs if 10 or more products are


inspected at the same time between product
evaluation and the start of rejection.

336
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product
A061
Exceeded interval.

1 Basic Operations
CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product
A062
Exceeded interval.
I/O Output signal On An I/O output signal whose output type is set to Hold 2
A071 has turned on. When this alarm is reset, the I/O output
signal turns off.
A101 Comm. Alarm Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
A102
If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor

2 Advanced Operations
A103 for service
A104
A105
A106 CW Capacity Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
Exceeded again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
A107
A111 Weighcell Alarm Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
A112
If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor

3 Installation and Connection


A113 for service
A114
A115
- Overflow Alarm Overflow occurred at measurement or during
zero-setting. When the multi-range function is used,
select the larger weight range.
A121
If the largest range is already selected or the multi-range
function is disabled, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
+ Overflow Alarm Overflow occurred at measurement or during
4 Maintenance
zero-setting. When the multi-range function is used,
select the larger weight range.
A122
If the largest range is already selected or the multi-range
function is disabled, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Printer Paper Out The printer is out of recording paper. Refill the printer
A152
with paper.
Printer error Check whether the printer is connected. After checking,
A153 turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs again,
call Anritsu or its distributor for service
5 Appendix

337
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.
Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
1 Basic Operations

batch size, etc.


A154 ▪ Printing may have been attempted while there was no
paper.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.
Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
batch size, etc.
2 Advanced Operations

A155 ▪ Printing may have been attempted while there was no


paper.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
Printer Error (Paper Check that no paper jam occurred and paper is in place.
Out) After checking, turn the main power on again. If this
A156
alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Printer Connection Check that the printer is connected. After checking this,
3 Installation and Connection

A157 Error turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A303
contact your dealer's customer support.
* This is an error that occurs during the communication
process.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
4 Maintenance

A304 contact your dealer's customer support.


* This alarm occurs if the received data is incorrect or if
the data is received at a time when the device cannot
handle the data.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A305
contact your dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
5 Appendix

spontaneous output.

338
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main

1 Basic Operations
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A306
contact your dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
response.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A307
contact your dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the flow control is RTS, and CTS

2 Advanced Operations
is inactive.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A308
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A309
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs

3 Installation and Connection


A311
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
spontaneous output.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
A314
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the flow control is RTS, and CTS
is inactive.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and 4 Maintenance
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
A315 turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* The serial I/O unit is disconnected.
Serial 3 (B) Comm. Check that the serial 3 (B) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
A321
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
spontaneous output.
5 Appendix

339
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Serial 3 (B) Comm. Check that the serial 3 (B) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
1 Basic Operations

turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs


A324
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the flow control is RTS, and CTS
is inactive.
Serial 3 (B) Comm. Check that the serial 3 (B) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
A325 turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* The serial I/O unit is disconnected.
2 Advanced Operations

Serial 2 (A)/3 (B) Check the connection of the KWU2507A. After checking
A332 Connection Error this, turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Serial Comm. Send The data cannot be sent due to a send buffer overflow.
Error Check that all serial cables and connectors connecting
the KWU2507 and external devices are connected
A333
correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your
3 Installation and Connection

dealer's customer support.


Emergency Stop The emergency switch was pressed. Return the switch
A361
Switch Pressed to its original position to start production.
RJ Emergency Stop The emergency switch of the rejector was pressed.
A362 Switch Pressed Return the switch to its original position to start
production.
USB Memory Access Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
Error standards and is securely inserted, and that it is not
A370 faulty. After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your dealer's
customer support.
4 Maintenance

No USB Memory Insert a USB memory.


A371
Inserted
USB Memory Read Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
Error standards and is securely inserted, and that it is not
A373
faulty. If this alarm occurs again after checking the
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
USB Memory Write Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
Error standards and is securely inserted, and that it is not
A374
faulty. If this alarm occurs again after checking the
5 Appendix

above, contact your dealer's customer support.

340
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No USB Memory Free There is no free space for writing data to a file in the
Space USB memory. Increase the free space of the USB
A375

1 Basic Operations
memory by taking measures such as transferring the
data on the USB memory to another location.
USB Memory Access The files are either not in the USB memory, the number
Error of files exceeds the number that can be stored in the
A376
directory, or the file attributes are invalid. Clean up the
data in the USB memory.
USB Memory Output Check USB Memory is not faulty, and make output
A380 buffer full occurs setting again. If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or

2 Advanced Operations
its distributor for service
USB Memory Full Transfer data while there is still free space in the USB
A381
memory.
USB Memory Format Check that the USB memory is securely inserted and
Error that it is not faulty. If this alarm occurs again after
A382
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
No USB Memory The operation stopped because a USB memory is not
A383 Inserted inserted. Insert a USB memory, and then restart the

3 Installation and Connection


operation.
No USB Memory Free The operation stopped because there is not enough free
Space space on the USB memory to write a file. Increase the
A384 free space of the USB memory by taking measures such
as transferring the data on the USB memory to another
location, and then restart the operation.
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
A403
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support. 4 Maintenance
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your
A404 dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the received data is incorrect or if
the data is received at a time when the device cannot
handle the data.
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your
5 Appendix

A405
dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
spontaneous output.

341
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
1 Basic Operations

on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your


A406
dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
response.
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your
A407
dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if Ethernet connections are not
2 Advanced Operations

established at transmission.
Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed
Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of
the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
A411
and the network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
NTP Time Sync Error A time lag may have occurred between the main unit
3 Installation and Connection

and PC, adversely affecting functions such as data


recording. Check whether the power supply of the NTP
A430 server is on, the network cable is connected, and the
network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again
after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
MD Dbl. Product Feed products so that the interval is 280 mm or more.
Alarm The alarm is released automatically when the product
interval is adjusted to the correct value.
A501
* This alarm occurs if the next product is fed through
before evaluation is performed when performing a
4 Maintenance

missing product check.


MD Performance If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Capacity Exceeded between products.
A504
* This alarm occurs if 11 or more products are fed
through before rejection is performed.
5 Appendix

342
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
An MD Prod. Length Exceeded error has been detected
at the MD head photocell. The products might have

1 Basic Operations
been conveyed too close together. Keep sufficient gaps
between products when conveying them.
Products cannot be inspected correctly immediately
after operation is started or the product is changed. Wait
for a while (noise mask time) before feeding products.
A product might have been fed on the weigh conveyor
without interrupting the MD head photocell. Adjust the
MD head photocell so that the following is observed.

2 Advanced Operations
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
Can not recognize the
A505 documentation for that product before making
MD product length
adjustments.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): Off
▪ When no product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On

3 Installation and Connection


Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts warped or
frayed? If so, replace the belt or cut the fraying so that
the frayed part of the belt does not interrupt the weigh
conveyor photocell.
High MD Head Temp. If this equipment is used in an environment in which the
temperature exceeds the upper limit (40ºC), lower the
operating environment temperature or move the
A570
equipment to another location. If this alarm occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
4 Maintenance
No Recognition of Evaluation failed because the product length was not
A604 Prod. Length correctly recognized. Specify a product length longer
than the actual length.
Prod Jam or Length The products may have been conveyed too close
NG Error together. If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the
interval between products.
The products may have become misaligned while being
A605 conveyed. Attach a product guide to align the products,
or specify a product length longer than the actual length.
Check and adjust the RJ delay time.
5 Appendix

* This error occurs if evaluation is not completed by end


of T3 (Rejector delay time).

343
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Prod. Eval. Error Products might have been fed through immediately after
the start of operation. Take measures to prevent
1 Basic Operations

products from being fed through for about 1 second after


A606 the start of operation (noise masking time), and then
restart production.
* This error occurs if the photocell is blocked during the
noise masking time.
RJ Interlock Error The side cover or an optional safety device such as the
conveyor cover may be open. Check that the covers are
A906 in their proper positions. After checking this, turn the
motor on and then off again or turn the main power
2 Advanced Operations

supply on again.
Network Connection Check whether the power supplies of the PC and hub
Disconnected are on, the network cable is connected, and the network
A930 settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again after
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
Data Accum. Start at Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Network Disconnect network is disconnected. Check whether the power
3 Installation and Connection

supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is


A955
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
alarm occurs again after checking the above, contact
your dealer's customer support.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

344
Error Messages and Solutions
■ Handling of the E008, E009, E040, E049, E116
If the weight value displayed on the screen is not "0" even after the [Zero-set]
button is tapped with nothing on the weighcell, perform a weighcell self-check.
A weighcell self-check can also be performed from the error message screens E008,

1 Basic Operations
E009, E040, E049, and E116.

■ Be sure to stop the operation before using this feature.


■ Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.

1 From the Menu screen, select "Maint. and Setting", "Unit/connected device set.",
"Weighcell", and then "Weighcell check".

2 Advanced Operations
2 Press the [Execute] button with nothing
on the weighcell, and then follow the
screen instructions.

If the error is not resolved even after


performing a weighcell self-check,
perform sensitivity correction.

 P. 94 Sensitivity correction

3 Installation and Connection


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

345
Error Messages and Solutions
■ Using the E017 RJ Output Overcurrent Error (When RJ-I/F unit option is
used)
When overcurrent flows at the RJ Output Contact, the circuit protector is actuated and
E017 error is display. Restore status the circuit protector by the following steps.
1 Basic Operations

Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning is turned to the OFF position.

1 Remove the back panel of the indicator.


 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment
2 Advanced Operations

2 Check the connection of rejector, confirm that the load at RJ Output is within the rated
current.

 P. 389 RJ Output Specification

Rectify the causes if any faulty connection or overload at contact point is observed.

3 Push button at protector Q1.


Back Panel opened
3 Installation and Connection

⇒ Restored from overcurrent trip RJ-I/F unit


1234

status. Q1

RJ-I/F
Button

Q1 Q1
Pushed
Overcurrent Normal
trip status status
4 Maintenance

4 Install the back panel.


 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment

5 Turn on the power switch.


6 Check rejector operation by feeding OK/NG products.
If the rejection is not properly done, or actuates when RJ Output is OFF, request a
repair.
5 Appendix

346
Error Messages and Solutions
■ Handling of the E003, A014
The life of the memory backup battery of this checkweigher is approximately 5 years.
When “E003 Backup Battery Error” or "A014 Backup Battery Alarm" is displayed, the

1 Basic Operations
memory backup battery needs to be replaced. Contact Anritsu promptly for a
replacement.

■ If the checkweigher is operated continually with a low memory backup battery, the memory
may get lost.
■ A graphite fluoride lithium battery is used as a memory backup battery. For replacement,
contact Anritsu.
■ The memory backup battery is a recyclable resource. After use, please return to Anritsu

2 Advanced Operations
representative.

Warning Before removing the battery, make sure to turn the power off.

(For equipment maintenance personnel)


1 Remove the back panel of the indicator.

3 Installation and Connection


 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment When the back panel is removed
Memory
backup
2 Remove the connector from X1 of the battery

MPU2010 unit.
X1 Connector

3 Open the battery holder, and remove the MPU2010 unit


memory backup battery.
MPU2010 Open
unit
After the memory backup battery is removed, install a new
4 Maintenance

one immediately. Otherwise, the memory may get lost. Battery holder

4 Install a new memory backup battery to the battery


Close
holder, and close the battery holder.

Battery holder

5 Insert the connector to X1 of the MPU2010 unit.

6 Install the back panel.


5 Appendix

 P. 266 Connecting External Equipment

347
Adjusting Photocell
Adjusting Photocell

The photocell does not need to be adjusted because it is adjusted to the appropriate
position when shipped.
Its response when a product is detected and when it is not detected are as follows:
1 Basic Operations

Operation indicator lamp (orange)


Detection state Photocell state
Operation button
Detection (the product is blocking optical axis)
Lamp
Reflection Stability indicator
Photocell Product plate* lamp (green)
Green:
ON
Orange:
OFF
2 Advanced Operations

No detection (no product exists)


Lamp
Photocell Reflection plate*
Green:
ON
Orange:
ON

*: Install the reflection plate and photocell parallel to each other.


3 Installation and Connection

■ To perform fine-tuning according to the characteristics of a product, perform the "Advanced


Adjustments".
 P. 350 Advanced Adjustments
■ If the stability indicator lamp (green) is off, perform the "Adjustments When the Photocell Does
Not Operate".
 P. 349 Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
■ If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is off while there are no products on the conveyor,
align the phototransmitter and reflection plate so that they are parallel to each other.
■ If both the stability indicator lamp (green) and operation indicator lamp (orange) are off while
there are no product on the conveyor, the photocell may be defective, or the photocell cable
connector may be disconnected. Contact Anritsu.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

348
Adjusting Photocell
■ Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
1 Initialize the photocell.
Press the operation button, and hold it until the stability
indicator lamp (green) starts to blink.

1 Basic Operations
Operation button
Green
⇒ The settings have been initialized. lamp
Orange blinks
lamp
blinks
2 Set the output state of the signal.
Press the operation button 5 times; the orange
operation indicator lamp will start blinking.
Orange

2 Advanced Operations
lamp
Photocell state Setting blinks

Orange lamp blinks ON upon entrance of light


Press the operation button
5 times to toggle the setting.

Green lamp blinks ON upon blocking of light

3 Installation and Connection


3 Adjust the sensitivity.
Orange
lamp
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.

(2) Press the operation button once.


Green:
⇒ After the operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability ON
indicator lamp (green) turn off, the stability indicator Orange:
ON
lamp (green) and operation indicator lamp (orange)
turns on.
4 Maintenance

4 Check the photocell operation.


Make sure that the orange operation indicator lamp turns off when a product blocks
the optical axis.
Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor.
5 Appendix

349
Adjusting Photocell
■ Advanced Adjustments
For shiny or highly transparent products, or when detection is unstable, make
adjustments based on the characteristics of the products being measured.
1 Basic Operations

Operation button
1 Perform the settings.
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation Orange lamp
blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.
Green lamp
(2) Press the operation button, and hold it until both the operation blinks
indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) start Orange
lamp blinks
to blink.
2 Advanced Operations

(3) Block the photocell with the products, and press the operation Off
Off
button.

⇒ The operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) turn off.

2 Check the photocell operation.


Make sure that the operation indicator lamp (orange) turns off when a product blocks
the optical axis.
3 Installation and Connection

Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor.

If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is blinking after the adjustment, perform the adjustment
again as the detection is still unstable. If the situation cannot be improved by the adjustment, use
of an area sensor or transparent body sensor (optional) is recommended. Contact Anritsu.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

350
1 Basic Operations 2 Advanced Operations 3 Installation and Connection 4 Maintenance 5 Appendix

351
Memo
5 Appendix
Consumables 353

Spare Parts 364

Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block 384

External I/O Specifications 385

RJ Output Specification 389

RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications 390

Ethernet Connection 393

Timing Chart 395

Specifications 396

Copyright, etc. 606

CE Conformity Marking 607


5 Appendix

352
Consumables
Consumables

Use the Product number to place an order Product number.

■ SSV-h series

1 Basic Operations
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R

2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6005BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739D
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R

3 Installation and Connection


(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6006BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6206BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739E
KWS6206BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6006BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6411BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
KWS6411BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6411BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740F
KWS6411BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G 84G123704W
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

353
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
1 Basic Operations

84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS6411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740F
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W
2 Advanced Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6412BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6412BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6412BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740G
KWS6412BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
Drive belt 84G123704W
3 Installation and Connection

KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS6412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176704G
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

Drive belt 84G123704W


(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6414BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6414BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740H
KWS6414BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
5 Appendix

Drive belt 84G123704W


KWS6414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
(weigh conveyor section)

354
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K

1 Basic Operations
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS6414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740H
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W

2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349AN
KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740K
KWS6416BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123908J
KWS6416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt 84G123704W

3 Installation and Connection


KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349AN
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740L
KWS6417BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123908J
KWS6417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt 84G123704W
KWS6417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741H
KWS6003BF2E/3E/4E,
4 Maintenance
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6203BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
KWS6203BP2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF2G/3G/4G,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

355
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt 84G176741H
KWS6005BF2E/3E/4E,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6005BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739D
1 Basic Operations

KWS6205BP2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)


KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6005BP2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6205BP2G/3G/4G
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
2 Advanced Operations

84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS6205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739D
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G880590
3 Installation and Connection

(weigh conveyor section)


Conveyor belt 84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)

KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739E


KWS6006BP2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6206BP2E/3E/4E (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
4 Maintenance

(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K


84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS6206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739E
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
5 Appendix

Drive belt 84G880590


(weigh conveyor section)

356
Consumables

■ SSV-i series
Model Product name Product number Remarks

KWS5265BW3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt


84G901061R
KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)

1 Basic Operations
KWS5265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R 84G901127
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5366BW3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G901061R
KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5366BW2E/3E/5E,
KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E,
KWS5366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS6366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G901127J
(weigh conveyor section)

2 Advanced Operations
KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
Conveyor belt 84G901161T 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G901161AP 4K
84G901161U 5K
KWS5366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K 84G901161AS 7K
84G901161V 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127J

3 Installation and Connection


(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5472BW3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G901061R
KWS6472BW3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5472BW2E/3E/5E,
KWS6472BW2E/3E/5E,
KWS5472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS6472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G901127K
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G,
KWS6472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G
Conveyor belt 84G901161T 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G901161AP 4K
4 Maintenance

84G901161U 5K
KWS5472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K 84G901161AS 7K
84G901161V 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127K
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

357
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


KWS5476BW4D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G901061M
KWS5577BW4D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E,
1 Basic Operations

KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E,
KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G901127D
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
Conveyor belt 84G901161Y 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G901161X 6K
84G901161AM 7K
KWS5577BW4K/6K/7K/8K
2 Advanced Operations

84G901161S 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127D
(weigh conveyor section)

KWS5265BW2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt


84G901161AE
KWS6265BW2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G, Conveyor belt
KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G 84G901127
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G901161T 3K
3 Installation and Connection

(infeed conveyor section) 84G901161AP 4K


84G901161U 5K
KWS5265BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6265BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K 84G901161AS 7K
84G901161V 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127
(weigh conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

358
Consumables

■ SSV-f series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Conveyor belt
84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)

1 Basic Operations
KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G176739B
KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)

2 Advanced Operations
KWS5205BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G176739D
KWS5205BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)

3 Installation and Connection


KWS5206BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G176739E
KWS5206BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)

KWS5411BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt


84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5411BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS5411BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt
84G176740F
KWS5411BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
KWS5411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G 84G123704W
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

359
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
1 Basic Operations

84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS5411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740F
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W
2 Advanced Operations

(weigh conveyor section)

KWS5412BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt


84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5412BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt
84G176740G
KWS5412BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G 84G123704W
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection

Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K


(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS5412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740G
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

Drive belt 84G123704W


(weigh conveyor section)

KWS5414BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt


84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5414BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS5414BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt
84G176740H
KWS5414BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G 84G123704W
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

360
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K

1 Basic Operations
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS5414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740H
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W

2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
KWS5416BF4D/5D/6D, 84G141349AN
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt
84G176740K
KWS5416BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G 84G123704W

3 Installation and Connection


(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
KWS5417BF4D/5D/6D, 84G141349AN
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS5417BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt
84G176740L
KWS5417BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
KWS5417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G 84G123704W
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
KWS5522BF4D/5D/6D, 84G141349AN 4 Maintenance
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS5522BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt
84H127744L
KWS5522BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5522BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
KWS5522BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5522BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G 84G145865S
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

361
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt
KWS5524BF4D/5D/6D, 84G141349AN
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5524BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS5524BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt
1 Basic Operations

84H127744M
KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G 84G145865S
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G270466K 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G270466M 6K
2 Advanced Operations

84G270466N 7K
84G270466P 8K
KWS5524BF4K/6K/7K/8K, Conveyor belt 84H127744M
KWS5524BP4K/6K/7K/8K (weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G145865S
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection

Conveyor belt
84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)

KWS5203BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt


84G176739B
KWS5203BP2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5203BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt
KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

KWS5205BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt


84G176739D
KWS5205BP2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5205BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt
KWS5205BP2G/3G/4G 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix

362
Consumables

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K

1 Basic Operations
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS5205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739D
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G880590

2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)

KWS5206BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt


84G176739E
KWS5206BP2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5206BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt
KWS5206BP2G/3G/4G 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590

3 Installation and Connection


(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K

KWS5206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739E
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

Drive belt 84G880590


(weigh conveyor section)

■ Common to SSV series


Product name Product number Remarks
Printer paper 84G134077 Optional
Backup lithium battery BR-2/3AC2P 84Z166631
5 Appendix

363
Spare Parts
Spare Parts

■ SSV-h series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
1 Basic Operations

Drive roller 839H176780


(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D Motor 839H176755C
2 Advanced Operations

(infeed conveyor section)


Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780C
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection

KWS6005BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6006BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS6206BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BP3D/5D/6D
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

364
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176790

1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)

KWS6411BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176807


KWS6411BP3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6412BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176795
KWS6412BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6414BF3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS6414BP3D/5D/6D (infeed conveyor section)

2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176755
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H149527F
KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BP4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H176790E
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6417BP4D/5D/6D,
Driven roller 839H149530F

3 Installation and Connection


KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H176795E
KWS6417BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 83G901478
KWS6416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Motor 839H176755
KWS6417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS6417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G Gear head 83G901129
4 Maintenance

(infeed conveyor section)


5 Appendix

365
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H228310
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


KWS6003BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H228311
KWS6203BF2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6203BF2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805F
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6005BF2E/3E/4E, Drive roller 839H228310
KWS6005BP2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E,
Drive roller 839H176780C
KWS6006BP2E/3E/4E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E,
Driven roller 839H228311
3 Installation and Connection

KWS6205BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6005BP2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6006BF2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP2G/3G/4G,
Motor 839H176750
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6206BF2G/3G/4G, Tension roller 833H151805F
KWS6206BP2G/3G/4G (infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

366
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


KWS6411BF2E/3E/5E, Drive roller 839H176806
KWS6411BP2E/3E/5E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6412BF2E/3E/5E,
Drive roller 839H176790

1 Basic Operations
KWS6412BP2E/3E/5E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6414BP2E/3E/5E, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176795
KWS6412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,

2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176755
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Tension roller 833H151805
KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
Drive roller 839H279405F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K
Drive roller 839H176790

3 Installation and Connection


(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279406F 3K, 4K, 5K
KWS6411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
KWS6411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, Driven roller 839H176795
KWS6412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
Motor 839H176755D
KWS6414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755
(weigh conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
Tension roller 839H627025F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K
5 Appendix

367
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780C
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Driven roller 839H176807
3 Installation and Connection

KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

368
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279405F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K

1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H176780C
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279406F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
KWS6205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K
Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)

2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K

■ SSV-i series
Model Product name Product number Remarks

3 Installation and Connection


Drive roller 839H185550D
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 84Y185932
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555D
(infeed conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H168530
KWS5265BW3D/5D/6D,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D
Motor 839H185610B
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix

369
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H185550D
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 84Y185932C
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


Driven roller 839H185555D
(infeed conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185545C
KWS5366BW3D/5D/6D,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D
Motor 839H185610B
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H185550D
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550C
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection

Driven roller 839H185555D


(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5472BW3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H185555C
KWS6472BW3D/5D/6D (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610C
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

370
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H185550F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550E

1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555F
(infeed conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5476BW4D/5D/6D
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610C
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)

2 Advanced Operations
Tension roller 839H167675B
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H185550F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550E
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555F

3 Installation and Connection


(infeed conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5577BW4D/5D/6D
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610D
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Tension roller 839H167675B
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

371
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279305H
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 84Y185932
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


Driven roller 839H279306
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5265BW2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H168530
KWS6265BW2E/3E/4E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G,
Motor 839H185610B
KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675E
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305J
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 84Y185932C
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection

Driven roller 839H279306B


KWS5366BW2E/3E/5E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E, Driven roller 839H185545C
KWS5366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Motor 839H185610B
KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G (infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix

372
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279305F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279305G 5K

1 Basic Operations
839H279305E 7K
839H279305B 8K
Drive roller 84Y185932C
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 5K
839H279306E 7K
839H279306B 8K

2 Advanced Operations
KWS5366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Driven roller 839H185545C
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610B
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675H 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section)

3 Installation and Connection


839H279330D 5K
839H167675J 7K
839H279330E 8K
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305J
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550C
(weigh conveyor section)

KWS5472BW2E/3E/5E, Driven roller 839H279306B


KWS6472BW2E/3E/5E, (infeed conveyor section) 4 Maintenance
KWS5472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H185555C
KWS6472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G, Motor 839H185610C
KWS6472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G (infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
DIsk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix

373
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279305F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279305G 5K
1 Basic Operations

839H279305E 7K
839H279305B 8K
Drive roller 839H185550C
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 5K
839H279306E 7K
KWS5472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 839H279306B 8K
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Driven roller 839H185555C


(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610C
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Tension roller 839H167675H 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279330D 5K
3 Installation and Connection

839H167675J 7K
839H279330E 8K
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305K
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550E
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306C
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E,
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
4 Maintenance

(weigh conveyor section)


KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
Motor 839H185610C
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Tension roller 839H167675B
(infeed conveyor section)
DIsk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix

374
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279305K
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550E

1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306C
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E,
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
Motor 839H185610D
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)

2 Advanced Operations
Tension roller 839H167675B
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305F 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279305G 6K
839H279305E 7K
839H279305B 8K

3 Installation and Connection


Drive roller 839H185550E
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 6K
839H279306E 7K

KWS5577BW4K/6K/7K/8K 839H279306B 8K
Driven roller 839H185555E
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610D
(infeed/weigh conveyor
4 Maintenance
section)
Tension roller 839H167675H 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279330D 6K
839H167675J 7K
839H279330E 8K
Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix

375
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279305J
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 84Y185932
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


Driven roller 839H279306B
(infeed conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H168530
KWS5265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
Motor 839H185610B
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279305G 5K
839H279305E 7K
3 Installation and Connection

839H279305B 8K
Drive roller 84Y185932
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 5K
839H279306E 7K
839H279306B 8K
KWS5265BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6265BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Driven roller 839H168530
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610B
4 Maintenance

(infeed conveyor section)


Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675H 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279330D 5K
839H167675J 7K
839H279330E 8K
Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix

376
Spare Parts

■ SSV-f series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)

1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H176780B
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755C

2 Advanced Operations
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780D
(weigh conveyor section)

3 Installation and Connection


Driven roller 839H176807
KWS5205BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5205BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785D
KWS5206BF3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5206BP3D/5D/6D Motor 839H176755C
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

377
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176790B
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)

KWS5411BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176807


KWS5411BP3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5412BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176795B
KWS5412BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5414BF3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS5414BP3D/5D/6D (infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H176755B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H149527F
KWS5416BF4D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BP4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H176790F
KWS5417BF4D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5417BP4D/5D/6D,
Driven roller 839H149530F
3 Installation and Connection

KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS5417BF2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H176795F
KWS5417BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 83G901478
KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Motor 839H176755B
KWS5417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G Gear head 83G901129
4 Maintenance

(infeed conveyor section)


5 Appendix

378
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H149527F
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BF4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H185880

1 Basic Operations
KWS5522BP4D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BF4D/5D/6D,
Driven roller 839H149530F
KWS5524BP4D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS5522BP2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H185885
KWS5524BF2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E, Motor 83G901478
KWS5522BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,

2 Advanced Operations
Motor 83G176769
KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Gear head 83G901129C
KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G (infeed conveyor section)
Gear head 83G176770
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H228310

3 Installation and Connection


(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780B
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H228311
KWS5203BF2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5203BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BF2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176750B
4 Maintenance

(weigh conveyor section)


Tension roller 833H151805F
(infeed conveyor section)
5 Appendix

379
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H228310
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780D
1 Basic Operations

(weigh conveyor section)


KWS5205BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS5205BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H228311
KWS5206BF2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5206BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785D
KWS5205BF2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5205BP2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS5206BF2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5206BP2G/3G/4G
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805F
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5411BF2E/3E/5E, Drive roller 839H176806
KWS5411BP2E/3E/5E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E,
Drive roller 839H176790B
KWS5412BP2E/3E/5E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5414BF2E/3E/5E,
Driven roller 839H176807
3 Installation and Connection

KWS5414BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS5411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176795B
KWS5412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS5414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Motor 839H176755B
KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS5412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Tension roller 833H151805
KWS5412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
4 Maintenance

KWS5414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
5 Appendix

380
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780B

1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)

2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780D
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807

3 Installation and Connection


KWS5205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785D
KWS5206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

381
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279405F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K
1 Basic Operations

Drive roller 839H176780D


(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279406F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
KWS5205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS5205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, Driven roller 839H176785D
KWS5206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K
Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations

Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K
Drive roller 839H279405F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K
Drive roller 839H176790B
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection

Driven roller 839H279406F 3K, 4K, 5K


KWS5411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
KWS5411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS5412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, Driven roller 839H176795B
KWS5412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
Motor 839H176755D
KWS5414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

839H627025E 7K, 8K
5 Appendix

382
Spare Parts

Model Product name Product number Remarks


Drive roller 839H279405F 4K, 6K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K

1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H185880
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279406F 4K, 6K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
Driven roller 839H185885
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BF4K/6K/7K/8K, Motor 83G901478
KWS5524BP4K/6K/7K/8K (infeed conveyor section)

2 Advanced Operations
Motor 83G176769
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 4K, 6K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K
Gear head 83G901129C
(infeed conveyor section)
Gear head 83G176770
(weigh conveyor section)

3 Installation and Connection


■ Common to SSV series
Product name Product number Remarks
USB memory 84Y204604C Optional
Sensor 84G901906

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

383
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block

When connecting the checkweigher to an external device or rejector, connect the cables
to the terminal block connector and push-type terminal block as described below.

■ Terminal Block Connector


1 Basic Operations

1 Remove the connector terminal block from


the unit.
Flat-bladed
2 Loosen the screws with a flat-bladed screwdriver
screwdriver and insert the cable.
Cable
3 Tighten the screws. *
*: For connection, remove the cable covering
4 Lightly pull the inserted cable to make sure material for the specified length.
2 Advanced Operations

it is secure.

5 Install the connector terminal block to the


unit.

■ Push-Type Terminal Block


Applicable
PT2.5-QUATTRO
terminal block
3 Installation and Connection

Single wire: 0.14 to 4 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG12)


Applicable Twisted wire: 0.14 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG14)
cable Remove 10 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to the
terminal block.

Terminal block
1 Press the tip of the square button of the
terminal block with the tip of a tool.

2 Insert the cable into the round hole while


holding down the square button.
4 Maintenance

Square button
3 Remove the tip of the tool from the square (for tool) Round hole
button. (for cable)

4 Lightly pull the inserted cable to make sure


Press the square
it is secure. button with the tip
of a tool.

*
When the cable cannot be inserted, press the AC power cable
square button firmly with a tool. for rejector
5 Appendix

*: A cable with rod terminal or twisted wire cable


(without rod terminal) can be connected.
When a twisted wire cable is used, remove the
cable covering material for the specified length.

384
External I/O Specifications
External I/O Specifications

1. I/O Points
The checkweigher can use external I/O control.
Standard + KCU2504A expansion I/O
Standard
(optional)

1 Basic Operations
Input
2 10
terminal
Output
2 10
terminal

2. I/O Specifications
Applicable Terminal block connector (Phoenix Contact MSTBT 2,

2 Advanced Operations
connector 5/8-ST-5, 08)
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Applicable (AWG24 to 12)
cable Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when
connecting to the terminal block connector.

For the procedure to connect to the X53 (terminal block connector), refer to "Connecting
the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block".

3 Installation and Connection


 P. 384 Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block

MPU2010 UNIT GPIO


X53

1 1
Output terminal
V63 2 2 OUT1 Relay contact ratings
3 3 250 Vac, 1A max.
30 Vdc, 1A max.
V64 4 4 OUT2

5 5 Power supply for Anritsu (for Warning lamp only)


4 Maintenance
+24 V

+24 V
V65
6 6
IN1
Input terminal
Use a contact with rated
V66 voltage of 30 Vdc and
7 7
IN2 a rated load of 5 mA or
8 8 more.
IN-COMMON
G(S)
For the input part, using in the fail safe
side is recommended so that breaks can
5 Appendix

be detected.

385
External I/O Specifications

■ Output (OUT1/OUT2) Diode


When used in a DC circuit
I1
1. Reference circuit Load
1 Basic Operations

2. Usage range V1

Voltage: V1  DC 5 to 30 V
Current: I1  0.01 to 1 A

3. Precautions Wiring must be 30 m or less


For a coil load, put a surge suppressor
diode in parallel with the load.
2 Advanced Operations

When used in an AC circuit Wiring must be 30 m or less


I2
1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range V2
Voltage: V2  AC250 V
Current: I2  1 A
Load
3. Precautions
For a coil load, put a CR (0.1 F, 1 kΩ) or
3 Installation and Connection

surge absorber in parallel with the load. CR (1 kΩ, 0.1μF)

■ Input (IN1/IN2)
1. Reference circuit
Relay contact

X53
Photocoupler
+24 V
5 mA Input switch
IN1 6
4 Maintenance

5 mA Input switch
IN2 7

G (S)
Wiring must be 30 m or less
MPU2010 UNIT
5 Appendix

386
External I/O Specifications

NPN transistor connection (sink type)

X53
4.7 K

1 Basic Operations
Internal circuit
+24 V
5 mA
6 or 7 NPN transistor

MPU2010 UNIT G (S)

2 Advanced Operations
NPN transistor output photocell (three-wire) connection

+24 V X53 Photocell


5
4.7 K
Internal circuit

Sensor main circuit


6 or 7 Control output

3 Installation and Connection


8

MPU2010 UNIT G (S)

PNP transistor connection (source type)


The input contact of the optional external I/O unit KCU2504A supports sink input
and source input. Use the KCU2504A for connection.
4 Maintenance
2. Precautions
Use the input switch and contact whose rated voltage is 30 VDC or higher and current
is 5 mA or more.
5 Appendix

387
External I/O Specifications

■ Emergency Stop Connection Specifications


Input for emergency stop is installed.
Connection
MPU2010 UNIT X29
location
1 Basic Operations

Applicable Phoenix Contact MC1.5/5-ST-3.5(SK1-5)


connector No contact is required because it is a terminal block connector.
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG28 to 16)
Applicable
Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to the terminal
cable
block connector.

+24 V
EMEG.SW
2 Advanced Operations

X29

1
For emergency stop; normally short-circuited.
Internal 2 Cannot be used when CE marking is supported.
circuit
When used as emergency stop input, use 1b contact, a
contact rating of 30 VDC or more, and rated load of 0.1 A
3 or more.
Cannot be used when an emergency stop switch is
3 Installation and Connection

+24 V G(S) installed.

Only for Anritsu rejector


4
DO NOT use for other use.

Checkweigher
MPU2010 unit

Example of emergency stop switch connection


4 Maintenance

+24 V
EMEG.SW
X29

Internal 2
circuit
5 Appendix

388
RJ Output Specification
RJ Output Specification

It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 24VDC interface.

■ Output Specifications

1 Basic Operations
Applicable Hirose Electric DF1B-20DS-2.5RC
connector (not provided with this checkweigher)

MPU2010 UNIT
RJ X45
RJ output
FET 3
V58 RJ1

4
V59 RJ2 FET contact rating
30 VDC,1 A or less

2 Advanced Operations
5
V61 RJ4

6
V62 RJ5
For Anritsu rejectors.
G(S)
Do not use for other
Photocoupler +5 V
7 purposes.
MOTOR ON Photocoupler
Emergency stop
contact rating
l 1
G(+24 V) +24 V
24 VC OUT
2

3 Installation and Connection


17 +24 VdC OUT
18
19
20
FG

G(S)

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

389
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications

It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 100 VAC interface or a rejector of another
manufacturer.

■ Output Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Applicable WIELAND 25.640.1853.0 (terminal block connector)


connector Installed in the RJ-I/F unit.
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.14-1.5 mm2 (AWG26-14)
Applicable
Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to
cable
the terminal block connector.

MPU2010 RJ-I/F UNIT


2 Advanced Operations

UNIT
REJECTOR X2
RJ X45 X1 TO MPU
1 FG
1 1 Rejector output
Photo MOS relay
2 2 3 RJ1
V2 Photo MOS Relay
Contact
4 RJ5 110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
V3
30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
3 Installation and Connection

16 RJ2 Photo MOS Relay Contact


V5
110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
17 RJ4 30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
V6 for 5-way rejection option
*: Only the K4 and K5 sockets
are mounted.
Q1 5 COMMON
Circuit protector

6
Relay Contact Rating
7 MOTOR ON 110 Vac, 2.5 A max.
8 30 Vdc, 2.5 A max.
19 19
Emergency stop relay
4 Maintenance

20 20 9
+24V Only for Anritsu rejector
10 DO NOT use for other
11 purposes.

G(S)
5 Appendix

390
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications

1. RJ-I/F Unit Position


When the back cover is opened

RJ-I/F unit

1 Basic Operations
K4
K5
REJECTOR
X2

2. 100 VAC Output Specifications

2 Advanced Operations
■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
1. Reference circuit
Photo MOS Relay I1
2. Usage range
Voltage: V1  AC110 V
V1
Current: I1  0.7 A (peak 1 A)
Load
3. Precautions
Checkweigher 1 kΩ 0.1 μF
Install the CR for surge absorber.

3 Installation and Connection


Use a capacitor with the rating of 600 Vdc
max.

■ Mot. ON Output
1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range I1
Voltage: V1  AC110 V
Current: I1  2.5 A 120 Ω Leak current
V1 IL is 5 mA or
0.1 μF
Leak current: IL  5 mA Load less 4 Maintenance

(AC100 V, 60 Hz) 1 kΩ 0.1 μF


Checkweigher
3. Precautions
Install the CR for surge absorber.
Use a capacitor with the rating of 600 Vdc
max.
5 Appendix

391
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications

3. 24 VDC Output Specifications


■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
1. Reference circuit Photo MOS Relay
1 Basic Operations

2. Usage range Load

Voltage: V1  DC30 V I1 V1
Current: I1  0.7 A (peak 1 A)

3. Precautions Checkweigher
Install the diode for surge absorber.

■ Mot. ON Output
2 Advanced Operations

1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range Load
120 Ω
Voltage: V1  DC30 V I1 V1
0.1 μF
Current: I1  2.5 A

3. Precautions Checkweigher
Install the diode for surge absorber.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

392
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet Connection

The standard specifications for this checkweigher include Ethernet (LAN) connection to
QUICCA.

■ Communication Specifications

1 Basic Operations
Item Description
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Applicable standard
100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u)
10 Mbps/100 Mbps auto switching
Bit rate
(100 Mbps preferred)
Communication method Full duplex
Manchester code (10BASE-T)

2 Advanced Operations
Coding method
4B5B/MLT-3 (100BASE-TX)
Access method CSMA/CD
Applicable protocol TCP, IP, ICMP, ARP, RARP
Connector shape RJ-45 (8P8C)
Pin number Signal name Name
1 TXD+ Transmitted data (+)
2 TXD- Transmitted data ()

3 Installation and Connection


3 RXD+ Received data (+)
Pin assignment 4  Disable
5  Disable
6 RXD- Received data ()
7  Disable
8  Disable
Cable length Order number
15 m 84J204319
Recommended cable 30 m 84J204320 4 Maintenance

Category 5 LAN straight cable (UTP)

■ LAN Cable Wiring


When the back cover is opened
MPU2010 UNIT
Item Description
X23
LAN1 ON when connected to
V5
V5 (Link LED) the network successfully
LINK LAN cable and communicating
V36
5 Appendix

SPD
V36 (Speed ON (orange): 100 Mbps
LED) OFF: 10 Mbps

393
Ethernet Connection

■ Text Specifications
CD-ROM : Click on the link below to see.
 Text Specifications
Booklet : You are liable for cost. Please contact Anritsu or its distributor for service.
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

394
Timing Chart
Timing Chart

Weight signal

1 Basic Operations
Detection signal
(Photocell)

T1 30~6500 ms
(Measurement delay)

10ms
Photocell-off delay

T2 (Scale balance) 40~6500 ms

2 Advanced Operations
T8
10~12500 ms
(Dbl. Prod Timer)

Evaluation time
20 ms

T3 1~9999 ms
(Rejectingdelay)

3 Installation and Connection


T4
(Rejecting operation) 45~9999 ms

Auto zero-setting
operation

T5
(Auto zero-setting 0~60000 ms
prohibition)

4 Maintenance

MIN 50 ms MIN 50 ms

External NG input
(EXNG/EXNG2)

Evaluation output
(external IO control output) 0~9999 ms
5 Appendix

395
Specifications
Specifications

■ SSV-h series
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6003BF3D, KWS6003BF5D, KWS6003BF2E, KWS6003BF3E,


Model KWS6003BF6D, KWS6003BP3D, KWS6003BF4E, KWS6003BP2E,
KWS6003BP5D, KWS6003BP6D KWS6003BP3E, KWS6003BP4E
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.001 g
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum speed *1 310 products/min


Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min
4 Maintenance

3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm


Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
sensitivity*3 3D:φ0.8 mm 5D:φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

396
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

397
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6003BF2R, KWS6003BF3R, KWS6003BF4R, KWS6003BF5R,


KWS6003BF6R
Model KWS6003BP2R, KWS6003BP3R, KWS6003BP4R, KWS6003BP5R,
KWS6003BP6R
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.001 g


Maximum speed *1 310 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 2R:5 to 50 mm 3R:5 to 80 mm 4R:5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R:5 to 150 mm 6R:5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R:109 kg 3R:108 kg 4R:111 kg 5R:113 kg 6R:114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

398
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

399
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6003BF2G, KWS6003BF3G, KWS6003BF4G


Model
KWS6003BP2G, KWS6003BP3G, KWS6003BP4G
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.001 g
Maximum speed *1 310 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

400
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

401
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6005BF3D, KWS6005BF5D, KWS6005BF2E, KWS6005BF3E,


Model KWS6005BF6D, KWS6005BP3D, KWS6005BF4E, KWS6005BP2E,
KWS6005BP5D, KWS6005BP6D KWS6005BP3E, KWS6005BP4E
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.001 g
Maximum speed *1 310 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

402
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

403
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6005BF2R, KWS6005BF3R, KWS6005BF4R, KWS6005BF5R,


KWS6005BF6R
Model KWS6005BP2R, KWS6005BP3R, KWS6005BP4R, KWS6005BP5R,
KWS6005BP6R
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.001 g


Maximum speed *1 310 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R:5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R:109 kg 3R:108 kg 4R:111 kg 5R:113 kg 6R:114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

404
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

405
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6005BF2G, KWS6005BF3G, KWS6005BF4G


Model
KWS6005BP2G, KWS6005BP3G, KWS6005BP4G
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.001 g
Maximum speed *1 310 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

406
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

407
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6006BF3D, KWS6006BF5D, KWS6006BF2E, KWS6006BF3E,


Model KWS6006BF6D, KWS6006BP3D, KWS6006BF4E, KWS6006BP2E,
KWS6006BP5D, KWS6006BP6D KWS6006BP3E, KWS6006BP4E
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.001 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 320 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

408
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

409
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6006BF2R, KWS6006BF3R, KWS6006BF4R, KWS6006BF5R,


KWS6006BF6R
Model KWS6006BP2R, KWS6006BP3R, KWS6006BP4R, KWS6006BP5R,
KWS6006BP6R
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.001 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 320 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

410
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

411
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6006BF2G, KWS6006BF3G, KWS6006BF4G


Model
KWS6006BP2G, KWS6006BP3G, KWS6006BP4G
Weighing range 0.4 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.001 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.01 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 320 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

412
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

413
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6203BF3D, KWS6203BF5D, KWS6203BF2E, KWS6203BF3E,


Model KWS6203BF6D, KWS6203BP3D, KWS6203BF4E, KWS6203BP2E,
KWS6203BP5D, KWS6203BP6D KWS6203BP3E, KWS6203BP4E
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

414
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

415
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6203BF2R, KWS6203BF3R, KWS6203BF4R, KWS6203BF5R,


KWS6203BF6R
Model KWS6203BP2R, KWS6203BP3R, KWS6203BP4R, KWS6203BP5R,
KWS6203BP6R
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.01 g


Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R:109 kg 3R:108 kg 4R:111 kg 5R:113 kg 6R:114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

416
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

417
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6203BF2G, KWS6203BF3G, KWS6203BF4G


Model
KWS6203BP2G, KWS6203BP3G, KWS6203BP4G
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

418
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

419
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6205BF3D, KWS6205BF5D, KWS6205BF2E, KWS6205BF3E,


Model KWS6205BF6D, KWS6205BP3D, KWS6205BF4E, KWS6205BP2E,
KWS6205BP5D, KWS6205BP6D KWS6205BP3E, KWS6205BP4E
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Length L58
Product
to 230 mm
size *2
3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm


Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

420
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

421
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6205BF2R, KWS6205BF3R, KWS6205BF4R, KWS6205BF5R,


KWS6205BF6R
Model KWS6205BP2R, KWS6205BP3R, KWS6205BP4R, KWS6205BP5R,
KWS6205BP6R
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.01 g


Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

422
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

423
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6205BF2G, KWS6205BF3G, KWS6205BF4G


Model
KWS6205BP2G, KWS6205BP3G, KWS6205BP4G
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

424
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

425
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6205BF3K, KWS6205BF4K, KWS6205BF5K, KWS6205BF7K,


KWS6205BF8K
Model KWS6205BP3K, KWS6205BP4K, KWS6205BP5K, KWS6205BP7K,
KWS6205BP8K
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.01 g


Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 58 to 230 mm
Height H 5 to 280 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

426
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

427
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6206BF3D, KWS6206BF5D, KWS6206BF2E, KWS6206BF3E,


Model KWS6206BF6D, KWS6206BP3D, KWS6206BF4E, KWS6206BP2E,
KWS6206BP5D, KWS6206BP6D KWS6206BP3E, KWS6206BP4E
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 320 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

428
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

429
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6206BF2R, KWS6206BF3R, KWS6206BF4R, KWS6206BF5R,


KWS6206BF6R
Model KWS6206BP2R, KWS6206BP3R, KWS6206BP4R, KWS6206BP5R,
KWS6206BP6R
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.01 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 320 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ 0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ 0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R:φ 0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

430
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

431
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6206BF2G, KWS6206BF3G, KWS6206BF4G


Model
KWS6206BP2G, KWS6206BP3G, KWS6206BP4G
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 320 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

432
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

433
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6206BF3K, KWS6206BF4K, KWS6206BF5K, KWS6206BF7K,


KWS6206BF8K
Model
KWS6206BP3K, KWS6206BP4K, KWS6206BP5K, KWS6206BP7K,
KWS6206BP8K
Weighing range 1.2 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.01 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.015 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 600.9 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 58 to 320 mm
Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

434
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

435
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6411BF3D, KWS6411BF5D, KWS6411BF2E, KWS6411BF3E,


Model KWS6411BF6D, KWS6411BP3D, KWS6411BF5E, KWS6411BP2E,
KWS6411BP5D, KWS6411BP6D KWS6411BP3E, KWS6411BP5E
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D:φ 0.5 mm 2E:φ0.35mm 3E:φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E:φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E:φ0.7 mm 3E:φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E:φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 101 kg 5D: 103 kg 6D: 104 kg 2E: 115 kg 3E: 115 kg 5E: 117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

436
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

437
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6411BF2R, KWS6411BF3R, KWS6411BF4R, KWS6411BF5R,


KWS6411BF6R
Model KWS6411BP2R, KWS6411BP3R, KWS6411BP4R, KWS6411BP5R,
KWS6411BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 112 kg 3R: 111 kg 4R: 114 kg 5R: 116 kg 6R: 117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

438
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

439
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6411BF2G, KWS6411BF3G, KWS6411BF4G, KWS6411BF5G,


KWS6411BF7G, KWS6411BF8G
Model KWS6411BP2G, KWS6411BP3G, KWS6411BP4G, KWS6411BP5G,
KWS6411BP7G, KWS6411BP8G
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 5G:5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G:5 to 150 mm 8G:5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm


Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:115 kg 3G:115 kg 4G:116 kg 5G:117 kg 7G:119kg 8G:120 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

440
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

441
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6411BF3K, KWS6411BF4K, KWS6411BF5K, KWS6411BF7K,


KWS6411BF8K
Model KWS6411BP3K, KWS6411BP4K, KWS6411BP5K, KWS6411BP7K,
KWS6411BP8K
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 400 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 65 to 230 mm
Height H 5 to 280 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:122 kg 4K:123 kg 5K:124 kg 7K:126 kg 8K:127 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

442
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

443
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6412BF3D, KWS6412BF5D, KWS6412BF2E, KWS6412BF3E,


Model KWS6412BF6D, KWS6412BP3D, KWS6412BF5E, KWS6412BP2E,
KWS6412BP5D, KWS6412BP6D KWS6412BP3E, KWS6412BP5E
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D:φ 0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 102 kg 5D: 104 kg 6D: 105 kg 2E: 116 kg 3E: 116 kg 5E: 118 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

444
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

445
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6412BF2R, KWS6412BF3R, KWS6412BF4R, KWS6412BF5R,


KWS6411BF6R
Model KWS6412BP2R, KWS6412BP3R, KWS6412BP4R, KWS6412BP5R,
KWS6412BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 320 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 113 kg 3R: 112 kg 4R: 115 kg 5R: 117 kg 6R: 118 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

446
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

447
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6412BF2G, KWS6412BF3G, KWS6412BF4G, KWS6412BF5G,


KWS6412BF7G, KWS6412BF8G
Model KWS6412BP2G, KWS6412BP3G, KWS6412BP4G, KWS6412BP5G,
KWS6412BP7G, KWS6412BP8G
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 320 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 5G:5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G:5 to 150 mm 8G:5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm


Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:116 kg 3G:116 kg 4G:117 kg 5G:118 kg 7G:120kg 8G:121 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

448
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

449
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6412BF3K, KWS6412BF4K, KWS6412BF5K, KWS6412BF7K,


KWS6412BF8K
Model KWS6412BP3K, KWS6412BP4K, KWS6412BP5K, KWS6412BP7K,
KWS6412BP8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 6 to 3000 g


Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 65 to 320 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:123 kg 4K:124 kg 5K:125 kg 7K:127 kg 8K:128 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

450
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

451
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6414BF3D, KWS6414BF5D, KWS6414BF2E, KWS6414BF3E,


Model KWS6414BF6D, KWS6414BP3D, KWS6414BF5E, KWS6414BP2E,
KWS6414BP5D, KWS6414BP6D KWS6414BP3E, KWS6414BP5E
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 103 kg 5D: 105 kg 6D: 106 kg 2E: 117 kg 3E: 117 kg 5E: 119 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

452
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

453
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6414BF2R, KWS6414BF3R, KWS6414BF4R, KWS6414BF5R,


KWS6414BF6R
Model KWS6414BP2R, KWS6414BP3R, KWS6414BP4R, KWS6414BP5R,
KWS6414BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 114 kg 3R: 113 kg 4R :116 kg 5R: 118 kg 6R: 119 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

454
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

455
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6414BF2G, KWS6414BF3G, KWS6414BF4G, KWS6414BF5G,


KWS6414BF7G, KWS6414BF8G
Model KWS6414BP2G, KWS6414BP3G, KWS6414BP4G, KWS6414BP5G,
KWS6414BP7G, KWS6414BP8G
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 5G:5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G:5 to 150 mm 8G:5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm


Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:117 kg 3G:117 kg 4G:118 kg 5G:119 kg 7G:121kg 8G:122 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

456
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

457
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6414BF3K, KWS6414BF4K, KWS6414BF5K, KWS6414BF7K,


KWS6414BF8K
Model KWS6414BP3K, KWS6414BP4K, KWS6414BP5K, KWS6414BP7K,
KWS6414BP8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 6 to 3000 g


Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 65 to 450 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:124 kg 4K:125 kg 5K:126 kg 7K:128 kg 8K:129 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

458
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

459
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6416BF4D, KWS6416BF5D, KWS6416BF2E, KWS6416BF4E,


Model KWS6416BF6D, KWS6416BP4D, KWS6416BF5E, KWS6416BP2E,
KWS6416BP5D, KWS6416BP6D KWS6416BP4E, KWS6416BP5E
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 210 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 350 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 100 mm 5D: 5 to 130 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 128 kg 5D: 130 kg 6D: 131 kg 2E: 146 kg 4E: 148 kg 5E: 152 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

460
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

461
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6416BF2R, KWS6416BF3R, KWS6416BF4R, KWS6416BF5R,


KWS6416BF6R
Model KWS6416BP2R, KWS6416BP3R, KWS6416BP4R, KWS6416BP5R,
KWS6416BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 210 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 350 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 100 mm 4R: 5 to 130 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 142 kg 3R: 143 kg 4R: 144 kg 5R: 146 kg 6R: 147 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

462
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

463
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6416BF2G, KWS6416BF4G, KWS6416BF6G, KWS6416BF7G,


KWS6416BF8G
Model KWS6416BP2G, KWS6416BP4G, KWS6416BP6G, KWS6416BP7G,
KWS6416BP8G
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 210 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 350 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 6G:5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G:5 to 150 mm 8G:5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 6G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:146 kg 4G:148 kg 6G:152 kg 7G:154 kg 8G:156 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

464
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

465
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6417BF4D, KWS6417BF5D, KWS6417BF2E, KWS6417BF4E,


Model KWS6417BF6D, KWS6417BP4D, KWS6417BF5E, KWS6417BP2E,
KWS6417BP5D, KWS6417BP6D KWS6417BP4E, KWS6417BP5E
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 170 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 100 mm 5D: 5 to 130 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 132 kg 5D: 134 kg 6D: 135 kg 2E: 150 kg 4E: 152 kg 5E: 156 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

466
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

467
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6417BF2R, KWS6417BF3R, KWS6417BF4R, KWS6417BF5R,


KWS6417BF6R
Model KWS6417BP2R, KWS6417BP3R, KWS6417BP4R, KWS6417BP5R,
KWS6417BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 170 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 100 mm 4R: 5 to 130 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 146 kg 3R: 147 kg 4R: 148 kg 5R: 150 kg 6R: 151 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

468
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

469
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6417BF2G, KWS6417BF4G, KWS6417BF6G, KWS6417BF7G,


KWS6417BF8G
Model KWS6417BP2G, KWS6417BP4G, KWS6417BP6G, KWS6417BP7G,
KWS6417BP8G
Weighing range 6 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 170 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 6G:5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G:5 to 150 mm 8G:5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 6G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:150 kg 4G:152 kg 6G:156 kg 7G:158 kg 8G:160 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

470
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

471
Specifications

■ SSV-i series
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6265BW3D, KWS6265BW5D, KWS6265BW2E, KWS6265BW3E,


Model
KWS6265BW6D KWS6265BW4E
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 601.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 68 to 200 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 75 mm 5D: 5 to 115 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 3E: 5 to 75 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 4E: 5 to 95 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
4 Maintenance

Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 106 kg 5D: 108 kg 6D: 109 kg 2E: 116 kg 3E: 116 kg 4E: 117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

472
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

473
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6265BW2R, KWS6265BW3R, KWS6265BW4R, KWS6265BW5R,


Model
KWS6265BW6R
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 601.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 68 to 200 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 75 mm 4R: 5 to 115 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 117 kg 3R: 116 kg 4R: 119 kg 5R: 121 kg 6R: 122 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

474
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

475
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

Model KWS6265BW2G, KWS6265BW3G, KWS6265BW4G


Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 601.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 68 to 200 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 45 mm 3G:5 to 75 mm 4G:5 to 95 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:116 kg 3G:116 kg 4G:117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

476
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

477
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6265BW3K, KWS6265BW4K, KWS6265BW5K, KWS6265BW7K,


Model
KWS6265BW8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 6 to 600 g


Scale interval 0.01 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 601.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 68 to 200 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:127 kg 4K:128 kg 5K:129 kg 7K:131 kg 8K:132 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

478
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

479
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6366BW3D, KWS6366BW5D, KWS6366BW2E, KWS6366BW3E,


Model
KWS6366BW6D KWS6366BW5E
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
Scale interval 0.02 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1201.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 68 to 320 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 75 mm 5D: 5 to 115 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 3E: 5 to 75 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 107 kg 5D: 109 kg 6D: 110 kg 2E: 121 kg 3E: 121 kg 5E: 123 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

480
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

481
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6366BW2R, KWS6366BW3R, KWS6366BW4R,KWS6366BW5R,


Model
KWS6366BW6R
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
Scale interval 0.02 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1201.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 68 to 320 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 75 mm 4R: 5 to 115 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R:φ 0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 118 kg 3R: 117 kg 4R: 120 kg 5R: 122 kg 6R: 123 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

482
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

483
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6366BW2G, KWS6366BW3G, KWS6366BW4G, KWS6366BW5G,


Model
KWS6366BW7G, KWS6366BW8G
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
Scale interval 0.02 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1201.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 68 to 320 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 45 mm 3G:5 to 75 mm 4G:5 to 95 mm
Height H 5G:5 to 115 mm 5G:5 to 145 mm 8G:5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:121 kg 3G:121 kg 4G:122 kg 5G:123 kg 7G:125 kg 8G:126 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

484
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

485
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6366BW3K, KWS6366BW4K, KWS6366BW5K, KWS6366BW7K,


Model
KWS6366BW8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 12 to 1200 g


Scale interval 0.02 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1201.8 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 68 to 320 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:128 kg 4K:129 kg 5K:130 kg 7K:132 kg 8K:133 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

486
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

487
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6472BW3D, KWS6472BW5D, KWS6472BW2E, KWS6472BW3E,


Model
KWS6472BW6D KWS6472BW5E
4
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *
Scale interval 0.05 g [0.02 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min *4
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g [1201.8 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 76 to 320 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 75 mm 5D: 5 to 115 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 3E: 5 to 75 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min * 4
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 108 kg 5D: 110 kg 6D: 111 kg 2E: 122 kg 3E: 122 kg 5E: 124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

488
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

489
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6472BW2R, KWS6472BW3R, KWS6472BW4R, KWS6472BW5R,


Model
KWS6472BW6R
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] * 4
Scale interval 0.05 g [0.02 g] * 4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min * 4
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g [1201.8 g] * 4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 76 to 320 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 75 mm 4R: 5 to 115 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min * 4
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 119 kg 3R: 118 kg 4R: 121 kg 5R: 123 kg 6R: 124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

490
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

491
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6472BW2G, KWS6472BW3G, KWS6472BW4G, KWS6472BW5G,


Model
KWS6472BW7G, KWS6472BW8G
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] * 4
Scale interval 0.05 g [0.02 g] * 4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min * 4
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g [1201.8 g] * 4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 76 to 320 mm
size *2 2G:5 to 45 mm 3G:5 to 75 mm 4G:5 to 95 mm
Height H 5G:5 to 115 mm 5G:5 to 145 mm 8G:5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min * 4
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:122 kg 3G:122 kg 4G:123 kg 5G:124 kg 7G:126 kg 8G:127 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

492
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

493
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS6472BW3K, KWS6472BW4K, KWS6472BW5K, KWS6472BW7K,


Model
KWS6472BW8K
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] * 4
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g [0.02 g] * 4


Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min * 4
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.1 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3004.5 g [1201.8 g] * 4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 76 to 320 mm
Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min * 4
4 Maintenance

Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:129 kg 4K:130 kg 5K:131 kg 7K:133 kg 8K:134 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

494
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

495
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5265BW3D, KWS5265BW5D, KWS5265BW2E, KWS5265BW3E,


Model
KWS5265BW6D KWS5265BW4E
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 68 to 200 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 75 mm 5D: 5 to 115 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 3E: 5 to 75 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 4E: 5 to 95 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 105 kg 5D: 107 kg 6D: 108 kg 2E: 115 kg 3E: 115 kg 4E: 116 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

496
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

497
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5265BW2R, KWS5265BW3R, KWS5265BW4R, KWS5265BW5R,


Model
KWS5265BW6R
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 68 to 200 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 75 mm 4R: 5 to 115 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 116 kg 3R: 115 kg 4R: 118 kg 5R: 120 kg 6R: 121 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

498
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

499
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

Model KWS5265BW2G, KWS5265BW3G, KWS5265BW4G


Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 68 to 200 mm
size *2
Height H 2G: 5 to 45 mm 3G: 5 to 75 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 115kg 3G: 115 kg 4G: 116 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

500
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

501
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5265BW3K, KWS5265BW4K, KWS5265BW5K, KWS5265BW7K,


Model
KWS5265BW8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 6 to 600 g


Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 280 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 68 to 200 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:126 kg 4K:127 kg 5K:128 kg 7K:130 kg 8K:131 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

502
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

503
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5366BW3D, KWS5366BW5D, KWS5366BW2E, KWS5366BW3E,


Model
KWS5366BW6D KWS5366BW5E
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1204.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 68 to 320 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 75 mm 5D: 5 to 115 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 3E: 5 to 75 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 107 kg 5D: 109 kg 6D: 110 kg 2E: 120 kg 3E: 120 kg 5E: 122 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

504
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

505
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5366BW2R, KWS5366BW3R, KWS5366BW4R, KWS5366BW5R,


Model
KWS5366BW6R
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1204.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 68 to 320 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 45 mm 3G: 5 to 75 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm
Height H
5G: 5 to 115 mm 7G: 5 to 145 mm 8G: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304
5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:120 kg 3G:120 kg 4G:121 kg 5G:122 kg 7G:124 kg 8G:125 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

506
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

507
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5366BW2G, KWS5366BW3G, KWS5366BW4G, KWS5366BW5G,


Model
KWS5366BW7G, KWS5366BW8G
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1204.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 68 to 320 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 45 mm 3G: 5 to 75 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm
Height H 5G: 5 to 115 mm 7G: 5 to 145 mm 8G: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:120 kg 3G:120 kg 4G:121 kg 5G:122 kg 7G:124 kg 8G:125 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

508
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

509
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5366BW3K, KWS5366BW4K, KWS5366BW5K, KWS5366BW7K,


Model
KWS5366BW8K
Weighing range 12 to 1200 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 1204.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 68 to 320 mm
Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
4 Maintenance

Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:127 kg 4K:128 kg 5K:129 kg 7K:131 kg 8K:132 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

510
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

511
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5472BW3D, KWS5472BW5D, KWS5472BW2E, KWS5472BW3E,


Model
KWS5472BW6D KWS5472BW5E
4
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *
Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min *4
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 76 to 320 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 75 mm 5D: 5 to 115 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 3E: 5 to 75 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min *4
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 107 kg 5D: 109 kg 6D: 110 kg 2E: 121 kg 3E: 121 kg 5E: 123 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

512
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

513
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5472BW2R, KWS5472BW3R, KWS5472BW4R, KWS5472BW5R,


Model
KWS5472BW6R
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *4
Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min *4
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 76 to 320 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 75 mm 4R: 5 to 115 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min *4
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 118 kg 3R: 117 kg 4R: 120 kg 5R: 122 kg 6R: 123 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

514
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

515
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5472BW2G, KWS5472BW3G, KWS5472BW4G, KWS5472BW5G,


Model
KWS5472BW7G, KWS5472BW8G
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *4
Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min *4
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 230 mm
Product Length L 76 to 320 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 45 mm 3G: 5 to 75 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm
Height H 5G: 5 to 115 mm 7G: 5 to 145 mm 8G: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min *4
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 7G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 121 kg 3G: 121 kg 4G: 122 kg 5G: 123 kg 7G: 125 kg 8G: 126 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

516
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

517
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5472BW3K, KWS5472BW4K, KWS5472BW5K, KWS5472BW7K,


Model
KWS5472BW8K
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *4
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4


Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min *4
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 76 to 320 mm
Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min *4
4 Maintenance

Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:128 kg 4K:129 kg 5K:130 kg 7K:132 kg 8K:133 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

518
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

519
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5476BW4D, KWS5476BW5D, KWS5476BW2E, KWS5476BW4E,


Model
KWS5476BW6D KWS5476BW5E
4
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *
Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 120 [155] products/min *4
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 95 mm 5D: 5 to 125 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 4E: 5 to 95 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 125 mm
Belt speed 7 to 65 [9 to 83] m/min *4
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4 mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 135 kg 5D: 137 kg 6D: 139 kg 2E: 153 kg 4E: 155 kg 5E: 159 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

520
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

521
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5476BW2R, KWS5476BW3R, KWS5476BW4R, KWS5476BW5R,


Model
KWS5476BW6R
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *4
Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 120 [155] products/min *4
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 95 mm 4R: 5 to 125 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 7 to 65 [9 to 83] m/min *4
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 149 kg 3R: 150 kg 4R: 151 kg 5R: 153 kg 6R: 154 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

522
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

523
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5476BW2G, KWS5476BW4G, KWS5476BW6G, KWS5476BW7G,


Model
KWS5476BW8G
Weighing range 30 to 3000 g [30 to 1200 g] *4
Scale interval 0.1 g [0.05 g] *4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min *4
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 45 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm 6G: 5 to 125 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 145 mm 8G: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 7 to 65 [9 to 83] m/min *4
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm
Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 6G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 153 kg 4G: 155 kg 6G: 159 kg 7G: 161 kg 8G: 163 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

524
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

525
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5577BW4D, KWS5577BW5D, KWS5577BW2E, KWS5577BW4E,


Model
KWS5577BW6D KWS5577BW5E
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
Maximum speed *1 70 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g
3 Installation and Connection

Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD


Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 95 mm 5D: 5 to 125 mm 2E: 5 to 45 mm 4E: 5 to 95 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 125 mm
Belt speed 5 to 38 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4 mm 4E:φ0.45 mm
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm


SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 135 kg 5D: 137 kg 6D: 139 kg 2E: 153 kg 4E: 155 kg 5E: 159 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

526
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

527
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5577BW2R, KWS5577BW3R, KWS5577BW4R, KWS5577BW5R,


Model
KWS5577BW6R
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
Maximum speed *1 70 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2 2R:5 to 45 mm 3R:5 to 95 mm 4R:5 to 125 mm
Height H
5R:5 to 145 mm 6R:5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 5 to 38 m/min
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm


sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 149 kg 3R: 150 kg 4R: 151 kg 5R: 153 kg 6R: 154 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

528
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

529
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5577BW2G, KWS5577BW4G, KWS5577BW6G, KWS5577BW7G,


Model
KWS5577BW8G
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
Maximum speed *1 70 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 45 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm 6G: 5 to 125 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 145 mm 8G: 5 to 175 mm
Belt speed 5 to 38 m/min
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm
Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 6G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 153 kg 4G: 155 kg 6G: 159 kg 7G: 161 kg 8G: 163 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

530
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

531
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

Model KWS5577BW4K, KWS5577BW6K, KWS5577BW7K, KWS5577BW8K


Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum speed *1 70 products/min


Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 4K:20 to 100 mm 6K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm 8K:20 to 180 mm
Product
Length L 76 to 450 mm
size *2
Height H 5 to 425 mm
Belt speed 5 to 38 m/min
Detection Fe 4K: φ0.4 mm 6K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.5 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 SUS304 4K: φ0.85 mm 6K: φ0.9 mm 7K: φ0.9 mm 8K: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4K:162 kg 6K:166 kg 7K:168 kg 8K:170 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

532
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

533
Specifications

■ SSV-f series
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5203BF3D, KWS5203BF5D, KWS5203BF2E, KWS5203BF3E,


Model KWS5203BF6D, KWS5203BP3D, KWS5203BF4E, KWS5203BP2E,
KWS5203BP5D, KWS5203BP6D KWS5203BP3E, KWS5203BP4E
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum speed *1 350 products/min


Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min
4 Maintenance

3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E:φ0.35 mm


Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E:φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

534
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

535
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5203BF2R, KWS5203BF3R, KWS5203BF4R, KWS5203BF5R,


KWS5203BF6R
Model KWS5203BP2R, KWS5203BP3R, KWS5203BP4R, KWS5203BP5R,
KWS5203BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 350 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

536
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape).Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

537
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5203BF2G, KWS5203BF3G, KWS5203BF4G


Model
KWS5203BP2G, KWS5203BP3G, KWS5203BP4G
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 350 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

538
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

539
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5205BF3D, KWS5205BF5D, KWS5205BF2E, KWS5205BF3E,


Model KWS5205BF6D, KWS5205BP3D, KWS5205BF4E, KWS5205BP2E,
KWS5205BP5D, KWS5205BP6D KWS5205BP3E, KWS5205BP4E
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 350 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

540
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

541
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5205BF2R, KWS5205BF3R, KWS5205BF4R, KWS5205BF5R,


KWS5205BF6R
Model KWS5205BP2R, KWS5205BP3R, KWS5205BP4R, KWS5205BP5R,
KWS5205BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 350 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

542
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

543
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5205BF2G, KWS5205BF3G, KWS5205BF4G


Model
KWS5205BP2G, KWS5205BP3G, KWS5205BP4G
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 350 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

544
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

545
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5205BF3K, KWS5205BF4K, KWS5205BF5K, KWS5205BF7K,


KWS5205BF8K
Model KWS5205BP3K, KWS5205BP4K, KWS5205BP5K, KWS5205BP7K,
KWS5205BP8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 6 to 600 g


Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 350 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 58 to 230 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

546
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

547
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5206BF3D, KWS5206BF5D, KWS5206BF2E, KWS5206BF3E,


Model KWS5206BF6D, KWS5206BP3D, KWS5206BF4E, KWS5206BP2E,
KWS5206BP5D, KWS5206BP6D KWS5206BP3E, KWS5206BP4E
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 310 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

548
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

549
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5206BF2R, KWS5206BF3R, KWS5206BF4R, KWS5206BF5R,


KWS5206BF6R
Model KWS5206BP2R, KWS5206BP3R, KWS5206BP4R, KWS5206BP5R,
KWS5206BP6R
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.05 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product Length L 58 to 310 mm
size *2 2R:5 to 50 mm 3R:5 to 80 mm 4R:5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R:5 to 150 mm 6R:5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

550
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

551
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5206BF2G, KWS5206BF3G, KWS5206BF4G


Model
KWS5206BP2G, KWS5206BP3G, KWS5206BP4G
Weighing range 6 to 600 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 160 mm
Product
Length L 58 to 310 mm
size *2
Height H 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

552
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

553
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5206BF3K, KWS5206BF4K, KWS5206BF5K, KWS5206BF7K,


KWS5206BF8K
Model KWS5206BP3K, KWS5206BP4K, KWS5206BP5K, KWS5206BP7K,
KWS5206BP8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 6 to 600 g


Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 604.5 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 58 to 310 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

554
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

555
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5411BF3D, KWS5411BF5D, KWS5411BF2E, KWS5411BF3E,


Model KWS5411BF6D, KWS5411BP3D, KWS5411BF5E, KWS5411BP2E,
KWS5411BP5D, KWS5411BP6D KWS5411BP3E, KWS5411BP5E
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Belt speed 15 to 94 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35 mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 100 kg 5D: 102 kg 6D: 103 kg 2E: 114 kg 3E: 114 kg 5E: 116 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

556
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

557
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5411BF2R, KWS5411BF3R, KWS5411BF4R, KWS5411BF5R,


KWS5411BF6R
Model KWS5411BP2R, KWS5411BP3R, KWS5411BP4R, KWS5411BP5R,
KWS5411BP6R
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 94 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 111 kg 3R: 110 kg 4R: 113 kg 5R: 115 kg 6R: 116 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

558
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

559
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5411BF2G, KWS5411BF3G, KWS5411BF4G, KWS5411BF5G,


KWS5411BF7G, KWS5411BF8G
Model KWS5411BP2G, KWS5411BP3G, KWS5411BP4G, KWS5411BP5G,
KWS5411BP7G, KWS5411BP8G
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 230 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 5G: 5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 94 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 5G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm 5G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 114 kg 3G: 114 kg 4G: 115 kg 2G: 116 kg 3G: 118 kg 4G: 119 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

560
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

561
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5411BF3K, KWS5411BF4K, KWS5411BF5K, KWS5411BF7K,


KWS5411BF8K
Model KWS5411BP3K, KWS5411BP4K, KWS5411BP5K, KWS5411BP7K,
KWS5411BP8K
3 Installation and Connection

Weighing range 12 to 3000 g


Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
size *2 Length L 65 to 230 mm
4 Maintenance

Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 94 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:121 kg 4K:122 kg 5K:123 kg 7K:125 kg 8K:126 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

562
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

563
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5412BF3D, KWS5412BF5D, KWS5412BF2E, KWS5412BF3E,


Model KWS5412BF6D, KWS5412BP3D, KWS5412BF5E, KWS5412BP2E,
KWS5412BP5D, KWS5412BP6D KWS5412BP3E, KWS5412BP5E
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 310 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35 mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 101 kg 5D: 103 kg 6D: 104 kg 2E: 115 kg 3E: 115 kg 5E: 116 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

564
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

565
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5412BF2R, KWS5412BF3R, KWS5412BF4R, KWS5412BF5R,


KWS5412BF6R
Model KWS5412BP2R, KWS5412BP3R, KWS5412BP4R, KWS5412BP5R,
KWS5412BP6R
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 310 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R:φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 112 kg 3R: 111 kg 4R: 114 kg 5R: 116 kg 6R: 117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

566
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

567
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5412BF2G, KWS5412BF3G, KWS5412BF4G, KWS5412BF5G,


KWS5412BF7G, KWS5412BF8G
Model KWS5412BP2G, KWS5412BP3G, KWS5412BP4G, KWS5412BP5G,
KWS5412BP7G, KWS5412BP8G
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 310 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 5G: 5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 5G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm 5G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 115 kg 3G: 115 kg 4G: 116 kg 2G: 117 kg 3G: 119 kg 4G: 120 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

568
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

569
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5412BF3K, KWS5412BF4K, KWS5412BF5K, KWS5412BF7K,


KWS5412BF8K
Model
3 Installation and Connection

KWS5412BP3K, KWS5412BP4K, KWS5412BP5K, KWS5412BP7K,


KWS5412BP8K
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 320 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

size *2 Length L 65 to 310 mm


Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:122 kg 4K:123 kg 5K:124 kg 7K:126 kg 8K:127 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
5 Appendix

Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)


Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

570
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

571
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5414BF3D, KWS5414BF5D, KWS5414BF2E, KWS5414BF3E,


Model KWS5414BF6D, KWS5414BP3D, KWS5414BF5E, KWS5414BP2E,
KWS5414BP5D, KWS5414BP6D KWS5414BP3E, KWS5414BP5E
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35 mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.7 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 102 kg 5D: 104 kg 6D: 105 kg 2E: 116 kg 3E: 116 kg 5E: 118 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

572
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

573
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5414BF2R, KWS5414BF3R, KWS5414BF4R, KWS5414BF5R,


KWS5414BF6R
Model KWS5414BP2R, KWS5414BP3R, KWS5414BP4R, KWS5414BP5R,
KWS5414BP6R
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 113 kg 3R: 112 kg 4R: 115 kg 5R: 117 kg 6R: 118 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

574
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

575
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5414BF2G, KWS5414BF3G, KWS5414BF4G, KWS5414BF5G,


KWS5414BF7G, KWS5414BF8G
Model KWS5414BP2G, KWS5414BP3G, KWS5414BP4G, KWS5414BP5G,
KWS5414BP7G, KWS5414BP8G
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 250 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 5G: 5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 5G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm 5G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 116 kg 3G: 116 kg 4G: 117 kg 5G: 118 kg 7G: 120 kg 8G: 121 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

576
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

577
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5414BF3K, KWS5414BF4K, KWS5414BF5K, KWS5414BF7K,


KWS5414BF8K
Model
3 Installation and Connection

KWS5414BP3K, KWS5414BP4K, KWS5414BP5K, KWS5414BP7K,


KWS5414BP8K
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 220 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.2 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
3K:20 to 80 mm 4K:20 to 100 mm 5K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm
Width W
Product 8K:20 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

size *2 Length L 65 to 450 mm


Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:123 kg 4K:124 kg 5K:125 kg 7K:127 kg 8K:128 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
5 Appendix

Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)


Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

578
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

579
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5416BF4D, KWS5416BF5D, KWS5416BF2E, KWS5416BF4E,


Model KWS5416BF6D, KWS5416BP4D, KWS5416BF5E, KWS5416BP2E,
KWS5416BP5D, KWS5416BP6D KWS5416BP4E, KWS5416BP5E
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 210 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 350 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 100 mm 5D: 5 to 130 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4 mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 126 kg 5D: 128 kg 6D: 129 kg 2E: 144 kg 4E: 146 kg 5E: 150 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

580
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

581
Specifications

KWS5416BF R H
KWS5416BP R 50 KWS5416B 2R
100 KWS5416B 3R
345 Belt width

130 KWS5416B 4R

820
1 Basic Operations

350

150 KWS5416B 5R
180 KWS5416B 6R
1205
Tower Light (Option)
Printer
(Option)
185

300 153

Indicator

236
Metal Detector
400
Flow direction
670

30 dia. Weigh conveyor

900
Roller
25 dia.

1370 to 1520
Roller
H
Line heights
700 to 850
2 Advanced Operations

405
M20

Leg spacing
60 dia. 645 50
685
280 820 105
Leg spacing

Units: mm

KWS5416BF2R, KWS5416BF3R, KWS5416BF4R, KWS5416BF5R,


KWS5416BF6R
Model KWS5416BP2R, KWS5416BP3R, KWS5416BP4R, KWS5416BP5R,
KWS5416BP6R
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 210 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 350 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 100 mm 4R: 5 to 130 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 140 kg 3R: 141 kg 4R: 142 kg 5R: 144 kg 6R: 145 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

582
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

583
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5416BF2G, KWS5416BF4G, KWS5416BF6G, KWS5416BF7G,


KWS5416BF8G
Model KWS5416BP2G, KWS5416BP4G, KWS5416BP6G, KWS5416BP7G,
KWS5416BP8G
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 210 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 350 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 6G: 5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 5G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 144 kg 4G: 146 kg 5G: 150 kg 7G: 152 kg 8G: 154 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

584
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

585
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5417BF4D, KWS5417BF5D, KWS5417BF2E, KWS5417BF4E,


Model KWS5417BF6D, KWS5417BP4D, KWS5417BF5E, KWS5417BP2E,
KWS5417BP5D, KWS5417BP6D KWS5417BP4E, KWS5417BP5E
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
Scale interval 0.1 g
Maximum speed *1 170 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 100 mm 5D: 5 to 130 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4 mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 130 kg 5D: 132 kg 6D: 133 kg 2E: 148 kg 4E: 150 kg 5E: 154 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

586
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

587
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5417BF2R, KWS5417BF3R, KWS5417BF4R, KWS5417BF5R,


KWS5417BF6R
Model KWS5417BP2R, KWS5417BP3R, KWS5417BP4R, KWS5417BP5R,
KWS5417BP6R
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 170 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 100 mm 4R: 5 to 130 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 144 kg 3R: 145 kg 4R: 146 kg 5R: 148 kg 6R: 149 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

588
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

589
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5417BF2G, KWS5417BF4G, KWS5417BF6G, KWS5417BF7G,


KWS5417BF8G
Model KWS5417BP2G, KWS5417BP4G, KWS5417BP6G, KWS5417BP7G,
KWS5417BP8G
Weighing range 12 to 3000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.1 g


Maximum speed *1 170 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±0.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 3009 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 65 to 450 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 6G: 5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 15 to 91 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 5G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 148 kg 4G: 150 kg 5G: 154 kg 7G: 156 kg 8G: 158 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

590
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

591
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5522BF4D, KWS5522BF5D, KWS5522BF2E, KWS5522BF4E,


Model KWS5522BF6D, KWS5522BP4D, KWS5522BF5E, KWS5522BP2E,
KWS5522BP5D, KWS5522BP6D KWS5522BP4E, KWS5522BP5E
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
Maximum speed *1 130 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 79 to 350 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 100 mm 5D: 5 to 130 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Belt speed 5 to 56 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D:φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4 mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D:φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 130 kg 5D: 132 kg 6D: 133 kg 2E: 148 kg 4E: 150 kg 5E: 154 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

592
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

593
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5522BF2R, KWS5522BF3R, KWS5522BF4R, KWS5522BF5R,


KWS5522BF6R
Model KWS5522BP2R, KWS5522BP3R, KWS5522BP4R, KWS5522BP5R,
KWS5522BP6R
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.5 g


Maximum speed *1 130 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 79 to 350 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 100 mm 4R: 5 to 130 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 5 to 56 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 144 kg 3R: 145 kg 4R: 146 kg 5R: 148 kg 6R: 149 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

594
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

595
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5522BF2G, KWS5522BF4G, KWS5522BF6G, KWS5522BF7G,


KWS5522BF8G
Model KWS5522BP2G, KWS5522BP4G, KWS5522BP6G, KWS5522BP7G,
KWS5522BP8G
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.5 g


Maximum speed *1 130 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 79 to 350 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 6G: 5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 5 to 56 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 5G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 148 kg 4G: 150 kg 5G: 154 kg 7G: 156 kg 8G: 158 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

596
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

597
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5524BF4D, KWS5524BF5D, KWS5524BF2E, KWS5524BF4E,


Model KWS5524BF6D, KWS5524BP4D, KWS5524BF5E, KWS5524BP2E,
KWS5524BP5D, KWS5524BP6D KWS5524BP4E, KWS5524BP5E
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
Maximum speed *1 110 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 79 to 450 mm
size *2 4D: 5 to 100 mm 5D: 5 to 130 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Belt speed 5 to 60 m/min
4D: φ0.5 mm 5D: φ0.6 mm 2E: φ0.4 mm 4E: φ0.45 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

Detection 6D: φ0.7 mm 5E: φ0.5 mm


sensitivity*3 4D: φ0.9 mm 5D: φ1.0 mm 2E: φ0.8 mm 4E: φ0.85 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4D: 134 kg 5D: 136 kg 6D: 137 kg 2E: 152 kg 4E: 154 kg 5E: 158 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

598
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

599
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5524BF2R, KWS5524BF3R, KWS5524BF4R, KWS5524BF5R,


KWS5524BF6R
Model KWS5524BP2R, KWS5524BP3R, KWS5524BP4R, KWS5524BP5R,
KWS5524BP6R
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.5 g


Maximum speed *1 110 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 79 to 450 mm
size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 100 mm 4R: 5 to 130 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

Belt speed 5 to 60 m/min


2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.8 mm 3R: φ0.85 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2R: 148 kg 3R: 149 kg 4R: 150 kg 5R: 152 kg 6R: 153 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

600
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

601
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5524BF2G, KWS5524BF4G, KWS5524BF6G, KWS5524BF7G,


KWS5524BF8G
Model KWS5524BP2G, KWS5524BP4G, KWS5524BP6G, KWS5524BP7G,
KWS5524BP8G
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
3 Installation and Connection

Scale interval 0.5 g


Maximum speed *1 110 products/min
Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 350 mm
Product Length L 79 to 450 mm
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 6G: 5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm 8G: 5 to 180 mm
Belt speed 5 to 60 m/min
4 Maintenance

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm


Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 5G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 152 kg 4G: 154 kg 5G: 158 kg 7G: 160 kg 8G: 162 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix

Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).

602
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

603
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations

KWS5524BF4K, KWS5524BF6K, KWS5524BF7K, KWS5524BF8K,


Model
KWS5524BP4K, KWS5524BP6K, KWS5524BP7K, KWS5524BP8K
Weighing range 60 to 6000 g
Scale interval 0.5 g
Maximum speed *1 110 products/min
3 Installation and Connection

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 ±1.5 g


Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 6018 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 4K:20 to 100 mm 6K:20 to 120 mm 7K:20 to 150 mm 8K:20 to 180 mm
Product
Length L 79 to 450 mm
size *2
Height H 5 to 430 mm
Belt speed 5 to 60 m/min
Detection Fe 4K: φ0.4 mm 6K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.5 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 4K: φ0.85 mm 6K: φ0.9 mm 7K: φ0.9 mm 8K: φ1.0 mm
4 Maintenance

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4K:161 kg 6K:165 kg 7K:167 kg 8K:169 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix

604
Specifications

*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign

1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.

2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

605
Copyright, etc.
Copyright, etc.

iWnn © OMRON SOFTWARE Co., Ltd. 2008-2011 All Right Reserved.


1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

606
CE Conformity Marking
CE Conformity Marking

CE Conformity Marking
The CE conformity marking is affixed to Anritsu products to indicate that they conform to
the MD, LVD, and EMC directives of the European Union (EU).

1 Basic Operations
CE marking

Check the following to see whether your equipment meets the Council Directive or not.
- The CE conformity marking on the product
- Attached ‘CE Declaration of Conformity’

2 Advanced Operations
The following directives are applied:
Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive (MD)
Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Directive 2004/108/EC EMC Directive (EMC)

The following standards are applied:


EN 60204-1: 2006 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part

3 Installation and Connection


1: General requirements
EN 61000-6-4: 2007 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-4: Generic
standards - Emission Standards for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-2: 2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-2: Generic
standards - Immunity for industrial environments

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix

607
Document No.:
84W246053-14
April 2021 15th Edition
Inner Pages Printed on Recycled Paper.
Printed in Japan
Operation Manual Checkweigher SSV Series B Type with Metal Detector

You might also like